Adobe Photoshop - Up to Speed

1. Photoshop Course Introduction: Well, hello and welcome to Adobe Photoshop up to speed. So Photoshop is Adobe is powerful image editing application that is in an all in one solution for your image editing means Photoshop is included with the full Creative Cloud subscription or can be subscribe to as a standalone application or included with the photography package, which includes Photoshop or Lightroom and Adobe Bridge. Now as new features are added to Photoshop, I'll be updating this class, but if he changes or additions to the application. So in this course we're going to dive deeply into the many features of Photoshop, reading, step-by-step tutorials and downloadable lesson file so that you can work alone. You're gonna start by examining the Photoshop environment, will look at the toolbar, photoshops panels, the Options bar. That's what was learned, how to efficiently move around in Photoshop. Well then work with colors and painting in which she'll work with the color picker, the Swatches palette, and the colour panel. We'll also apply colors using the brush tool, the gradient tool, and photoshops handy eyedropper tool. Then we're going to take a deep dive into using photoshops, many editing tools. You'll learn how to erase Parsons ever an image using the eraser tool and the background tool, create interesting effects with the pattern stamp tool, remove and repairing image using the clone stamp tool are the Healing Brush Tool, this Spot Healing Brush 12, the color we placed the news tool and photoshops impressive content L where Phil technology, well also darken enlightened areas of damage juicing the Dodge and Burn and this punch tools. Next we're going to learn how to select an area of an image using Photoshop selection tools. We'll be working with the marquee tool. So that's so tools, the magic one tools and the tools. Additionally, we'll learn how to feather and modify selections, how to select areas by focus area and color range, and even how to save your selections, you can load them again later on. What truly makes Photoshop powerful though, is done layers future, and that's what we'll work with next. He learned how to create select, Delete, Link merge layers and as well as modify their capacity unlocked layers from edited. Additionally, you'll learn how to adjustment layers, fill errors and how to align layer contents, yellow colored cloud layers, rename layers, create layer comps, and even auto bled layer contents. Then there'll be good adjusting images. And here you're learning how to read size, scale, and rotate them skew and warp them, adjust to image distortion and perspective. You placed color in a photo and even converted a photo to black and white. Well then you're good photoshops, tools to adjust brightness, contrast, hue. Saturations, shadows, and color balance in a photo will also take a look at. So photoshops Lord, vast photo editing tools such as curves and levels. Well then move on to learning how to test through your Photoshop documents using type tools together. Well, I'd type two documents for an act characters, format paragraphs, work Text, and create paragraph type. We're then going to spend a good amount of time learning how to add special effects to your images using photocells, extensive filters. And we'll start by even some of the common filters, such as br filters, brush filters, noise filters are the handshake production. Her unsharpened filters will then move on to some of the more unusual filters, such as the render filters, stylized filters touched your filters on sketched altruist. We'll also look at the highly verse a total liquefied tools with which you can pull, push, rotate, puckering, bloat errors over an image, creating some quite interesting effects. Well then spend a couple of videos working with channel masses. You don't learn how to create the modern reshaped them and how to use them. Glenn images. And then we're going to change course to bear to look at some of photoshops, productivity tools. Well add free-floating texts were adopted as using them. Notes feature, carry out an automated Seaborn sub steps using the actions, apply actions to all of the files that are specific folder, as well as learn how to rename all of the files in a folder. Additionally, we'll use guides, grids, and rulers to help us align the objects on our documents. And we'll work with quickly exporting Photoshop files to a variety of Gifford formats and dimensions. Lastly, we are going to take a deep dive into Adobe or wow, a filter for post-processing photos, which is organized into a logical and intuitive photo editing workflow soil, always know where to begin. So with camera Rob, you'll start with some basic adjustments. Charges, light hitting or darkening your images, adjusting contrasts and clarity, diode pop to your photos, and even changing the color in your images. You'll learn how to fix the image problems and issues by clumping, removing spots to avoid unwanted items from your photos, fixing white balance problems and correcting perspective issues. You'll learn how to take average photos and turn them into something truly oppressive by using was advanced tools in brushes. So as for me, my name is Roger and I will be your instructor for this course. And I have been using Photoshop way back sense around Photoshop version to not Creative Cloud Hershey into not Photoshopped version two. So I've been using it for a while and I've also been a software trader on our courseware developer for the past 20 years. And I am so excited that you've decided to take me along on your Photoshop journey. And anytime along the way, feel free to ask me questions about their cars that's made come up. So are you ready? Let's get started. 2. Before You Begin: So if you'd like to work along with me as we progress through the course, you'll need to download the class lesson files. So in the projects and resources tablet, this class, I've included a link to the file as well as instructions and how to set it up. And the file is them to Photoshop dash lesson dash files on the file is compressed in zip format. And with most modern computers, or you need to do is double-click on the file to expand its contents. The top folder is game lesson files, and you'll want to copy this to computers desktop. This folder contains all of the images that you'll be working with in Photoshop. And it also has a couple of sub-folders as well. And of course those should all be underneath that may lessen files folder. So if you have any questions at all about the lesson files, please don't hesitate to let me know. And now let's delve into the class. 3. Getting Started: Welcome to the exciting world of Adobe Photoshop. So Photoshop is a powerful graphics design in the image editing application with which you can create sophisticated and impressive graphics for the web or for print. With Photoshop, you can create, combine, modify, and enhance your digital images for print or for sharing on the internet. Photoshop contains powerful capabilities that few software programs can match. Now note that former SAP is no longer sold as a standalone package, but is now part of the Adobe Creative Cloud subscription service. But let's just say Photoshop is now only available via subscriptions through Adobe. So at this time you can subscribe to Photoshop all alone, subscribed to the photographer package, which includes Photoshop or Lightroom, or subscribe to the entire Creative Cloud Suite. Now what's nice about this new business model is that you no longer have to wait a year or even longer for Photoshop Updates. Photoshop is updated on a regular basis, meaning that shoe now always have the latest version. So once you download the application from Adobe's site, the first time you launch heads, you'll be prompted to enter in your user credentials, your username and password. And then you're ready to begin using the application. To launch Photoshop, you would open it just as you would any other application. So on a Mac, you would open the Applications folder. So if I click finder here and navigates to applications, a double-click Adobe Photoshop 20-20, and then which is the version I'm using at this time. And then double-click on the application icon to launch it. It's a method for opening Photoshop. If you're using Windows will vary depending on which version of Windows you're using. With most recent versions of Windows, you can access the application from your start menu and then there'll be an application's area from which the Kindle launch Photoshop. If you purchase Photoshop as part of the Adobe Creative Suite package, that the application may be located on the Via Adobe CC folder. So the next video, we'll take a look at the Photoshop start screen. 4. A Look at the Start Screen: When Photoshop opens, this Start screen displays, and that's the screen that we have here on my screen. The start screen will display a thumbnail of the last 20 images that you've opened, and they'll display on the lower part of the screen here we can see that I have for images that I've recently opened. This allows you to quickly access and image that you've recently worked on. You can change how many images displays on the start screen from the file handling area, Photoshop preferences to access that you choose. Photoshop preferences are if you're using Windows, you would choose Edit Preferences and then click on File Handling. And The Butler was creamy. See recent file is contains. And here you can enter the number of recent files you want to display. And the maximum allowable number is 100, so you can display the last 100 photos that she worked on. So I'm going to cancel out of here. Now if you don't see this creed, you wanna make sure that you take home here in the left pane because there are a couple of other screens that we can access as well. I won't say home. Now you can change the sort order every image thumbnails if you have a lot of them, by clicking the list next to sort and choosing how you want to sort. Options include recent, which will display the most recent images first, sort alphabetically by name, size, and by kind. In addition to the sort order can also choose to display the recently opened files list and neither thumbnail or ListView, sir, right now we see my images are displayed in thumbnail view. And the icons, the change data right over here. So rightmost icon is thumbnail view, and the icon to the left of it is ListView. And now our recently open file list is displayed as a list. So if you have a large list of files, are many files here that you've recently opened that are displayed, could filter your list by words in the file name. To do so, you wanted to click in the box next to the word filter ear, the typing the word by which you want your filter. So if I had typed in the House, only the lighted house image would display. Let me highlight that again. And this time I'm going to type in sky. And there's time order the Dark Sky image displayed for just a quick way of accessing specific images from your file list. You could also display files that you've sync with Lightroom Mobile by clicking Lightroom photos over here in the left pane. These are all the images I've sync for that Lightroom Mobile. If you'd like to check out some of the available tutorials for Adobe applications. Click unlearned in the left pane. And from here I could access several hands-on tutorials as well as tutorials on the web. So for instance, we see are using colour, how to combine images in Photoshop, adding text and shapes, we touching images, et cetera, slave. I wanna spend some time browsing through year for some extra tutorials. So let's go back to the home screen. So to create a new Photoshop document, click the New button in the left pane, or to open an existing file. Click Open and then navigate to the folder where the file is located. Whenever you're working on a file, the starts carried well close. So let me remove this filter that they have here. And I'm going to click on the image named Bell in a basket. And notice that the start screen has not been closed or into the main photoshop interface. If I close this image about choosing File Close, That will bring us back to that start screen, right? If you don't want a list of most reason files displayed, You can choose file for the menu, point to open recent, and then choose clear reason file list. And that will remove all files from the recent file list. I don't want to do that right now. And that's clip this belly and a basket image again. Now note that you don't have to close the Photoshop interface to return back to the start screen, could do sort of any time by clicking the little home icon, and that's in the upper left corner of our window here. So if I click on that, brings us back to the start screen. To return back to the Photoshop interface, I'm going to click the ps icon, which is the Photoshop POD, kind of brings us back to the image that we had open. So I'm gonna close as imaged by choosing File Close from the menu to bring us back to the start screen. So let's work on this together. Server falling along and let's check the Create New button. The left pane. This displays the New Document window. And we're going to look at this and much more in depth in a later lesson. But for now we'll click on photo on top of the window. And then we'll click the first option, the first row, which is the Default Photoshop Size of seven by five inches. So click on that and then click Create. And we've now just created our first Photoshop document. 5. Learning the Interface: When you create a new document or open-ended existing documented Photoshop, you will see this interface has displayed on a screen. So the left side here is the Tools panel, formerly called the toolbox, and it's a long vertical bar docked for the left side of our screen. The Tools panel contains tools that you use to create an edit documents. There are tools for selecting images, painting on images, and adding Type two documents just to name a few long bar top here is the Options bar. The Options bar is Context-Sensitive, Displays Pacific Options for the tool that you selected. For each tour, I select here the options on the Options bar will change depending on the tool. For instance, if I activate the brush tool and the options buyer will only display options for the brush tool, such as Brush type of brush settings, brush capacity, et cetera. Escape out of here. And I click the double arrows to close this panel. So the center area is the image preview area or the document window where the image that you're working on is displayed. So let me open an image here. So if I do File Open reason didn't, I'll choose that Bella and a basket image. You can see that if the image is displayed in the center area of our screen, this error is also sometimes referred to as the R2 Board or the canvas. And the adjustments that you make to your image or document or reflected in this area. On the right side of the screen of the Photoshop panels, previously referred to as palettes. And the older versions of Photoshop panels are small, movable windows that are used to modify and monitor images, panelists, content easy access to many Photoshop commands. And you can add or remove panels as you wish. They display the ones that you use the most throughout a panel click window on the menu and then choose the name of the panel from the list. So if I wanted to display the brushes Cano, I wouldn't think brushes. And now our brushes panel is displayed. And again, I'll click the WHO's who to close that panel. Now the duck is the dark grey container located on the edge of our screen that could hold one or more panels. So the dock over here is a holy all of these panels, we also have a dock over here, the left side of your screen that contains our Tools panel. So our default workspace, which includes a layover doc for our panels of the toolbar, the Options bar is called the essentials workspace. There are also other predefined workspaces that you can set. To do so we click on a window, then printed workspace where you see all the available workspaces. We have 3D, motion painting, photography. So feel mainly use Photoshop for editing funnels that you might want to display the photography workspace. So default workspace is the Essentials workspace. I'm going to click on essentials to return back to that workspace. Because still make changes to a workspace anywhere you want. I can do drag my pallets are on. I'm going to go over that in another video. I could hide pellets, remove pelts from my window. And you can always go back to the original default workspace by choosing a Window Workspace and reset essentials. This restores that original default workspace. So if you're following along and let's do the same thing on your screen. So we're all starting off on the same page. So we're going to choose a window onto workspace, and then we're going to choose Reset essentials from their menu. So remember, you can always return to this data anytime by resetting the essentials workspace. 6. Opening an Existing File: Opening an existing Photoshop file works the same way as opening files and other applications. Select file open from the menu and then navigate to the folder where the father taught to open is located. Can also use a command 0 keystroke combination of using a Mac or Control 0, using Windows, or then navigates to the file. So when you open a file and photo shop is displayed inside of a window frame that you have here. And those are the default setup. And if you open it more than one file, each file is placed in a separate tab. So his first tab here on the upper left corner of your screen named untitled. This was that blank document that we created in an earlier video. The next tab is that file that it opened up. So every fell into open will be placed in its own tab. Now if you don't want your images to be displayed in an application frame, choose window, application frame from the menu. And now all the images are in a free-floating window. So photoshop no longer has that application window to which we Docker images. But I prefer my images to be the application frames. I'm going to choose a window application frame from the menu. And then you go back to the image of the dog here. And the governor windows. You can move the window by clicking on the title bar, then dragging to the new location under screen, I can move my window around here to resize an image Window, Movie mouse pitcher over the edge of the window and then dre. So yeah, if I'm bringing in the upper right corner of the image and drag down, I'm resizing down this window. And I can drag the, any of the edges besides it any, whether r one, so the bottom center and resize it by drinking up or down are clearly the corners and drag it and out to resize it both horizontally and vertically. So let's all work together to expand this window rents or when I move my window up to the right curve, thereby screen click of the lower red corner, then drag downward until my window froze up the entire screen. So let's work on this together, sort of reforming the law. You want to click file and click Open in the menu. And we wanted to navigate to the lesson files folder on our desktop. So we'll click desktop in the left pane and this should be the same whether you're using Windows or Mac. We want to think of the lesson files forward. If we want to scroll down until we see the image name to see golf as a JPEG. So click on that image and then click open. Now we see that we have three open tabs that are Photoshop window. Now one thing about it, I mentioned about images in Photoshop, if there are two main types of computer graphics, bitmap and vector. Now bitmap images, which are also called raster images, use a small grid of colors known as pixels. The sharpness of an image depends on the number of pixels in it. And the pixel is the smallest unit of measurement of resolution. So the more pixels in an image for sharper the display. So the size of the image under screen is determined by the number of pixels along the height and the width of the image, as well as the monitors setting. The resolution of an image depends on the number of pixels that print per inch. Thus, the higher the resolution, the more on smaller pixels there are bitmap images, our resolution dependent. So because they contain a fixed number of pixels, they can lose detail or appear J good if they're scaled to a different size or a printed at a lower resolution, and they were created for. Now, vector graphics, on the other hand, are not made of pixels, but rather consists of lines and curves defined by mathematical objects called vectors. These are considered resolution independent of graphics, that is to say, that could be scaled to any size without losing their clarity. So I just wanted to mention that it takes you come across the term bitmap and vector. 7. Using Guides Grids and Rulers: So this video, we're going to work with guides, grids, and rulers. So if you'd like to follow along, you want to open the image named polar underscore br dot PTSD. And that's a Photoshop document located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So Guides, grids in rulers help you to create a position the items more precisely in your document. So rulers appear at the top and left sides of your image window and help you determine specific distances. We don't see the rulers want to choose View rulers from the menu. Or it can also use the command-and-control are keystroke combination snores. If I click this, that the rulers from the top and sides disappears. So let's bring those back. So view rulers from the menu. As you move your mouse pointer over an image, a white line appears in the horizontal and vertical ruler indicating the position of your cursor. So if we look at the horizontal ruler on top of our screen, we can see as I'm moved by most Pinter, the white line moves across our ruler. And if we also, if you're looking at the left side of our screen up the vertical ruler, we can see that the wire line moves up and down as I drag. And you can change the unit of measure by right-clicking on either of the rulers, choosing the desired unit of measurement from the list. So as we can see right now, it's set to pixels. If it wanted to trigger two inches, I would just inches from the list, and now our ruler is set to inches. You could also add guides to document, and guides are non-printable, vertical or horizontal lines that you can add to help you in aligning the elements of your image. So guides can be positioned anywhere in your image window by activating the Move tool, which you can activate by click this first icon in the toolbar, tapping the V key on your keyboard and then clicking and dragging the guide to the new position. So the one of the auto horizontal guide to my document, I would click on the horizontal ruler and then dreg downward, and then release my mouse button at the location where I want to drop my guide. Let me undo that. And the same goes for a vertical guide. I click on the vertical ruler and then drink to the right until the guide is where you live, and then release your mouse button as you positioned in most project over a guy because either a pointer transforms into a double line as a vertical or horizontal with an arrow through it, depending on whether you're working with horizontal guide or a vertical guide. And when this transformation occurs, you can click and drag to reposition the guy on your document to delete a guide, or you need to do is click on the guide and then drag it off the image window and wish the guide has gone. If you have a whole bunch of guides on your document and you want to get rid of all of them at once. Choose View. Clear Guides for the menu that removes all guides that you've added to your document. You can also add grids to your Photoshop documents. And grids are non printing lines that make your image look like. It's made up of tiny squares. Think of a grid graph paper, for example. So by default, the gridlines are hidden from view, but you could display them by choosing View from the menu, pointing to show, and then click on grid. And now we see we have a grid dissipated in our document. You can change the size and color of these grid lines from Photoshop preferences. So if you're using a Mac, you would choose Photoshop preferences are added preferences of using windows, and then click on guides, grids and slices. So here we can modify the sizer grids or grid line every one inch, every two inches, et cetera. So if I did two inches here, and you could also change the color of your guides and grids in slices. So for tech, ok, now we see we have a much larger gridded our document. So let me turn off the grid so we're choose View, show, click on grid for the menu, and that removes the grid from our document. So let's work on this together a little bit. So for falling alone, first of all, you want to ensure that your unit of measure is set to inches. So let's right-click or the vertical ruler heritage was inches from the list. So let's click anywhere on this vertical line here and the vertical ruler and his drink to the right. And that's drag until I guide is a two inch mark and we can see the two inch mark and the horizontal ruler. So then will release the mouse button. Now we're going to click anywhere on the horizontal rule or we're going to break down and that's drag down until I got is about after seven inch mark. So once it's there were released her mouse button. So now we have a horizontal guide at the seven inch mark and a vertical guide of the two inch mark. That's sort of another are vertical grid. So I'll click again on the vertical ruler and then drag to the right. And that's drag this to about. Let's go to the four-inch marker, the horizontal ruler, and then we will release the mouse button. You can also TAG OR snap the elements on your Photoshop document to the gridlines guides are the edges of the document. By using the snap to feature, to activate it, click View in the menu and then click on snap. Another feature is activated. So once you've activated the snap feature, you can then select what the elements will snap to, whether that be our guys grid lines, layout slices, or document bounds for the menu. So we choose view point to snap to. And from here you make your selections. So let's click on guides for them from the menu here. And this turns of the snap tip guides feature. So objects will now talk or snap to the guides as you position them on the image window. So to see how this works, if the learners petal here, let's click on the layer deemed polar bear ice cream. They want to tap the 70K here a keyboard to activate the Move tool. And now in our image window, let's drag the polar bear ice cream layer, which is this text layer on top of our image. And let's drag it to the left. A big As soon as I drag it snaps to that grid at the two inch mark. So if I drag it here to the left, we can see that it kind of snaps to that. We can see it's also snapping to the grid lines which we have hidden. Several. Snap this back to the two h-bar here. And as you're dragging us guided the forage market, let's get rid of this guide. So a clicker and it is drag it off of the image window and wash it is done. So that is using guides, grids, and rulers. 8. Using the Status Bar: When an image is opened, Photoshop displays information above the active document on the status bar, which is located on the bottom of the image window. This is the status bar here, this gray bar in the bottom of our window. On the bottom left corner of the status bar, the Kurdish Zoom percentage is displayed, which you can change by typing over the existing values of a selected 50%. And I typed in 75 and then tapped return image is now displayed as seventy-five percent zoom level. Let's go back to select seventy-five percent of our window type in 50 and they'll be tap which further renter on our keyboard. Next to this we see the document size which is displayed in pixels. So here as size of this document is 4928 by 3264. So Avila document sizes displayed here. Now we can change what is displayed on the status bar by default, by clicking the right pointing arrow and then choosing what we want to display on a status bar. So if I chose documents sizes here, the document size is displayed in kilobytes. So the first volume of the left side of the slash disk represents the flange size of the image and the value on the right side of the slash represents the size of the opened file. I've received many other options that we can display here. Measurements, scale, scratch sizes, efficiency, timing, et cetera. So if I clicked on Kurds tool here, it says Penn and that's this null, which tool is active at the moment? So if I clicked on the first tool in the tool bar here, which is the Move tool. We see that that option changes to move the status bar. Let's click this again, and this time I'll choose measurement scale. This displays the current measurement scale of the image. So I'll put a list of all these options of what they do on our screen. So you cannot, so you can pause the video and copy them down or take a screenshot if you like. So let's play with this a little bit together. So let's suck the occured Zoom percentage in the box that's typing 100. So we'll type in 100 and a little box and then temperature or enter on your keyboard. And now photoshop displays the image at 100% of its size or full size. That's outrageous to 75. So click Zoom percentage again, type is 75 and then tap Enter, and that changes. The Zoom percentage is 75. So now let's click on the status bar dropdown arrow. We're going to choose efficiency from the list. And there's just pays a percentage value representing how efficient Photoshop is based on RAM and disk space. Let's take the air, right, particular Organa, we're going to choose current tool this time. Right now, I have my move tool active years by say something different depending on which tool that you have activated in their toolbox. And that's chairman's the Zoom percentage this time, but change it to 30 percents or types of 30 and the zoom box and the temperature are Enter. And now our image is displayed at 3%. For the next video, we're going to start working with the tools panel. 9. Using the Tools Panel: But photoshop launches the Tools panel, which was formerly called the toolbox, appears on the left side of the screen. So each tool on the Tools panel is represented by an icon that you click to activate that specific tool. The Tools panel contains everything that you'll need to work with images in Photoshop. And this includes tools that allow you to type, select page, draw, edit, view, and annotated documents. Other tools are the tools parallel you to change the foreground and background color and work in different modes, such as tattered mode, maximized mode, full-screen mode of fullscreen with Menu bar. Note that once you select a tool, it remains active until you select another tool. Now by default, Photoshop displays a single column Tools panel, which we see displayed here, integrates all of the tool icons are displayed in one single column under screen. If you prefer, a two column Tools panel, clicks a double arrow icon on top of the tools panel. I'll because see that that switched it to a dual column display. But I prefer a single communists. So I'm gonna take the double arrow again and now we're back to a single column display. Now note that some of the tools and the tools panel are hidden and you could tell which icons contain hidden tools. And that's nominal triangle on the lower right corner of the icon to display hidden tools. Other click on the i, kinda hold down your vows until the little menu appears. Or right-click on the icon, just displace all of the available tools in that icon. So if I click on the gradient icon here and right-click, we see that it goes that this icon contains three tools total. Whenever you hover your cursor over the tools, the tools panel, he'll get a rich tooltip complete with image. Sorry, nor was it ever does. I'm moving my mouse pointer over the tools, displays a brief example of what the tool does, along with an image. If you find this sonority which have, which I personally do, you can disable it from Photoshop preferences. So let's do that. So you want to choose Photoshop preferences, event, click on Tools. And we want to uncheck the Show rich tooltips checkbox. And then looks like ok. So now when I move my cursor over the icons that no longer displays, but for a shovel still despair tool tip letting us know what that icon does. So be moved my mouse pointer over this second tika for the top. And here we see rectangular marquee tool is active. For right-click on the icon, we can see the other marquee tools that are hidden. Now what's nice about the tools powers they can customize it to your liking, such as removing tools for the tools parallelly, you rarely use or changing their group in which a tool resides. So to do so, if you right-click the three dots on the bottom portion of the panel here, then choose and it's toolbar, what it appears. And this displays the customize toolbar window. So if there were tools that you know, you never use, you click out of the tool and then drag it to the extra tools area of the window. So if I know that I'll never use the art of Borda tool, I can drag this tool. Yeah, right over to the extra tools area and now it's no longer display under the Move icon. Likewise, if I'll never use the frame tool, can drag the frame told over. And now that alone Bono longer display My Tools panel. You can also move a tool from one group to another by simply clicking the tool and reading here too, the desire group. So right now I've just moved my crop tool to my Lasso Tool grew up. If you want to change the keyboard shortcut food for just double-click it than typing a new shortcut on your keyboard. I'm gonna leave this as is. So that was our w. If you even have more than one Tools panel configuration. So we're going to have what sort of tools when I'm doing design work on another set of tools when I'm working on photography for instance. So to do so, I make my changes in the window and then click on Save Preset. Thank they could provide it a name. So I could call this design preset, and then I would click save. And you can load your presets every time a clicking is load TreeSet and then choosing the precepts that you wanted to load. If we want to reset the Tools panel to its default factory settings could always click on restore default that will remove any changes that we may. So let's do that. So my click Restore Defaults and there are tools panel is as it was when Photoshop was first opened. So I'm gonna click cancel out her ear. So rather than going through each tool one-by-one and displaying a comprehensive list of other tools in Photoshop. Each tool will be introduced at the time that we work with it. But if you want to find out what a specific tool on the Tools panel does, again, move your mouse pointer over the tool. A way to to have a small yellow box appears with a tooltip telling us what the tool is. And we can see right now, this is the greatest tool to display any hidden tools. Right-click on a tool to display all tools in that tool group. Uh, one thing I wanted to mention is that each tool in a group contains a keyboard shortcut you could use to activate the tool in that group. For example, if I tap j and my keyboard, there will activate the tools in the healing budge group. Whereas L will activate the tools in their last saw group. And it was that, that icon is highlighted when I tap to L j, the Healing Brush Tools are activated. To activate the Move tool. I tap a v, And now that tool is active. Now as we mentioned, there are hidden tools. So if I type L, then only you will activate the first tool in that group, which has the lasso tool or the last tool that I used in that group to cycle through them using your keyboard, hold down the Shift key, then tap, ah, corresponding keyboard shortcut. So for the last oh, tools Olga, my shift key that is top Al. And that's what's Trevi polygonal Lasso Tool. Shift Tao again, we'll switch to the magnetic Lasso Tool. And then shifted I'll again returns us to the regular Lasso Tool, which was the first, last row in that list. So can really be a timesaver to memorize the keyboard shortcuts for those tools that you most use. So let's work on this together. So we want to move our mouse pointer over the second tool of the tools panel. And then we'll wait a moment until rectangular marquee tool displays. Now let's right-click on the last. So tour groups or bouba most perjured over last. So tools and we'll right-click that displays that hidden menu with all of the Lasso Tools to hide the menu we tap escaped her keyboard. So let's do that for tap the escape key that hides the menu. So now let's switch our Tools panel to do a column view. So a tap the rights printing double arrow on top of the panel. And now we have the dual column view. We'll click on the double arrow again to switch it to single column. Do. So now let's customize our tools panels. So remember to do that, we right-click on the three dots in the Tools Panel and then she was at its toolbar, Gregor scroll bar all the way down to see the Zoom tool, that's Gregor zoom tool to the extra tools were no. So what that will do is remove it from our toolbar or a Tools panel. And let's do the same thing with the hand tool. So I'll drag the hand tool. The extra tools were no, uh, now both of those tools hybrid removed from our tools candle, but that's we start toolbar to its original configuration. So I'll click Restore defaults and everything is now as it was. And let's click Done to close the customers toolbar window. 10. Using Photoshop Panels: Panels which were formally called pallets, are free floating windows that contain many helpful tools when working with images. Panels off for instant access to commands that help you work in Photoshop. Sort of display a paddle choose window from the menu, and then choose the name of the panel that you wanted to display. So for instance, to despair the history panel, we start to window, then click history, and now the History panel is displayed. Now to save screen space, panels are often grouped together. Uj panels can take more than one tab at the top of the panel, we can see this here at the very top of verse green. So a color paddle actually contains four separate panels, color, swatches, gradients, and patterns, and you switch to a paddle that clicking on its tab. You can also move a panel out of its group and into its old window by clicking in the panel tab, then dragging out of the group. And now we can see that the color panel is in its own window. To drag it back, click on the tab, move back to the group until the entire group is noted by a blue square and then release the mouse button. And now the color Pamela's NOW back in that group. I'm going to bring it a little bit to the left, to the Swatches over there. Now each panel has its own set of options to display the available options for a panel. Click the little hamburger menu on the upper right corner of the paddle. He received all the available options for that panel. So if you script the ETL hamburger menu down here for the Layers panel, you can see that we are a different set of options which are pertinent to the layers panel. So by default, petals are displayed in the panel doc. Here's a container for your panels, usually located the rice servers screen to add a panel to the dog, tick the panel and then drag it to the dock until the blue light into the darkest stronger by a blue line and then release the mouse button. And now we've added the history panel to this parallel group. And again, we can drag it out. So you drag a panel and drag it around. Blue lines appear on those locations where you can drop the panel so we can see it can, if I have a single blue, blue line on top, this will place it above that group of panels. For right now, history moved into his own window. Above this group of panels. Obviously this group is completely surrounded by a blue box, sort of a release my boss button, that pattern has been added to that group. Right now we have a blue bar on the left side of our paddle docs for released, but most budget now it added it to the left of that group of panels. Can either dock a panel on the left side of your screen by drinking it over. And now we see the blue line. Lets us know that that is an available place to darker paddle. I'll release my mouse button and the panel is now on the left side of our screen. But I want to do that. So I'm gonna click the tab again. It is, drag it into the center of our screen. And now it's a free-floating panel once again. So I'm gonna close as history pellets, I'm gonna click the hamburger menu, then choose clothes from their little menu. And look, Havel is closed. Now if you want to save screen space, you could collapse all of her dark panels Into icon with apparently by clicking on the double arrows located on the top right edge of the panel dark. So they wanted to collapses group of panels here I would click the double arrows. And now the panel has been collapsed into icons. And I can click on the icon to display that panel. And now we have the library's poem. Click the left printing double arrows now to expand that power group and cellular collapsing paddles and diet because you can also minimize a panel, but double-clicking on the panels tab. So now if I double-click on the Learn tab, this minimize the panel. In other words, it hit everything except for the pedal tab. So we're gonna do the same thing over years of Arctic swatches that his plays a paddle for double-click of the swatches tab, it collapses, that's paddle and or displays all of the tab and then just click the tab to expand it. So let me choose window and then I will choose our brushes for the menu. So if we click on the brushes tab or drag, you can see that I can drag this outside of that new group, the parallel bar group. And again, I can collapse the group just like we did over here. This saves us some screen real estate. Click again to expand it, close it will click the hamburger menu. This time we're gonna choose Close tab group, which we'll close that entire group of panels. Now you want to temporarily hide the panel dock from view, tap the Tab key on your keyboard. Notice that hides the panels as well as the toolbar. Tab again, and read displays everything. So we want to work on this together here. So for falling along, when I click on the Learn tab. And what we're gonna do is we're going to close this panel. So I'm gonna click the hamburger menu, choose Close tab group, and that closes that entire group. I'm going to close the library's group as well because we're not going to be working with this. So we'll click the hamburger menu, Close tab group, and that's expanding this. We can also increase the sight of the text that appears in the panels. And this is especially helpful if you're vision isn't quite as sharp as you would like. So to do so we want to display interface preferences. We're gonna choose Photoshop preferences. Or if you're using Windows, you would choose Edit Preferences and want to take out interface. Then we want to click the UI font size dropped DO list. Then we want to choose a large from that list. Note that I can also choose tiny, medium, or small, whatever your preference may be. Noted that the churches will not take effect until the next time you launch Photoshop. So let's click Cancel to back out of here. So think I want to move the properties on, adjust men's group here I'm gonna move out to the left of the docs or Generic Click white mitre, we see the blue line that's released, their mouse button that's collapsed, this panel group. So I'll click the right pointing double arrow, and now that Ruby has collapsed, so the only thing that displaces site kinda become click on properties to redisplay it. The properties again to hide it. So once you've configured your panel duck the way you wanted, you might want to save it as a workspace for the kid, quickly returned to it, returned to their layout to the future. So to do so we choose window, pointer workspace, and we're going to choose a new workspace. Lets name their workspace class. So I'm gonna type in class and then click Save style. Being able to open our window of the workspaces menu, and it's located right on top of our workspaces. But let's go back to the essentials workspace, forgettable, choose window, point to workspace. There we'll click essentials. So I wanted to do now is reset the essentials to his default configuration. She was Window Workspace reset essentials from the menu. And now I workspaces set to the way it was when we first open Photoshop. But let's go back to our class workspace, which was Window Workspace, either double-click class that returns us to the configuration that we saved. And I gather you want to use another workspace. You just choose window workspaces and chooses which workspace that you want to use, whether we the photography one, graphic, and web, depending on the type of activities you'll be doing in Photoshop. But let's return to that class workspace or choose window workspace and then class from the menu. 11. Changing Screen Modes: Screen modes allow you to change the way that you view images in Photoshop. So the bottom of the tools panelists. A last icon in the Tools Panel is the screen mode button, which contains three hidden menu items. Right click it. You see standard screen mode, full-screen mode with menu bar and full screen mode, standard boat as a default mode in Photoshop, and that's the mode that we see right now. The next option is full-screen mode with menu bar, and then this option is active, the image window, we'll take up your entire computer screen and center of the image on the window. So let me click on that to activator, You see there were images now centered in our window. And full-screen mode, which is a third option on the list, the background turns to black. The image is centered on the menu bar. The toolbar on the panels all disappear from view. To redisplay the Photoshop screen other, Tap the F key on your keyboard or tap the escape key. If want to temporarily hide the tours panel in the Options bar, you can top the Tab key on your keyboard and everything is hidden except for the tabs on top of your screen as tab again, and then everything is displayed. Sir, if you just want a little extra screen real estate, it is tough. The Tab key. And then when you need what are the tools or powers? Just tap tab again and they can access those Photoshop Elements. So yeah, a couple of different dusk read Mozi you can use when viewing your documents in Photoshop. 12. Using the Zoom Tool and Navigator Panel: The zoom tool is shaped like a magnifying glass and is located on the Tools panel. There's directly above the others toolbar metadata, little three dots menu icon. So a zoom tool allows you to zoom in on your image, which magnifies the image on your screen, or zoom out, which reduces the image on your screen to zoom in on an image, we click the zoom tool, so we'll do that. Or it can also tap the Z key on your keyboard and then move your mouse pointer over the area of the image or which should like to zoom in. You can see that our most cursor is transformed into a small magnifying glass. This lets us know that the zoomed food is active. Then we simply click on the image to zoom in. And we can see that every time I click, it zooms in and other level to zoom out, hold on the Alt key of using Windows or the Option key of using MAC as I click on the image. So since w is an Ackerman, Oh, my all to keep, I'm gonna click on the image and again, we zoom out by one level each time I click. Can also use the view zoom in or zoom out commands for the menu. Another way to zoom in on an image is by using a keyboard shortcut. So you would use control plus if using Windows or command plus using Mac to zoom in and command or control minus to zoom out. You can also zoom in at all by using the because on the Options bar. So you would click the magnifying glass for tuplets init to zoom in our magnify glass with a minus to zoom out. And that just click on the error of the image where you want to zoom in or out of. I kick out the icon with the plus and click on the image. We zoom in a level every time I click. So we have some other options on our Options bar as well. Up here, we have resized windows to fit. What this will do is as you zoom in or out at an image to window surrounding the image resizes to match the magnification of the image. So if I have this unchecked and I zoom in and see that the window there's a match or I'm zooming. We also have zoom all windows, which applies the Zoom command to all open windows. Scrubby zoom. What this does is allows you to click and drag on your image to zoom. So I couldn't drag to the right to zoom in and click Add rigged to the left to zoom out. And that's one of the case of the scrubber. Your zoom slider is checked. Now account to do that, let me click on fit screen here. So I'm going to recheck my scrubby zoom. The next option is fit screen I just used a moment ago. What that does is resizes the image to of the entire image is visible on the screen. So if I'm a zoomed in really close, I can click the green button and now they'll had tire image fits on our screen. The last option here is fill screen. This enlarges the image to the largest possible dimensions within the active window using all of the available vertical and horizontal space. Now directly above the zoom tool here the toolbar is the hand tool, and this is used for padding around on your image. So to activate the tool, you click this icon of the tools parallel, or it can tap the H key on your keyboard. And now let me zoom in here a couple of times to show you how that works. Can also press and hold down the spacebar to activate the hand tool. So let's say I've done my move tool activated. I can temporarily deactivates. It had to have a wholly done by space bar. And now I can come around and the image. Once I released the Spacebar, it goes back to the currently selected tool. Double-clicking behind tool also fit the image tours screens of our double-clicking the hand tool here, you see the images now fit to our screen. Likewise, if I was to school zoomed way in here, double-click the zoom tool, we'll zoom in to a 100%. Because see that we're now at a 100% of it tells us in the tout here, I did also display the status bar. So let me hide my doc here. Status bar shows us that we're at a 100%. Zoom down a little bit to 50% and double-click on the Zoom icon because he there were zoomed up to a 100% Kublai. Other handy keyboard shortcuts is Command or Control 0. And this is a quick way of fitting the image to the screen or Command or Control one to zoom to a 100%. So let me zoom way up here and now we were press command one if using our Mac or Control one if you're using Windows and zooms us to a 100%. And if you wanted to fight your zoom area more precisely, it can use the navigator panel. And to this plan, we choose window navigator from the menu. And here we have a free-floating panel. We can see that assures a group with the histogram. Let me expand this a little bit. So the active image is displayed at the navigator panel and Dragon than zoom slider or the bottom of the navigator panel was, ah, allows us to zoom in and out of the image. Now what's especially handy about this is known as sudden zooming out very small increments. So this gives us a little bit more precise control. Would we want to zoom in or out, allowing us to zoom in or out in smaller increments than he can with the regular zoom tool. If you want to zoom in or out at a specific percentage, is selected percentage here and then type it is. So if I wanted to zoom in at 3%, we can see that I've, I've now zoomed out 30% of the original size may be selected again, it'll take him 15. Now we've zoomed in to 50% of the original size. So the red square, the navigator panel is called the view box, represents the zoom area of our image. So let's zoom in a little bit on this image. So a whole dark commands passive using a Mac or Control passive using Windows. I'll tap them a couple of times until resumes really far in tsunami could change the zoom area by dragging the little zoom box around it, the navigator parallel. So this is a quick way to zoom in the specific area of her image. I could type in 200 here to zoom into 200% that drag the little zoom box until the desire area is displayed. So, yes, several different ways of zooming in and out of your image. Oh, one last thing I wanted to mention. The checkbox next to scrubby zoom is grayed out and you're unable to select it. Need to do is choose Photoshop preferences. If you're using a Mac or edit preferences of using Windows, took on performance. And they're going to need to check the box next to use graphics processor scribbler Zoom is a GPU accelerated feature. So if this option is into Chuck, that's crabby Zoom may be grayed out. So I'm going to recheck this and then click OK. So yes, several different ways of zooming your image. So let's finish by clicking fits screen to fit our image to the active screen. And I'm going to hide the navigator panel. I think I'm done with that. So it'll take a little hamburger menu and then choose Close tab group. 13. Using the Undo and Redo Commands: So the undo command located under the editor menu, edit undo allows you to reverse the last command or adjustment that you made in Photoshop. So you might be thinking, well, what's the big deal with that? It could do that in most applications. And this is true. However, in previous versions of Photoshop, he were only able to undo one previous action if wanted to reverse more than one step, you had to use the step of backward command. Now in recent versions of Photoshop akin now undo multiple actions, which, which is a welcome future for many users. So to use the undo feature, you can choose Edit, Undo from the menu or press Control Z if you're using Windows or command z if using a Mac. And also if you looked at the interdependent, we can see that the step backward and step forward commands have now been removed from the menu. But if you want to access it because still accessible from the flyout menu in the history panel. So if I chose window history from the menu and click the File menu, we can see that the step forward, a step backward commands are available here. And the greater my dad, because we haven't performed the actions on this image. So let me close this panel. So I'll choose window history to close the history panel. So let's play modus little bit. So if you're following along, you want to click the text tool I caught on the Tools panel, and that's the icon with the T. This allows us to add type tour image and then will choose horizontal text tool. Next we want to click in the upper left-hand corner of the image. We're gonna type in Siegel at the beach. And let's make this a little larger. So you run press command, yea, if you're using a Mac or Control is your, if you're using Windows to select all of the text, none from me, font size dropped or less much changes to 24. And that increases the size of the text. So now let's click See I moved tour toolbar and that's the first tool in the Tools Panel. And what this does is D selects the text. So knowledge choose Edit, Undo new type layer. And we can see that reverses the last option that we did. Let's click at it again. And this time we're gonna choose redo new type layer. And as you can see, the redo command reverses the effects of the undo command. And again, you can use command Z if you're using Mac or Control Z if using Windows to undo that last action and to read it aloud, action would hold up Command Shift Z if using a Mac or Control Shift Z if using Windows. And that reverses the action of the undo command. So yeah, most likely you're already familiar with the undo and redo commands for all the applications. That this is a welcome new feature in Photoshop. The ability to undo multiple actions. 14. Changing the Color Scheme: By default, photoshop uses a dark color scheme and many people believe that how big a dark background, because it's easier to view the colors in your photos. However, some folks do not agree and prefer a lighter background on overall color scheme. Now if you are one of those who do not like the darker colors scheme, could easily change that to a lighter color. To do so, right-click on any area of the background, not the image, but other Dava, dark area of the background. And then choose the color scheme that you want from the pop-up menu. So right now we can see that it's set to the default so that one July to nato choose dark gray because it's a lighter color scheme. Medium gray, light gray. Or it can even choose a custom color by right-clicking. Choosing a select custom color that choosing the color that you want from the color picker. But we don't want to keep it out data. So I'm gonna go back to the default. You can also cycle through the available color schemes by pressing the shift F1 keystroke combination to lighten the colors keen or shift F2 to darken the colors. So I'm gonna press Shift F two and enlightens it by one level lenses again, lightens it again to darker repress shift of one. So Tab Shift F1, chef, cough, one shift if one bits brings us back to the default. Additionally, you can change the color scheme from the interface pain, a Photoshop preferences. So you choose a Photoshop printed preferences of using a Mac or edits prevalences of using Windows. Then click interface on top of the window. Here are our appearance preferences and here we can choose the desired preference. So I think I'm going to go with the second one here, which is medium grade. And we'll keep it at that. And then we'll click OK to close the preferences pane. So yeah, just a way of changing the color scheme. If you're not particularly a fan of photoshops, dark color scheme. 15. Creating a New Image: We've already seen how to create a new Photoshop document from the start screen. So every time you close the last few Manny Photoshop document, you would turn to the start screen. You can however, create a new document from within photoshop without needing to close your open documents. To do so, select File New from the menu or press command. And if you're using a Mac or Control, I had diffusing windows. So let's do that and sort of following along edge would choose File New from the menu. And this plays out New Document window that we saw in a previous video. So on top of the window we have several different categories we can choose from recent save photo, print, Arjun, illustration, wherever mobile and film and video. And each of the categories has its own set of presets that you can use. So for example, the photo category here. So here the Default Photoshop Size of seven inches by five inches. We have a couple other options here. Landscape, three inches by two inches, landscapes six inches by four inches, and landscapes seven inches by five inches. There are additional templates to, down below that you can use to use the timber to select the template you want to lose and then click the Download. Notice that it says freer. And that's because some of these templates are free and some of them are not. And it's all available from the Adobe Stock website. So you can see which ones are free and which ones are not. And it looks like all the ones here are free. If you wanted to search for additional templates on Adobe Stock, is clicking that little search box in the bottom of the window and then type in the search term for the template you want to find. But let's go back up here. Can also click View All presets to display all of the additional presets that Photoshop has for the active category. So we see a couple of additional presets here for this. And that what we're going to do is choose the landscape six by far, server falling like what to click on that preset. And once we do the preset details of displays in the right plane. And this includes additional settings. So because set for a preset. So the first thing we wanna do is because name our file. So we'll click on a file name box here in Minnesota checks is selected. We're gonna name this my first image. So that names are file. So let's take a look at some of the options in this pain. First off, if you choose a color vote for your image and it defaults to RGB color. The type of Colombo that you choose will depend on the type of image that you're creating. For instance, if you're creating an image for the web, usually use the RGB color model. For images that aren't should be printed. You would use the CMYK color mode. You can also use bitmap though those images tend to be quite large, but we're going to leave it at RGB color for now can also change the background color of your image. Or right now we can see that it's set to light. So let's click the Background Contents drop-down list to look at our other options. So you have the default white, the new image will have a white background, black. The dual image will have a black background, background color. The background color of the image will match the active background color. And there are tools panel, which right now is set to white. The foreground and background color squares are right over here on the toolbar. The top one is a foreground color, and the bottom one is the background color. Right now it's set to white, and we're going to work with that in much more detail in later lessons. We also have transparent, which the image has no background color at all. And then the last option is customer, we can set a custom color from the color picker, but we're gonna leave this as white for now. It's a more options here, a color profile and pixel aspirational. Sure, if you're gonna be printing out your image and a printer, they may have a specific color profile if he'll want you to use. But we're not going to worry about the advanced options for now. We're going to stick with what we have here and also enter the resolution for image. And ideally there should be at least 300 pixels per inch for printed images, or 72 pixels per inch for images currently be displayed on the web. So we're going to leave this at 300 for now. And instead of six by four, I want this to be four by six, that is to say four inches wide by six inches high. And we can change that from the width and height boxes in the preset details paying the width bucks of your type in four and the height bogs are gonna type in six. And here we can set the orientation to portrait or landscape, but we're gonna leave it as is. And I think for the background context that's changed us to batch our background color, choose background color for the drop-down list. And in our case it's going to be the same color. Background color is white, but you know, I think I want to change it to transparent instead. So click the background color drop-down list again, and we'll choose transparent. What this will do is create a blank image canvas. And this will be represented by gray and white checkered boxes, which indicates that the background color center transparent. And I think that's about it. So then I'm up click Create. So now we have a new document with our new blank image. 16. Saving your work: So here we have the magenta screen that we created in the last video. Now when saving an image for the first time you used a File Save As command from the menu. So we choose File Save As or you can use the command Shift S keystroke combination if you're using a Mac or control shift us. If using Windows, there's or display the Save As dialogue. But first you get to choose whether you want to save to your computer or to a cloud documents. Super true cloud documents is there'll be saved to Adobe servers where you'll be able to access it no matter which computer you use to log into your Adobe account. So it will be available on your other devices. This also allows you to collaborate with others as well. Or you can save it on your computer. By me it, which means you can save it to your local drive or to an external drive. So we're gonna click save on your computer. This is phase a Save As dialog. So we can see that the default format is Photoshop, which saves your image in dots PSD format. But this will save all of the various layers of your document. So you'll want to ensure that the layers checkbox is checked if you have layers in your Photoshop file, so many formats that allow you to save your layers are the Photoshop format and the tiff format. Just every document into different formats such as PNG or JPEG. Just choose the format that you want from the list. Notice that if you enter it on the image name when you first created your document, that neighbor automatically display the save as box with a filename box. But if you want to save your document with a different name, just type over the document name that is displayed here. If you're following along, we want to save this JPEG for message and we'll click the Format drop down list. I choose jpeg, notice though, but it's we do the layers box is now grayed out, are not able to check it. And that's because the only formats that support layers are tough and Photoshop. Let's go back to Photoshop format. So click the Format drop-down list again, I won't choose Photoshop, which is the first entry in the list. So now we want to navigate to the lesson files folder on our desktop. So it's a desktop and they'll have pain for less than Files folder. And we'll leave our filename as is. So it'll be saving it as my first image dot PTSD. And those good. So then click, save them up, click OK. Sorry, image is now saved. So now we have four open documents here. We have Vi opened up that bell in the basket image, we have a blank document that we created in the first video of this course actually ever Siegel and that new image that we just created. So let's close out all of these documents that you could do it one by one if you wanted to buy other clicking File Close by clicking the little x in the left corner of the tab. But we can also close all the open documents at one time by choosing File. Close All from the menu. And we want to save any changes or just click don't save. And numbers is back to the main Photoshop. Start screen. 17. Setting the Foreground and Background Color: This video we're going to work with setting the foreground and background color. And for that, we're going to work with an existing document located in the lesson files folder on our desktop server falling along, you want to choose File, Open menu, click desktop or the left pane. Double-click the lesson files folder. And the name of the file is white. Dodge PSD. Psd stands for Photoshop document. So it's a Photoshop document, so we'll select it and then click open Photoshop. It uses the foreground color to paint, fill and stroke selections, and the background color to fill selections. So certain tools are used for adding the foreground color, while others are used for applying the background color. The foreground and background colors squares are displayed on the Tools panel. The topmost square error is the foreground color and the square root underneath of the Bagua square is the background color. By default is the foreground color is black, and the background color is white. And you can change that from clicking on either of the squares when you do the color picker displays from where you can change the color to actually change the color dregs of scroll bars. And we see this vertical color bar in the center here. Drag the little slider is up or down and tell the color is the way that you want. So let's move it to how blue right here. And then if you click inside the window to select the desired shade of that color. So here we have a lighter blue and that a darker blue. So let's go with the shape of our rate here. Now we click okay. So now let's activate the brush to look to do so, tap the B key on our keyboard. He also click the brush icon that says icon right here. So now we'll click at a white area over a dollar commands. So let's zoom in a little bit and to do so, hold down commands plus if you're using a Mac or Control plus if using Windows to zoom in as dragon or document or when we do repenting blue lines with the foreground color that we selected and the color picker. You could change the way to the lines by clicking the Brush Preset picker over here, the Options bar, and then adjusting this size. So I make it a little smaller line here, and I'll click the icon again to hide the box. So now we're painting with a little smaller line. So let's not do that. So you want to press command is either using a Mac or Control Z if using windows, and we end up with a blank document that we started with. Another way to change colleges by using the swatches panel. And the swatches panel contains preset squares of color. You can click on to change the foreground or background color. So to display the swatches parallel, you display a just as you would any other panel by choosing a window into the panel name. So in this case, when r choose window and then swatches. So notice that as I click on a color square, the background color changes. So notice that if I click on the green color square, the background color changes on our toolbar to green. To change the foreground color from the swatches panel. Hold down the option key of using a Mac or the ALT key for using a Windows. And then click on the color square and there is no, there are foreground color change to pink, Samira closest swatches. Oh, and let's switch our foreground and background color to the default value is. And to do so, we click this little black and white square icon directly above the foreground color to the left. So we'll click on the icon. Now choose the default colors. Can also tap the dq, dt or keyboard to revert to the default foreground and background colors. Think of d for default. Another way to modify the foreground and background color is from the colour panel. So let's display it. So we'll choose window color from the menu. And here we have the default RGB, red, green, blue sliders. And if your screen looks different than in mind, you want to click the little hamburger menu in the upper right corner of the window and then choose RGB sliders. So from the colour panel you can define the color is more precisely and drag the sliders until the exact shade of color is displayed. And also as I drag the background-color square on our Tools panel adjusts accordingly. And if we happen to know the RGB values of the car that you want, you can just type a burden or directly into the boxes here. So if I type in fifty five, fifty five, and twenty five, and that gives us kind of a bluish color. So let's close the colour panel. So we'll choose a window color to close that channel, let us go back to our default colors. So let's tap the D key on our keyboard. So notice that when you change the background color using the color picker or the color paddle, that color will not automatically be changed in the active image. So note that Olympic tickets, the background colors square here, and our color picker, and let's set it to green. And then we'll pick a shade agreed, maybe this should agree. And then we'll click OK and notice that our background color is still light. However, the next step is you create a new image by using the file new command, and then choosing background color from the background contents box to have the active background color will be applied to the image. So let's do that. So let's choose File New from the menu. Then of course you would drill your desired preset or type in the values Natalie. But here we wanna sets the background contents to background color. It might be set to white or black or transparent. So and set the background color. Photoshop would create a new document using the current background color or we have set, and this case it's green. So I'll click Create and Photoshop. It creates a new document with the green background color. So one last thing I want to mention is that you get quickly switched to background and foreground colors by tapping the X key on your keyboard or by clicking the little icon to the right of the foreground color square. And that's just double arrow icon. So if I click it, it switches the foreground and background colors. Or here you can tap X on your keyboard to achieve the same result. So we're going to be working more in depth, width, the color picker to swatch panel, and the color paddle in upcoming videos. 18. 0202 Using the Color Picker: So we learned in the last video that to select the foreground, a background color of a document you use to color picker. And again, we click it either the foreground square of the background square to display the color picker for that car. To move through the different colors in the spectrum and click the little slider areas and drag up or down until the desired color is displayed in this preview window here. And then to select specific shades of the selected color, we click in the color window and select the shape that we want. You can also enter in custom HSB, which of these three boxes here, RGB, which are these three boxes here? Cmyk, which are these four boxes down here, and then LAB. So for example, if you have a favorite color, who's RGB values are 250, 70, or 200. And you can type these values directly into the boxes. So let's do that. So let's type in 250 to 70, Tab 200. So this can help you to maintain consistency in all of your documents. Now if you program in HTML code, you might find the hex value input box, a particular value, thus the box right here. So we're using this and now you're in your webpage programming. You can just copy this value and then paste it in the documents that you're using. Could also use the eyedropper tool to select a color your document. So for instance, maybe move my eye dropper over this Docker and codified click on the document Norris than our foreground color, no change to the green. So now we can just copy this hex value to the document we were working on. So we can use this color and other documents. And on the bottom of the color picker window is a little checkbox, only web colors, which when checked, will only display web safe colors. This means that any colors you use will be viewable by all web browsers. So you wanna make sure that this box is checked if you're creating images or documents for the web. Now I have the feature on the color picker is the ad to swatches button, which allows you to save the actor of foreground color to the swatches panel. This again can be a real timesaver and saving your custom colors for use in the future. So let me cancel out of here. And that's council of here. And let's work on this together a little bit. Finally, you want to click the foreground color square on our Tools panel. And I'm going to change the foreground color to blue. So drag the slider arrows up until blue colors displayed in the preview window. Now let's click on the window to set the color. So here we can see the new box that lets us know what our new color will be once we click OK. And it lets us know also what our current color is. Now we want to click the only web colors checkbox to ensure that only web safe colors will be selected. Now instead of selecting our colors using the picker that's entered, our values matter is so let's click on the box and we're going to type in to 55. They want to double-click in the green box and type in one or two. That in a blue box with type in 51. And as we can see, our new colour is now set to orange. So let's click OK. Notice that our foreground color squared now reflects our new color. So let's right-click on the gradient of tool, this tool right here. So we're gonna right-click on it to show the hidden menu. And what we want is the paint buckets tool. So click on that from the little menu. Now let's click anywhere in the green area of our document. And that fills that area with the active foreground color, which in this case was orange. Now let's tap the D key or a keyboard, and that's which is our foreground and background color to the default, black and white. And as we can see, are paid to pucker tool is still activated. So let's tap the V key on our keyboard to activate the Move Tool. And this D selects the paint bucket of tool and activates the Move tool. So the next video we're going to work with using the color panel. 19. Using the Color Panel: In this video, we're going to delve more deeply into using their car panel. So let's display it. So we'll choose window color from the menu. So you can use the car paddle to set the foreground and background colors by either enter in customer red, green, and blue values into the boxes, or by clicking the desired color on the color ramp. So if we hover on those pressure over the color bar, we see that a pointer transforms into an eyedropper tool. And then we can drag in the color red to move along the spectrum of colors. And notice the sliders changes, I drag and the foreground color square is changing on my toolbar. And again, I could modify these individually. So we just wanted to modify the greens and the image. I drag the slider and now I'm just changing that portion of the color. And again, our foreground colors square changes in the toolbar as I dre. So notice that it's only affecting the foreground color if you wanted to change the background color using the color panel, click the background color square in the window. And now when I drag, you see our background color changing on our toolbar. And the act of colors also display in the foreground color backward color boxes on the top left corner of the color paddle. And we can quickly switch to white drew bug by clicking the corresponding box on the far right edge of the colorRamp. So as top portion is white and this bottom portion is black. So we wanted to change the foreground color to black. I would click the little foreground color square in the window, and then click black on the right side of our image. And those of the foreground color is now changed to black. Now you are not limited to the red, green, and blue colour model that we have here. You can change the color model by clicking on the little color paddle flyout menu. And again, that's a little hamburger menu here. And then selecting the desire to car model from the menu. Select briefly go over each of the different colour models. So Hugh cube, so for those should drag this slider on the spectrum bar until the color that you want is displayed. And then you click the desired hue of the color in the large window. And again to be CRF foreground color change as we play different colors, we'll click a little menu again. That's click brightness cube. So this allows us to choose colors by their brightness, by clicking the desired brightness of the large window here. So click the blue area and then I can drag to change the color. And then I could drag the slider in the spectrum to change the brightness of the color. Next is colour wheel. So here you could drag on the wheel to change it to the desired color. So if you click on a color area and then drag it slowly to change the hue of that color. And then again during the saturation sliders to change the saturation of the car can see their nerves Marvin, intense red for drag or to the left and slowly becomes desaturated and same for the brightness. Next up is the grayscale slider. This well change the color to various shades of grey, ranging from white to black. Notice the foreground colors, squares changing per year to the left. So a white charges to gray and then literally two-block. Next we have the RGB sliders, which we've been working with thus far, the red, green, and blue sliders. Below that is the HSB sliders, which stands for hue saturation and brightness. So we can select a color, that color spectrum and then modify the hue saturation and brightness of the selected color. Slightly below that is the CMYK, which stands for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, forgetting we could click on this color spectrum window and then modify the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black of that particular color. We have the lab sliders and the l element has a lightness ranging from 0 to 100. The A's slider ranges from green to red. So there's changes the color from green to red, and then the B element goes from blue to yellow. And then last we're going to look at is the web color sliders. So this allows you to select RGB sliders and display their hex values in the boxes. So again, if you're designing web pages, this could come in handy getting the hex values of a specific color. Now to handy commands on the color palette flyout menu are the copy color as HTML under the copy colors Hex code. So what this will do is copy the currently selected color to the clipboard, allowing you to paste the hex value directly into the document. And they're as HTML format or in straight hex format. So again, if you program webpages, these two commands, me especially come in handy, also would come into heavy for using a specific color and a different application as well as application that allows you to specify the hex value. So yeah, different way of changing the colors in your document by using the color panel. I. The next video we'll delve more deeply into using the swatches panel. 20. Using the Swatches Panel: So this video, we're going to work with this swatches panel. So let's click on the swatches tab over here, the doc I've you don't see this group of panels that he'll choose window swatches from the menu to display the swatches panel. So this panel displays commonly used colors that allows you to quickly choose colors at additional colors and delete colors. This panel is a mixture of RGB, CMYK, grayscale, pastel, as well as several darker and lighter colors that you can use to use a swatch, click on the desired categories. So let me click our RGB here. It's a little bit right pointing arrow to expand that group. So I could choose RGB green here, adores them are foreground color change to green. If I wanted to change the background color, you would hold down the Alt key if you're using Windows or Option key if using a match, and then click on the desired color. So let me change that to magenta. Nervous or background color now changed to magenta. On top here is a group of recently used swatches, sonatas up the magenta and green swatches or the first swatches in our list here, again, we can look at the CMYK swatches and then check green, blue, etc. And our foreground color changes accordingly. And if we want to expand all of the swatches so you can see all of the available colours to hold down the command key for using a Mac or Control cave using Windows, and then click on any of the right point in disclosure triangles next to a group name. And that will expand all of these swatches. So now you can peruse your list and choose the desire to color. On the very bottom of my list, I have a group of legacy swatches, which were swatches that kids standard in previous versions of Photoshop until loved this swatch group. I'm going to click the little hamburger menu, then choose legacy swatches of level load, that group of swatches for you. You can also create your own custom swatches. So let's do that. So let's click the color picker for the foreground color here. And we're gonna do is type or the RGB values ourself. So we want to pick up the red box and type in 0. What tap the tab Cuba keyboard to move to the green box and we'll type in 51, then whatever the Tab key and type in 150. So we've just added values for this shade of blue. And to say this tourist swatches panel, click the edges swatches button. That would need to provide a name for a swatch firmer. Call this cozy blue. Again, you can name it anything that you want that looks like ok. So let's click Cancel to close this window and not via switch back to our swatches panel all the way to the bottom there is our default swatch. And we could drag this all the way up so that it's on top of our list if you want. I also created a folder called bias watches. So if you want to create a folder to store all of your customs watches, click the little folder icon. I'll just call this class watches. And we'll click. Okay. So now we can copy any of your favorite swatches into this folder. That's a good way to have your folder, your favorite swatches grouped together. Let me move this back. Yeah. So yeah, so we developed a bunch of a favorite swatches that you'd like to use you to copy them all to your custom folder. But of course, keep in mind that moving a swatch from one area to another removes it from its original location and places it into the new location. Let's just move this back. And you can also export your favorite swatches issue if we want. So let's click our cozy blue swatch, will click the little flail to bend your tub or the panel, and then choose experts, selected swatches. And that allows us to export our swatch whose Pacific area on our computer. So it's a good way of sharing your customer swatches with others are going to cancel out of here. So yes, yet another way of changing the foreground and background color your documents using photoshops, swatches. 21. Coloring with the Brush Tool: In this video, we're gonna talk about the brush tool. A very worked with this a little bit in our previous videos. So the brush tool is a painting tool used for applying the active foreground color to an image. And the merge tool is right over here, or the tool bars the ninth icon from the top. If we right-click on the icon, we see that ensures a space with the pencil tool, the color replacement tool, and the mixture brush tool. So you can either click the icon on the toolbar here are tough. The B key on your keyboard, which is a quicker way of activities, they brush tool. So it's possible you might have one of these other tools active. For instance, you may have been working with the color replacement tool. So to cycle through the different tools that an icon group hold down the Shift key and then tap the shortcut key for the group which in this case is B. So if we look at the lower-left corner, whereas Tatas by receiver to have the color replacement tool active right now. So I'm no longer my shift key and Tab B, you have the mixture garage. And now we see that the brush tool is active and that's the one we want. And by the way, this works with other tools as well. So for instance, the crop tools, I can cycle through all of these different tools in this group by holding down shift C. So before painting with a brush tool, you'll want to select the desired foreground color. And once you've done so, you're ready to pink. So right now receded out my foreground color, such to yellow. And if I tap the beak here, my keyboard and swipe on my document here we see that I am now painting with yellow, which is the foreground color. Now photoshop includes a multitude of different types and sizes of brushes from which you can choose. Large versus small brushes, hard brushes, South brushes are calligraphy brushes, tantalize brushes that had more to change the size are hardest of a brush. You click on the Brush Preset picker icon and that's just I kinda right up here on the options bars, a third icon from the left. And if you don't see a diabetes, you don't have your brush tool active. Again, all the options on the Options bar context-sensitive, they will change depending on which tool is active. So let's click on the icon and here we can see some of the options we can set. So you can choose one of the brushes from a preset here are just set the size and hardness yourself right now B, C, my size is set to a 100 pixels. Drag this to the right, let's say 379 pixels. Notice that my brush icon now is a lot bigger on my document. So you could eyeball and get an idea of the size of your brushes. Same goes for hardness. Could drink the hardest to the left for a super soft brush, our hardest to the right for a heart as brunch, let me reduce this down to be about 50 or so. So if I draw a line with a hard brush, received a hard edge line, let's turn to the heart is all the way down. And now we see more of a smoothing, airbrushed type of line. Now it's worth mentioning that the majority of the tools are brushed tools such as dodge bird Healing, Brush, et cetera, is that you brush over areas of the image that you want to adjust. That means they all have brushed sizes of Australia, your brushes have a hardness sitting as well. So remember the smaller the hardness, the less the hardness. And a couple of our quick keyboard shortcuts that you might come in handy. D changes the foreground and background colors to the default colors. And we kind of mentioned this to the previous video. And also x swaps the foreground and background color star. We see that white is by foregoing, a black background. For type x, again, it swaps them. Now black is the foreground, white as the background. So a couple of tools of the Options bar you might find useful are the two main tools or you as a photographer would use would be opacity and flow. Well, Paris City controls the transparency of your brush strokes, how pig something is. So right now power capacity is set to a 100%. Think i'm gonna increase the artist of his brush to a 100% as well. So if I draw, we see a Pasi central Harper said, so let's drag the capacity down to about 30% and draw again. Because see that now it is much lighter. The lion is now gray instead of black. 0, 1% of power city. It's barely visible. 40% darker gray. Now the flow tool controls how quickly color is applied. Flow gets darker the more their true brush. Unlike capacity which does not. So think of fall kinda like a marker of the more times you draw over it or the darker it will get. So if I set my flow to 50, capacity back to a 100. So I draw here on the lime. Dry again. Notice it gets darker each time I draw. So sorry for brushing over an area of the boy who drove that error. They're darker, it will get. And we saw that you can set your brush size by dragging the size slider to the left or a right. Singles for hardness can also just type into values. So if you wanted your brush size to be at 200 pixels, you would just type in 200 in the box. And r We see our brush size is set to that amount. I prefer to use keystroke accommodations to quickly change the size and the hardest of my brush. So you tap the left bracket key to reduce the size of your brush. And Doris, my brush cursor on my screen getting smaller each time I tap the left bracket. And also though the value up here of the Options bar changes as a precedent as well. Notably atop the right to bracket to increase the size of my brush. And now notice that it increases by ten levels each time. So right now it's a 90 pixel brush or a 100 pixel brush, et cetera. To increase a decrease the hardness, hold down the Shift key and then press the left or right bracket. So a shift left bracket will decrease the hard disk and make a softer brush. Where are shifted the right bracket, Well, pardon the brush or increase the hardness of it. So when paging on an image, you can also select a blending mode from the Options bar, and you do that from the mode list here. The blending about controls how the color of the image is affected by the foreground color painted by the brush tool. So for instance, I'll luminosity blend mode will create a color with the hue and saturation of the image color and the luminance of the foreground color. Let me change this foreground color to a different color here. Let's show just to see that the luminance is a little bit different. So what you're doing in essence is blending the foreground color with the original color as you paint. So as you can see, there are many blending modes that you can choose from. So you might want to experiment with them a little bit until you get the effect that you're looking for. So another way to modify your brushes is by using the brush settings panel. And that icon is directly decks to the Brush Preset picker is I kind of looks like a little folder with a brush on it. So the clicker, we see, we see many more settings that we can set. So here you see a little gallery of brush types. So just click on the Brush typer, then drag and you get some interesting effects. Fairer. Here we have rain. Can also choose a window brush settings to display the airbrushed settings panel. So you choose a preset brush type or modify the tip of your brush by using one of these options on the brush tip space area. The breast Settings tab here also contains some interesting settings that you might find handy. There's the size again, we already worked with this, changing the size of the brush. But you also have the flip x and flip. Why flip acts were flipped the brush tip horizontally, I flipped why we'll flip the brush tip of vertically, angle here will change the angle of the brush. You can either type in a value of angle box or click this little arrow over here on the right side of the circle. And those that as I drag the angle setting in the angle box adjusts accordingly. Then said goes for the roundness or you can type in a roundness and remoteness changes the roundness of the brush from router oval. She can get a type in a value here in the box. Or you can drink a little over to the right of the box here. And notice as I drag the value of their bonus box changes. And hardness we've already seen changes, the hardness of softness of the brush and edges as spacing, what this does is changes the amount of space between the brush strokes. So let's play with this a little bit. So I'm gonna cancel over here, or just click the little X in the upper left corner of the box. And we're going to open up a document. So we're going to choose File open from the menu. We're gonna navigate to a lesson files folder on our desktop to choose desktop in the left pane double-click lesson files folder. When I select the file name, apple, I'm going to sort these by name here and the ID on the file let me write as Apple JPEGS are going to choose that and then click open. So let's display the swatches panel. So I'm gonna click Swatches over here in the right pane. And if it's not resonable, choose window swatches from the menu. But the swatch w1 is under the RGB areas. So you wanna kicks a little disclosure triangle next to RGB to expand that section that we want to RGB red. And again, this is just another way of saying the foreground color, North foreground color is now red. And he wanted to tap the beak key on your keyboard. And if brush tool isn't displayed, you want to right click. And I kinda, I make sure the little check boxes to the left or brush tool, there's snow, the active tool. So little box were displayed next to whatever tool you have actives. We weren't the brush tool. So now let's click the Brush Preset picker and we wanted to completely hard brush would agree the hardness tighter all the way to a 100% And let's drag this size style. You want to bring that to the left or right until 13 pixels is displayed in the box. So about there. And then press return or enter on your keyboard to close the box. So we see we have a very small brush and you were to also ensure that the blend mode is set to normal. So if you're drinking stuff the apple and get an unexpected result, you might want to check your blend mode drop-down list to make sure the luminosities into displayed. I can just click the listed tap Edna my keyboard to jump to normal. And I also want to ensure that my flow is set to a 100%. We also want to go back to the brush settings panel and we want to separate that spacing back to 1%. So if you adjusted that, you want to set that back to 1% and I click the little X to the upper left corner window. So now if you click it Sunday apple, we could see there were painting a few lines, is sort of the apple. So as the size of our brushes only 13 pixels, the brushes rather small for the area of this size. So we want to increase the brush size. Otherwise we'd be here all day trying to fill the apple. So let's tap the right bracket key on your keyboard ten times 12345678910. That looks like a good start Department. And on the opposite box, click the Brush Preset picker. And we're gonna bring the hardness flutter to left to about 40%. And then once we've done that, whatever return or enter on a keyboard. So now let's paint inside the apple until it's completely read. I might even make my brush a little bit bigger. And then they get closer to the edges will make our brush a little smaller. That's at the heart does back to a 100 and our temperature and are under, it's not where the hardness doesn't flow into the edges quite as much. Third, now we've painted inside the entire Apple. So now let's click on the Brush Preset picker our own, and we're going to click the brush options menu. So there's better includes options for renaming a deleting brushes, saving the current brush layout. So if you use the same size and the hardness or pass the etc., you can save a brush by choosing New Brush Preset and the type in the name for your preset, and then click OK. And we don't want to do that right now. So click on the gear icon again. Or if you've purchased rushes from somewhere else, if you choose, I import brushes and then navigate to the location where they're located and then you can bring them in and you can see that I have a couple of brushes here that I obtained. And if we wanted to impart Zed, I would just select it and then choose open. But I already did that and we can see them on my list here. So be cancelled here. We can see them here on the bottom of my list. These are the third party brushes that if I've imported. So let's return a retro to close this and let's go into the brush settings panel. And under the brush Settings tab, let's click on z, hard rod 30, brush it on my screen. So lashed crush there. You see that the hardness is a 100% and the brush size is 30. And notice that also changed on the option bargain is selected it. And now let's tap the F5 key and that toggle the display of the brush settings penalty. If you wanted to display the parallel quickly, just tap the F5 key on your keyboard. And again, it could also choose window brush settings. So we're tap if five again, and let's save our image, but let's see that with a different name. So I'm gonna choose File Save As from the menu. I'm gonna click on Save at your computer. You want to navigate to the lesson files folder on our desktop. And we're gonna name this my apple.tar JPEGs. So type in my underscore Apple PG Demo, click, Save, and then click. Okay, so now we've saved this modified image to the lesson files folder on our desktop. 22. Coloring with the Paint Bucket Tool: The paints Bucket tool is a painting tool used for applying the active foreground color to an image. However, the paint bucket is 2l is different than the brush tool in that it allows you to quickly apply the foreground color to any enclosed area at an average or to an entire area of the same color, the painting Becker tour assures a space on the Tools panel with the great inch tool. Do the 3D material dropped tool. So again, you want to right-click on the icon. Yea come I looked like this. That's what the greeted each tool icon is active. It's going to right-click on the icon and then choose paint bucket from the little menu. So in addition to filling an area with a foreground color, you also have the option of playing a pattern instead of a colour. So you click the little drop down list next to forgot and then choose pattern, and then you choose which type of pattern you'd like to add. So if I chose our grass here and then click to my edge, anything not you white in this area of the image is filled without a pattern. But let me undo that. I wanted to find the power only to this area of the image is enclosed area. I would click on the white. And now that image is filled with a pattern. And he could purchase third-party patterns from others and then import them by clicking the pattern picker here, by clicking the little gear icon, and then import patterns. And this allows you to import any patterns that you've purchased are, but others have shared with you. So let's go back to a foreground philosophic, the pattern drop-down list, choose foreground and obviously that the powdered viral drop-down list has grayed out. So like the Brush tool, the Paint Bucket tool allows you to apply a blending mode when filling in an area. And this will combine the two colors. And again, you click the mode drop-down list and then choose the blending mode that you want to use. Additionally, the capacity setting allows you to set the transparency level of the car that you're applying. So right now we see, right, a 100%. So that's undo that. So I'll choose Edit, Undo page, packet from the medium. Let's pass it at 50% and then click inside the enclosed area. And now we see that it's 50% of that red color. So let me undo that. And again, to undo the last command that you did, you tap command is Eve using tobacco control XIV using Windows. Now a nice feature, the Paint Bucket tool is the ability to fill in all of the same color in an image out once. For instance, if we want to change all instances of a particular shade of red to orange, slug oranges, the foreground colors. So let's scroll down of a sag orange error. Nobody want to uncheck the contiguous checkbox in the Options bar. So now if we click any red area over image at all. So let's say I had some red over here, then all instances of that should have read will be painted with the orange foreground color. Let me show you an example of that. Let me switch the foreground color back to RGB red. And I'm going to make sure they're contiguous is checked annual turnover opacity back up to a 100. So now I'm going to click at the leaf area, red is filtered that area as well. Now if I wanted to change the red in this Apple to orange, for instance, let's click the color picker for our foreground color, click orange here and our color spectrum. So now if I click in the center of the apple, it's only applied to this enclosed area. Let me undo that. But now if I uncheck the contiguous box enough, I clicked inside the center of the apple, we see that all instances of that color had been changed, not just the color in the closed area of the image. So let me undo that. It will go back to the weird was. So when filling in similar shades of a color, you can set the tolerance level to specify how sensitive the painter pocket tool will be, two different shades of the same color. So the lower the tolerance value, the more sensitive the paint bucket tool is to shade differences. So if we had several different shades of red here, is set like a tolerance level of ten. So when he activates the paint bucket tool, it will only change that shade of the color. Or we want to do now is fill in the leaf area of this image with green. So in our swatches panel that's click on CMYK green. So it, if that's parallelize it expanded. You want to click Theia rights pointing arrow next to CMYK swatches panel and what she would see him, right K Green. And those that are foreground color has now been changed to that color and you don't have to use this watches how we can also select the color from the color picker if you so choose. So now we want to ensure that our page Bucket tool is active. And we wanted to ensure that the contiguous boxes checked. If not all instances of white would be changed, but we only want to change the white inside of this enclosed area. Does it close leaf area? So we went to ensure that contiguous is checked and then we'll click inside the leaf. And now only that area has been updated. So yes, that would have been a much easier way of filling in the inset of this apple, rather than paging it with a brush tool as we did in the last video. So let's close this fossil virtues file. Close from the menu. And we'll click save and asked to save our changes. Now and open up a different files. I'm gonna choose File Open from them in, you know, I want to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. So double-click the lesson files folder, the Fallingwater open is named blocks, select blocks, and then choose Open. So now from our swatches column, you want to choose RGB yellow, so that churches are foreground color to yellow. So let's click the dark red side of the first cube here. And that change is only that color to yellow. So let's not do that. So we'll press cognize IV using a Mac or Control Z of using windows. So this time let's uncheck the contiguous box. So this removes the continuous restriction. So now we can fill all like colors in the image out once. So let's click on the dark front of the cubic n. And notice that the bottom cube must fill it as well as yellow. So let's undo that. So tap Command Z or Control Z again. So let's change the tolerance. This. So let's click the tolerance box and type in. Let's go through 175. So a very high tolerance. And that's clicked the dark red set of the top cube once again, because our tones is so high, it filled at all instances of various shades of red and pink to the active foreground color. So a closest images will choose File Close to the menu and you don't wanna save our changes. So will tick, don't save. 23. Using the Eyedropper Tool: The eyedropper tool allows you to take color samples from the image you have open. So when the eye dropper tool is activated, any color that you select on your image automatically then becomes the foreground color. And the eyedropper tool is worried here it's the seventh icon from the top of the toolbar. You can see there's sure to space in the toolbar was several additional tools. So the eyedropper tool comes in especially handy if you want to do additional painting on an image using an existing color in that image. So by default is sampling is set to all layers. And we see this here, the sample jump TO list on the Options bar. What this does is samples, what the image would look like if you were to flatten all of the layers. And we're going to be talking about layers and much more in depth and later videos. Alright, this is the behavior that you want. You can change this again from the assembled upto lest by choosing current layer with Sibos only the active layer, current and below, not sample any layers above the active layer on layers with no adjustments, which will sample all layers except for adjustment layers or current and below with no adjustments. And again, there's some make more sense to you once we talk about layers. You could also adjust the points Sappho by clicking these sample size drop-down list on the Options bar here. So by default, photoshop uses the point sample, which samples a single pixel. The city, however, is a DOE is ideal for photographers. So using a three-by-three average or a five-by-five average can often produce more favorable results. So let's work a little bit with the eye dropper tool. So we're going to open a different average. So we're going to choose file from the menu, then click open. And again want to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. The name of the image W12 all put his named fruit dish, and that's just this image right here, fruit dash dish, Datta JPEG. And then we'll select that and then click open that. Zoom in a little bit on this. So hold down the Command Plus if using a Mac or Control plus if you're using a Windows there, but do that twice to zoom in. So now we want to talk to the eye dropper tool. And again, if you're I kinda look like there she would have right-click the icon and choose eyedropper tool for the little menu. Nausea can also use the keyboard shortcut deactivates the tool, smallest ticket, Eddie, One of the strawberries in the image. So notice right now that are foreground colors have to black. So now once I click on one of the strawberries, the foreground color changes can match that of the color that I clicked on. And if you click different shades of the strawberry, now let's click on the image of the star fruit and notice that our foreground color changes to a yellowish color. So that's a quick way of changing our foreground color to match a specific color in your image. So it closes image or choose File Close. And we're back to where we started. 24. Working with Gradients: In this video, we're going to work with the gradients tool a little bit. And the gradient tool allows you to fill a selection with a gradual blend of multiple colors, beginning with one color and ending with another. It kinda creates a graduated transition from one color to another or from one color to nothing. So the gradient tool shows a space on the toolbar with the paint bucket tool, which we've already worked with in a previous video. It's this tool here, and it's the first tool of this group are tools. You've already filled it out with our paint buckets with us in the last video, I do believe so. Let's click a gradients tool. You then choose one of photoshops, preset gradient fills from the gradient presets picker drop-down list, and that's located here on the Options bar. Or it can even create your own custom gradients if you so choose to click on this little list here, we see several categories of gradients. Basics, blues, purples. And to expand the category, click the little law right printing disclosure triangle. So we see all different types of gradients that we can use. But the first two options and the basics area here uses the foreground and background color as the gradient. So the first option starts with the foreground color and ends with the background color. And the second option goes from foreground color too transparent. And again, you can always change your foreground and background color using the color picker, the swatches panel, or the color paddle. So if you hover your mouse over any of the gradients here they did the preset gradients and little informational dialogue pops up telling you, what does that gradient is. Now on the Options bar, there are five different gradient shapes such you can choose from. The first is linear gradient, and this blends the colors in a straight line. You can see from the foreground to the background color the news, the radial gradient and this bloods the colors in a circular pattern angle, which is the third one from the left. This blends the colors in a conical progression. The fourth is reflected. I went drag from the center outward. This gradient creates a symmetrical linear gradient on both sides of the center area. And the last one is diamond, and this creates a diamond like pattern. Under the Options bar. He could also choose the blending mode again, as we saw in previous videos, as well as set the capacity. Again, you drape the opacity slider to the level that you want and then apply the gradient. Additional options include reverse of with this. The gradient starts with the background color and ends with the foreground color. So here you see it starts with o. Let me go back to the bigger passage, back up to a 100%. So with reverse selected, drag down on my document, it starts with red and ends with the yellow. Let me uncheck reverbs. Dealer helps eliminate distinct bands have colored your gradient by creating a smooth color transition. And transparency uses a gradient mask allowing for gradient transparency. So we can get an idea what that does if you drag it. So typically differ and transparency aren't really used much in photography. But he was most probably a blending mode of policy and maybe reverse. So let's create a gradient. So I'm going to, I'm going to undo this soldier falling along. Let's create a new document. So we'll choose File New from the menu. Let's click the web tab on top of our window. And in the right pane, we're gonna type in 800 and the width box and 600 and the highest box, we want to ensure that pixels is displayed in the dimensions drop-down list. And then we wanna click on the Background Contents drop-down list and choose a white. And then it looks like ok. So we want to select the gradient tool in the Tools Panel. And again, if you're paint buckets tool is still selected, I'm gonna right-click on it and choose gradients tool. And I'll zoom in a little bit. So a press Ctrl plus if you're using Windows or command plus of using a Mac. So again, we'll switch our tool back to gradient. And now we want to take the gradient true Dr. list and ensure that that first option is selected, which is the default foreground color to background color gradient. And that's dragged on but halfway. On an average, the grid is applied to our image. So let's do that by tapping Command or Control Z. And let's select a different grid in this time. So let's click the graded picker dropped dollars. Don't, let's scroll down all the way down to the pastels. And let's choose the fourth one from the left here. And let's drag it down on our document. Now we see that a PIDA pastel gradient toward document. So let's undo that, I guess by tapping Command or Control Z and w1 to choose the foreground and background color graded. So again, notice the first word here. Since the first gradient of the basics area, you'll want to click at the center of our document. And that drag to the right or too about the center of our document and then release the mouse button. So this is a place of gradients, beginning with the black and ending with the white. So let's give you the center of our document or drag all the way to the right edge. We see that this begins with the background color of black and ends with the white. So now let's click our foreground color square, which displays the color picker dialogue. And you want to type in 255 in the box and ensure that the greenbacks and blue box will contain 0 level tick. Okay, it's not going to take the radial gradient icon, that's a second icon from the left. And let's click at the center of our document and drag it in a horizontal line to the right. Through release the mouse button, we see that the previous gradient that we drew was replaced by the new gradients that reacted. So think we're done with those documents. So let's choose file close from the menu and I will take it don't say when prompted to save our changes. 25. Using Copy and Paste: The copy and paste commands allow you to make a copy of a selection, which means a portion of your document and then inserted in the same document or in a different document before you can copy a portion of an image, but first selected by using what a foreigner shop selection tools such as the rectangular marquee tool. The rectangular marquee tool is this tool right here on the second icon for the top. Or it could also use the lasso tool, which is the third icon from the top. So when the tool is activated, you draw a selection around the area of the image that you wanted to copy, and then you choose Edit copy from the menu. A duplicate of the selection is then placed in memory. To insert the copied selection, you then switch to the document where you want to insert and then choose edit, paste from the menu. The image will then be placed in the active document. You can then move the inserted image around you to document by activating the Move tool, by tapping the V key on your keyboard and then clicking and dragging the image to the desired location in the document window. So let's work on this together. So for this, we're going to open that fruit dishes HW had opened in a previous video. So we'll choose file open from the menu. No navigates to the lesson files folder on your desktop. And again, we're opening the file named fruit dish, and that's this one right here. And then we'll select open. And that's zoom in a little bit. So whatever command or control plus people go twice, tellers could. So Donald select the rectangular marquee tool of a tough the M key or a keyboard to activate that tool could also right click on the icon and choose rectangular marquee tool from the list. So now we've got a click and drag around the dish until a dotted rectangle is displayed, like we see here, that we'll choose edit, copy from the menu. So now we're going to open another file. So we'll choose file open from the menu. For the lesson files folder, you want to open the file named frame, sort of select that image and then click open. And now we'll choose edit, paste. And if you remember that one, insert a copy of the active selection, the selection that we just copied to our clipboard into the active image. So I'll choose paste and the image has been inserted into this document. So let's activate the Move tool by tapping the 70K here a keyboard. And let's click on the inserted image that's dragging it to the top left corner of our frame here, like so. So now there's choose edit, paste again. This inserts a second copy that copied image. And I'll drag this to the bottom right corner of the frame. Looks good. So let's save this and we're gonna save it as a Photoshop document. So choose File, Save As, and we wanna save it with a different name. And in a different format. You want to ensure that the farmer says Photoshop. And we're gonna call this my frame dot PSD. So I'll type in my underscore frame dot PST, and then I'll click Save. And then we'll click OK to maximize compatibility. So that is using copy and paste. 26. Using the History Panel: In this video, we're going to work with the history panel. Of the history panel allows you to undo multiple actions or states in Photoshop. To display the history panel, we choose window history from their menu. So each time that you perform an action such as painting with the paint bucket tool, erasing with the eraser tool, or creating a new layer. The new state of the images recorded in the history panel service, cool down advocacy at all of the actions that I performed on this image. So I moved this image to the lower right corner. I inserted this image here. I moved this image to the upper left corner. Here I pasted the image into this window. And here I've opened the file name framed and I can jump to any state in the history Power does by simply clicking on that state. So I'll click on the last state here to jump to that state. So by default, the history parallel saves the last 50 states. But you can increase the number of states if you're wired to by choosing Photoshop, printing the preferences are edit preferences of using windows that clicky performance. And then taking them the history states box than typing in the desired number of states. Note, however, that the VOR sticks that you save, the more he may impact the performance of your computer. So let's cancel out of here. And now, in addition to history states, the history panel could also contain snapshots. A snapshot is our copy of a specific state of an image. To create a snap shot of an image, you click the snapshot icon, and there's this icon here in the bottom of the history that looks like a camera. Once you click it, that snapshot will then be saved within the document allow you to work from a specific snapshot. And if I scroll all the way to the top of the history parallel, here's that snapshot that I just chuck. So I can jump to this state of the image anytime I want by clicking on this snapshot. Now when you wouldn't do close a document, all these history states will disappear, but the snapshots will remain. You can sift the history panel to work as either linear mode or non-linear mode. If you're working in linear mode or continue to edit your document from a previous state or delete the previous state, such as f i started working from right here. All subsequent states will be deleted. If the history pebbles set to work in nonlinear mode as you begin working from an earlier stage or deleted earlier state, the subsequent states will not be deleted. So in order to switch from linear to non-linear, we click the history panel flyout menu here, click history Options. And then he would click the checkbox next to allowed nonlinear history if you wanted to switch toes nonlinear mode, but we're going to leave it in linear mode. I'll click OK. So again in linear mode of phi selector selected item in the History panel. And then I make a brand new adjustment, such as using the brush tool or the previous states that were below the move paddle, we're now deleted to if you want to make sure that it doesn't happen, that he would want to switch to nonlinear mode. I'm going to undo that. Now. Another handy feature in the history panel is that you can create a document, a new Photoshop document, based on the specific state. So to do so, we select the state and the history parallel upon which we base our new document. And then there's an icon here. The first icon in the bottom of the panel. Create a new document from current state. So if I click at, this creates a brand new document using that active state or how did the other document. And now we see we've created a brand new document and Photoshop place that in its own tab. So let me close this and I don't want to save it. And we'll clauses document as well. So let's choose file close for the menu would choose, don't save and probably just say virtually it is. And we're going to work on this together a little bit. So let's hold on the command, all keystroke combination of using a Mac or Control O of using windows that displays the open dialogue you have again, navigate to the lesson files folder on our desktop. And we're going to open the image named Henry. So we'll scroll down until we see Henry and thus a JPEG image. So I'll select it and then click open that Zuber none this image soil tapped command-and-control and plus. We'll zoom in twice, suddenly going to tap the DQ here, that keyboard to ensure that the foreground and background colors are set to the default values. Tsunami went to tap the beak here a keyboard. This activates the brush tool. Next we want to take the Brush Preset picker, the Options bar, and the size box. We're going to select the existing text and type in the number five, and this selects a five pixel brush. So now what we're gonna do is I draw a moustache on the bad in the photo. So now let's draw goatee and our man. So I'll draw it over here. It's not a very good goatee, but as I got to be done, the less sonatas click our foreground color square, and we want to enter the following RGB values. For r, we devote a type in 255 and as for red, for green ball type or 255. And we want to leave blue as 0, and that changes the foreground color to RGB yellow. So then we'll click OK. And now we want to right click on the drawing tools icon. The drawing tools or directly above the hand tool here. So right click on that icon and we're going to choose the Ellipse tool known as draw, a small rounded lips on the upper right corner of our image. So we'll draw our ellipses. And it adds a small circle with yellow fill tour image. Let me check the Move tool here and I'm gonna move this up. So now if our history panel is invisible, we want to choose a window history for the menu. And that's clicked. The first option, the list here, which has all been. And that brings us back to the state of the image when we first opened it. Now let's click the second stage and analyst Brush Tool, and this selects the history state were the mustache was editorial image. And we'll click the third state that selects the state where we added the goatee. And if we select the one underneath that ellipse took, this selects a state where we added the Son to our image. So let's select the second state in the list brush tool. On a second brush tool stage of the list so that we have a complete mustache. And what we're gonna do is create a new snapshot from this state. So we're going to click the little camera icon in the bottom of our history panel. Create new Snapshot. Under snapshot has been created. You can see this created a brand new snapshot from the active state of the image. So here's our original image, and here's our snapshot. So now let's click the Create New Document from current state icon. And again, that's that first icon in the bottom of the History panel. And this created a new Photoshop document using that current history state. So I'm going to close this new documents, have a Choose File Close and we're not going to save it. So click a, don't save. So let's click the third Brush Tool entry in our history panel, which is the state where I drew the Gautier I'm and, and what we wanted to do is delete this state. And to do so we click the little trash can icon at the bottom of the history panel. So once we click it or asked, do you really want to delete the brush tool state? Now note that once we delete a state, all subsequent states will be deleted as well. That is to say, any actions that we performed after painting undergo T will also be deleted. So just to keep that in mind before you click Yes. So click yes. And now we see that although states have been deleted. But we can also turn back to our snapshot that return our two original image. So I think we're done with this image. So we'll choose file close from the menu or we're not going to save your changes. So I'll click, don't save. 27. Using the History Brush Tool: The history brush tool, which shows a space of the tool is parallel with the art history brush tool. And it's this icon right here is directly above the Eraser tool allows you to use any state of my history paddle, including a snapshot as a way of painting back and the error is of the image to a prior state. So a status about the history brush tool is that it allows you to brush edits on specific parts of the image rather than the entire image. So for example, let's say that you use the Brush tool to pay down your image and then decide several editing steps later that you want to remove some of those brush strokes. So to do so you would click the small box to the left of the state of the history panel next to the beginning of the brush strokes you want to remove and then erase the unwanted strokes with the history brush tool, leaving the rest of the image as it is. Oh, by the way, the art history Bosch work similarly, except that it adds stylized defects. So let's see how this works. So we're going to hold down the Command O keystroke combination. If you're using a Mac or control of using Windows, if you want to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. And we're going to select the image named Cardinal. So we'll scroll down and select cardinal dot JPEG and then click open. So let's press command to classify using a Mac or control. Plus, if you're using a Windows to zoom in a little bit, tsunami, we want to choose filter on the menu pointer noise and then click add noise. And we're going to go in depth with the filters in later videos. But for now we're going to add some noise to this image. I'm going to select the amount values type in for, and then click OK. And now I want to choose filter, pointer blurb, then choose Gaussian Blur. And this allows us to set the level of blurbed for our image. And we're gonna type Britain, us 3.5 and the radius box, I'm going to click okay, so you can see that our images now quite a blurry. So nobody want to display the history panel. So if you don't have a displayed choose window history from the menu and the history probably we want to check the little check box to the left of the add noise state. So click that. So this selects the state where we wish to begin reversing our actions. So all of those actions below the add noise auction will be affected. So now we want to make sure that the history brush tool is activated. So a right to click that icon and choose History Brush from the median. Now we want to check the Brush Preset picker in the Options bar. And let's go with about a 30 pixel brush. So I'll type in 30 and the size box there will tell return or enter on a keyboard. So notice drink over the cardinal in our image is a little bit of red bird here. Only drink over that area of the image. So what this does is reverses all of those strokes that we made only to this area of the image when the rest of the image as it was. So this just gives you an idea what you can do with the history brush tool. So let's close this emission will choose file close from the menu. And we're not going to save our changes. So click, don't save. 28. Using the Magic Eraser Tool: In this video, we're going to work with the Magic Eraser tool. And for now we're going to open up a new image. We could open the image named Eraser, And that's located in the lesson files folder on our desktop. So we'll choose file open for the menu and give me what I navigate to the list of files folder on the desktop. And the name of the follow on to open is this eraser JPEG. So I'll click that and then click open, sorry, a Magic Eraser tool, and that's this tool right here, the toolbox as directly above the page bucket and gradients to all. And it's this tool right here. And it's again, it's a hidden tool is the third option in the Eraser tool list, Magic Eraser tool. So what this does is removes our erases the color in an image without having to first make a selection, thus making the image transparent to the process. So like the paint bucket is tool, the Magic Eraser tool tries to match the same pixels in an image. Erase those pixels. Now if the contiguous boxes checked and thus just bucks up here in the options Barb and enclose the area of the image or the entire area of this same colour is erased. So let's click the contiguous box. So if I click the top area, the frame here, only that area is erased. Let me do edit, undo Magic Eraser, Which one do that? So now if I check the contiguous box and click the top panel, we see that the top and bottom panels have both been erased. Or in other words, all error is of the same color in the image have been erased. And let me undo that. What erasing similar shades of a color. You can set the tolerance level here of the Options bar to specify how sensitive the Magic Eraser tool will be, two different shades of the same color. So the lower the tolerance value, the more sensitive the Magic Eraser tool is to shade differences. So we can see right now that I haven't sent out 30. So when I click the top area of the frame here and only erases the top and bottom errors, but not these shades of purple. So let's do that by tapping command or control ZnO keyboard. So let's increase the tolerance. So this time we're gonna set the tolerance to about 90 or so. So now if I click the top edge of the frame, all instances of the purple are done except for the very outer dark purples on this side. So let's undo that. So we'll choose Edit, Undo Magic Eraser from the menu. Additionally, the capacity to here in the Options bar allows you to set the transparency level of the color here are raising. So let's set this to 50%. And let's choose our tolerance back to 30. And whatever enter supernovae, click in the upper area of the frame, how much you're Hello shows up on your screen, but we can still see some of the color visible in the frame and not in the top and bottom areas. Say I drag this to maybe 76%. So let's undo this. So tough Command or Control Z. So let's prove the epoxy don't even lower, so that's cooled down to 30%. I'm going to click the top edge of the frame. Now we can see a little bit more color is displayed in these areas. Or in other words, we've reduced the transparency of the area. So let's go back to the original state of this image. So we'll choose window history from the video. And then we'll click the first Tate and the history panel as we learned in a previous video. And that brings us back to the original state of the image as a was when we opened it. 29. Using the Background Eraser Tool: In this video, we're going to work with the background Eraser tool. For the job, we're gonna open a different file. So if you're following along when I choose File Open menu. And again, you want to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. And the name of the image that we went to all put as my underscore apple.tar JPEG. So a selected and then click open so the background Eraser tool, chairs are space other tools panel with the eraser tool and the Magic Eraser tool. And we worked with Magic Eraser toward the last video. And the backward Eraser tool is the center option in the eraser man who saw selected. So what this does is allows you to remove the background color from an image while retaining the foreground color. The trick to using the backward Eraser tool is to keep at the cross hair that is in the center of your cursor on the background coloration dre. So you don't want to go into the black or the red here if I wanted to just remove the White from this image. So potter, your cursor can be of the foreground color and I want to affect it. But you wanna make sure that the little cross hair stays in the background color the yuan to erase. And typically you'll want to choose a large enough brush to accomplish this. Otherwise you'll be there all day. So if you're following along, let's get rid of this white background from this image. We're gonna make a transparent. So let's check the Brush Preset picker and let's set the brush size to about 80 soil type that in the size box, Event tab, return or enter on a keyboard. So now what we're going to do is drag of the edge of the apple while keeping the cursor's Crossfire on the white area of the image, the background color. And we're going to drag all around the Apple to remove the background color from just the edges. Again, keeping the cross hair outside on the background color. She noticed it's not touching any of the other colors as long as I keep that crosshair on the outer area of it. Missed a spot there. And now, now let's increase our brush size to finish us off. So I'm going to tell my rights bracket key a couple of times. And then we'll click on the red best rest of the area of the white background area in our image to fill that in as well. So again, as for as far as Brush size is concerned, and you want to just use a brush size. And that's true of most comfortable with. There we go. So now we remove the rest of the background of this image and the background error of the image is completely transparent. So now let's save our average. So I will choose File Save for the menu. And notice that even though we opened it as a J peg, Photoshop is prompting us to say Where did Photoshop format? And that's because we've made a change to the image. So we wanted to make sure that Photoshop is chosen from the Format drop down list. And then we'll click save and have uptake, okay, under images not been saved and Photoshop format. So I think we're done with this, which was filed close from the menu to close the image. 30. Using the Pencil Tool: The pencil tool is similar to the brush tool, an actually a shirts to save space on our Tools panel has the brush tool. So if you right click on the Brush icon, we see the pencil tool is a second option in the menu. So the only difference between the brush tour of the pencil tool is the Pencil tools inability to draw anything but hard edge lines. It does not have the transparent edges and the smooth edges up the brush tool does its edges are much more Jager. So like the Brush tool, you can choose a brush type from the Brush Preset picker Of the Options bar, as well as set the blending mode on the capacity. Now a unique feature of the pencil tool is auto erase. So that's up here in the Options bar. And this allows you to erase previous pencil strokes, drawing over them again. Additionally, this option would allow us to paint the background color are the areas containing the foreground color. So let's work with this a little bit softer falling along. Let's click the background colors. Square the Tools panel again on my screen shots the white square here. And we want to set the background color to black. So to do that, we click in the RGB boxes, it would type 0 or in each one. So the R box 0, purse tab, green box 0, tab a, blue box 0, and double click Ok. So let's click the brush tool on the Tools panel. And again, that's the first tool in this group of tools for the brush tool. And what a little bigger brush size that I have here, maybe about 19 pixels is. So, so click the Brush Preset picker, clicking the size box and then type in 19 and their temperature to reenter a keyboard or not to draw lines. Here we ever line with our brush tool. So now let's click the pencil tool or the tools paddles. So again, we right-click the brush tool. I kinda choose pencil to it from the list. We want to use the same size brush or click the Brush Preset picker and type 19 and the size box, click OK. And now let's draw another line underneath the one that we drew with the brush tool. So click and drag to the right. And if we zoom in, we can see that we have more jiggly lines here then the light there jus with ZBrush tour. So now let me zoom out a euro. So now we're going to click the rectangular marquee tool. The tool is parallel and that's the socket is tool from the top. So a right-click and choose rectangular marquee tool. Maybe want to draw a small rectangular selection, the center of our image. So like so. Next IS activated the paint bucket tour liver. Recall that shows a space to the Tools panel with the gradients to look. So we'll right-click this. I kinda choose Page Becker tool, and then we'll click inside the selection. So as you can see this fill the selection of what's our yellow foreground color. So now I'll choose, select D, select from the menu, and this will deselect the marquee selection that we made. You can also use the Command or Control D keystroke combination to de-select a selection. So now we want to activate our pencil tools. So I'll click on the pencil tool icon on the tools parallel. So now we're going to click the auto erase checkbox on the Options bar. And then let's paint a line inside of the rectangle. And notice that we're painting the background color, the square, because a square is the same color as the foreground color. Sorry if we recalled, auto erase allows you to erase previous pencil strokes for this case, even fill strokes by drawing over them again. It's like whether it could drag over the lines that I drew it. So what I'm doing IT assets as drug again, except this time with the background color. So wanted to use the colored square example here to show you instances where this might come in handy. So I think we're done with this image from the moment. So we'll choose file close for the menu i, we do not want to save our changes, so click, don't save. And that is using the pencil tool. 31. Using the Clone Stamp Tool: This video we're going to work with the clone stamp tool. And I have another image open on our screen. That image that I'm working with is named cloned a dot PSD. So again, that's in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So if you're following along, you'll want to open that image before starting any further. So again, we can see here the name of the Enbridge cloner dot PSD, which shows up on our tab. So if the clone stamp tool does is allows you to copy one portion of an image to another area of the same or a different image. The clone stamp tool comes in especially handy for touching up photographs, such as removing scratches or blemishes. You can even remove people or objects from images by cloning nearby areas and then inserting the closed area over the objects that you would want to remove. Now before sampling your image, you'll want to choose a large enough brush size so that the entire area that you wish to sample is enclosed within the brush painter. Solid a calmness APA here. And I need a much bigger brush size than the one that I have. So I'm gonna click the Brush Preset picker on the Options bar. So under truth about a 115 pixel brush, similar type that in then return or enter. So the clone stamp tool is located in the Google of icons directly below the brush and pencil tool. And that's this icon of a terrorist designated, but what looks to be a rubber stamp. So if we right-click and we can see there are two tools in this group, the clone stamp tool and the pattern stamp tool. So click the clone stamp tool. So to clone an area, you move your brush cursor over of the area that you are to clone. And then you hold down the option key if using a Mac or alt key if you're using Windows, and then click your mouse button and that's selects that area. Or in other words, it sets the source point. And then you click in the area of the image where you wish to insert the clone. Now if he aligned a checkbox and the Options bar is checked, what's nice is that you can reuse the current sample as many times as you wish, regardless of how many times you stop and resume painting, or in this case, clicking, what this can do is help avoid the distortion of your image. Should you inadvertently released the mouse button while dragging the Sappho drop-down list. And the Options bar offers you the choice of sampling the current layer, current IE below, or all layers. And we're going to learn more, go to layers in a later video. But if you're great too, we touch layers that are positioned below an adjustment of the layer or layers to which you've applied blending modes, then the current I below future can help you attain the effect that you want. So let's call this apple of this image. So I'm attempting escape key on my keyboard. So now I want to move my mouse cursor over the apple so that it's entirely within the brush pointer. And now hold on the Option or Alt key on your keyboard and then click your mouse button. While this did is sampled the portion of the image that we want to use. So now let's move our bus pointer. I burst cursor maybe about two inches to the right. And then we'll click. I made a clone of that area didn't come up quite as dark as alexa click a couple of more times. So now let's tap the VQ, the keyboard to activate the Move tool and deactivate the clone stamp tool. So now we have a perfect clone of our oppo on this document. So yeah, the cloud, the clones don't cook and really come in handy for creating duplicates of an error very much or by fixing scratches at a phonograph or removing other and watch it items from the from the photo. 32. Using the Dodge and Burn Tools: In this video, we're gonna take a look at photoshops, Dodge and Burn tools. And the icon for the Dodge and Burn tools is rate here is right below drop icon. That looks like a grabbing hand. Deimos ten. If you right-click it, we see we have the Dodge Tool, the bird to of the Spanish tool, sort of falling ally or going to be working with PHP image named red pepper dotted JPEG. And again, that's located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So if you'd like to work alone, you want to open that image. So the Dodge and Burn tools are used for lightening and darkening specific areas over an image. The Dodge Tool increases the brightness of the pixels, whereas the Burn tool decreases the brightness of the pixels. So once we activate either of those two tools, we see some additional options that because settled the Options bar here, you can select a range w1 to lighten or darken. So if we click the drop-down arrow, we see we have the auctions of shadows, which changes the dark areas, highlights, triggers the light areas and mid tones changes the middle range of grace. So once you not give me the tour, that is simply brush on the object that you want to lighten or darken. Now every paint on using a brush so you cannot increase or decrease the size of the brush, as well as its hardness on diet and the other available brush options. So let's start by looking at the Dodge Tool. So I'm going to right click that icon and choose Dodge Tool north. And we could also use the old keyboard shortcut to activate this group of tools. So now you want to tap your left or right bracket key and tell your brushes about maybe 300 pixels. And now let's paint on this image. As we can see, this lightens the dark areas of the image server, lightening those pixels as we drag. So this really is, I get an excellent tool to use for a brightening or darkly only specific areas of your image. So let's right click the icon again, and this time we're gonna choose the bird tool. I want to drag over the red o is a pepper noise that as I'm dragging its darkening those areas. So this is kind of an interesting way of auditing a little shadow effect here, image here. It looks like our pepper has started to rot with the dark carriers. So let's return to the original state of as image. So we'll display the history panel by choosing a window history from the menu. And then we'll click the first state in the history of peddled law brings us back to the original state of the image before you made any Dodger Burn tool adjustments. 33. Using the Sponge Tool: Next we're gonna take a look at this sponge tour. I'm a sponge tool shirts, a space in the Tools Panel with a Dodge and bird tool. And what this does is suddenly modifies the color saturation in areas of an image. So let's activate that tool if you're following along. And again, we're working with the red Dash Pepper dotted JPEG image. So let's click on the i kinda, we're gonna choose sponge tool. And again that's below the drop icon and B of the Dodge Tool burn to analyse punch tool. So activate despite his tool. So once the tool is activated, you could choose either saturate or D saturate from the mode box on the Options bar, you would choose saturates to bring out the color in an image, or a D saturate to soft in the colors in an image. And again, you can adjust the strength of the correction by clicking the flow drop down list and then dragging the slider to the left or right. Right. Now it's set at 50%. So let's pick up the size of our brush a little bit. So I'm gonna tap my right bracket key into my brush is about 200 or so. And we can see the size of the brush is reflected on the Options panel here lets us know the size of our brush. You can also just click the Brush Preset picker, icon them, type in 200 and the size box. And let's set our mode to saturate and drag over the pepper a couple of times. And notice that we're bringing out the reds and the peppers who we are increasing the saturation of those areas. So this is a quick way to break up the saturation in areas that may have been shadowed. Let's take the mode rhabdo list again and we'll choose D saturate this time. And now I'm going to drag over the pepper again. We can see that we are now D saturating rural removing color from those areas. So yes, the spines tool, it's a good way of modifying the saturation of the colors in your image. 34. Using the Healing Brush Tool: In this video, we're going to look at working with the Healing Brush Tool. What this does is allows you to correct imperfections in an image. So for now we're going to open up a different image. I still have the image of this pepper open from the last video. So that's closest symmetry. We will choose file close from the menu, and I don't want to say when he changes. So now we're going to click the open button here in the Photoshop Megan screen, or you can choose file open from the menu. And again, we're going to navigate to the lesson files folder on the desktop. And the name of the file that we're going to open is entitle soldier gray and it's all the way down. Let me sort this alphabetically or soldier underscore grade dot JPEG. So a selector that take open. So let's zoom in a little bit. So a press Command or Control plus the Biggest Little closer, we can see that this image has a lot of problems, but we're going to see what we can do with it. So the Healing Brush, I'd like to spot healing tool with the Healing Brush, You get to tell it where to sample from. So how this works is you hold down the altar Option key on your keyboard and then click on a spot to sample from hold down the option key if using a Mac or the ALT key fusing and windows. So once you've set your sample planets with, then position your brush cursor over the area that you want to fix and then drag over the area to be repaired. So let's activate this tool. So the tool is located in this group of icons were age here is directly below the eyedropper tool group. And if you right-click and it's the second option in the menu Healing Brush Tool. So I'll click it. And now that tool is activated. The Healing Brush Tool is similar to the clone stamp tool, except it will match the texture, lighting, and shading of the source area of the image with the destination area of this sample. So this creates a much more realistic looking touch up. My friend that this tool is great for removing. I'd wanted blemishes, wrinkles and pimples from photographs if you are inclined to do that. And again, we have several options available to us in the Options bar, we could choose our bug brush size, and hardness from the Brush Preset picker icon, you can choose a blending mode, whether to use assemble areas or source or pattern. And as with the other retouching tools, you can also choose the desire to sample mode, which would be current layer, currents layer and below are all layers. So we wanna bought a 20 pixel brush. So let's cut the Brush Preset picker and that's kicking the size box. And then type in 2010 there were temporary Turner enter on a keyboard. So you'll want to make sure of the aligned to boxes unchecked and this preserves the source point. So he could repair more than one area using the same source. So now we see these two whites blemishes here, if we wanted to do is move our brush perjure directly above the two white blemishes. We're gonna use this area as our source point. This is the error that we want to repair the rest of our image width. Next, hold down the option key if you're using a Mac or alt key fusing windows and then click your mouse button. There we've now set our source point. Now let's click and drag and the first blemish hair. And we see the removed without blemish and blend it in with that source print though we selected. Let's click on the second blemish here and just a little white dot to the left of his hats or click on that again. That removes the high blemish. Let's click their Brush Preset picker icon again. And I want to have ten pixel brush now. So a typing turn in the box, then we're tapply Turner enter. And so what I'm gonna do now is repairing this way blemished in amounts forehead. But I'll want to select the different source 0.01 of the source prayed to match as closely as possible to the current colors as a man's forehead rather than over here where it's much brighter. So again, would hold down the option key using a macro alt cave using Windows. And then we'll click a little bit to the right of the white blemish on the man's forehead. Maybe I'll read here and we'll click there. We've now set our news source point, and I will click on the white blemish. And let's click on the blemished next to the man's right. I as well's little little white. You dodge to the left of the badge, right die, so we'll click on that, and that repairs that blemishes as well. So let's save our changes. We'll choose File, Save for the menu. And actually I think we're downwind his image for the time being, so as closer to what she was filed, close from the menu and we've already saved it, but we'll click save. And that brings us back to the main Photoshop screen. 35. Using the Spot Healing Brush: This video we're gonna talk about one of my favorite tools in Photoshop, and that is the spot healing brush. Now this works just like the Healing Brush Tool, except that it does not require you to designate a source by Option clicking or old clicking. It automatically samples the texture of the area where you want to repair and then matches the target area to the surrounding area. Sort of Spot Healing browser is the first tool or the Healing Brush group. And again, it can tap the J key on your keyboard to activate that group or tools or right-clicking on the icon by usually have this tool active, sorry, whenever I, no matter what tool I'm Ana could always tap J to get to that first tool of the group, the spot healing brush. So if you're following along, we're working with the image named lighted dash house dot JPEG. And again, that's located in the less than Files folder on your desktop. If we want to follow along, you want to open that photo. So now that's right. Think that group of Healing Brush Tools are going to choose the first wide Spot Healing Brush. And I think that one a little bit bigger brush, maybe about 250 pixels. So I'm gonna clicks are Brush Preset picker and then type in 250 and the size box and then multiple Turner render North who are working on a layer. And again, we're gonna talk about later in a later lesson, you want to click that sample all layers checkbox. Otherwise you'll be sampling from a blank layer. So this way you're sampling non-destructively. Now, you don't necessarily a half to work with as layers when using this tool, it's a personal preference. You can use a Spot Healing Brush just onto your main image. Though this is considered our destructive edit. So in my opinion, whenever possible it's best to do your editing on our layer rather than the main image itself. And you don't get to learn all about layers in an upcoming video. So back to the spot healing breast. So this tool is best used in areas where there's consistent color and texture. And I find this especially good for removing telephone lines up flyaway hair and the like. Now if you want to clone an area just outside the edge of the cursor. So if we wanted to clone an error just like RID here next to this mailbox, you can try clearly proximity match from the Options bar. If there's a lot of very detailed shown in the image, try clicking the create texture button, which will direct Photoshop to create its own texture that combine the, all of the characteristics of the pixels of the brush Sharia. I tend to always leave this option, the type options set as content aware. When content aware is activated, you can easily remove items such as phone wires, pulls and wanted branches, or even people from images. And all you need to do in this case is simply drag over the item and Photoshop will fill in that area with surrounding pixels. And this is, as I mentioned, this is the option that I typically tend to go with. Also, many photographers from the spot healing brush, especially helpful i removing spots often caused by dust or dirt to the lens from a photo. So if your polygon, you want to make sure that our content aware is selected and the Options bar. And what we're going to do is remove the mailbox from the image. So I'm going to click on the male dogs are just dragged down until the mailboxes selected. We wait a minute and Warsh, it's God, absolutely amazing in my opinion. So let's close this image. We're gonna choose file close for the menu, and then we wanna save our changes. So I'll click Save. So we're going to open the image of the soldier gets or choose File Open. And the name of the image is soldier underscore gray dot JPEG. So a selected I click open and I went to a much smaller brush. So I'll zoom into this a little bit. So we'll tap commander controls and plus to zoom in, maybe about there. And we want to reduce the size of our brush meter on a brush or this big. So we'll click the Brush Preset picker and select the text and the size box and type in 22. So we will go with about a 22 pixel brush though temperature inner enter salts try using the proximity match option this time. So click that button on the Options bar. Now when I click this dark blemish directly below the soldiers right pocket. So select that, drag and click and wish, it's God. You also have a couple of blemishes on the soldiers hats that I want to remove, but I need a little smaller brush for that from a click the Brush Preset picker again. And we'll go with what, a 13 pixel branch. So I'll type that are this size box and then tap return or enter a keyboard. And it will click over those dots. That removes the dots. Didn't do such a great job in the first one, let's try Content Aware and drag over that area. There's a little bit better job than the proximity match. So yes, the spot healing brush, as I mentioned, one of my favorite tools in Photoshop. 36. Using the Patch Tool: In this video, we're going to play around with a patch tool a bit. And the Patch Tool, which shows a space of the tools panel with the Healing Brush Tool, allows you to repair one area with pixels from another area using a selection. So like the Healing Brush Tool, the patch tool matches the texture, lighting and shading of the source area of the image with the destination area of the sample. However, the patch toward differs in that you're not really sampling a specific pixel, but rather a selected area. So let's activate the patch tool. So a right-click on the group of Healing Brush icons of the patch tool is the third oxygen, the menu so top that. The tool works like a last so that you draw a selection around the area that you want to repair. But you want to leave a teeny tiny bit of breathing space around the object or to wonder fix. Then you click in the center of the selection and then drag it to the area that you want to repair. So let's draw our selection around the white scratch next to the Matt's ear. So just drag right around that area. And again, you want to leave a little breathing room around the object. Three, you want to fix. And then we want to join the lines. Tsunami, click insight in the selection and then drag to the right. We're going to bring about maybe half an inch to the right, maybe about their release the mouse button. So that much was selected, de-select to turn off that selection. So I did a pretty good job of fixing it. Another good use for the patch tool is to remove lines or seems that are left over from the Content Aware Tool. So if I have a selection made on my image, for instance, I want to get rid of this c member choose, Select, Modify Feather from the menu and then some other radius to Latin AU 2030 pixels or saw, and then click OK. Now you can drag around to fix that area and until you find an area that matches. And by increasing the feather of that helps to blend those edges in better. I find the patch tool especially helpful for repairing scratches and terrorists or removing a date and timestamp in a scanned photograph. But I think we're done with this for now. Civil choose file, close for the menu. And we'll save our changes. So I'll click Save. That brings us back to our main Photoshop home screen. 37. 0314 Usiing the Content Aware Fill Workspace: There is now a new fantastic workspace entirely dedicated to content aware fill. And this is the first time that we could tell the content that we're tool where to sample from. And in my opinion, this is the most powerful tool for removing distractions. So legacy way of doing this of removing a destructions uses the conduit to wear a tool was to first select the item that you want to remove. So let's activate the bar Q2 here, and I'm our drag of a trigger on this little block of wood. Then we would choose Edit. Phil. Then choose Cogito, we're fill for the contents drop-down list, that click OK. And for the most part I did a fairly good job. Let me undo that and I'm going to show you the new way of doing it. And that is by using the Content Aware filled dialogue and to access that we choose Edit counties there were fill from the menu. So let's cancel that out. And if you're following along, let's draw selector on this piece of wood. And the, you know, I typically use the lasso tool for drag my selection. In this case, you could use the rectangular marquee as its rectangular shape. But what is use the lasso tool. So let's draw slowly around that object. And of course we want to meet the end of the two lines, the connect three. I want to expand the selection a little bit. So we'll choose, select, modify, expand from the menu. I'm not expanded by about four pixels and we'll click OK. Now to display the content aware fill workspace, we choose edit content aware fill from the menu. When it launches, Photoshop displays a preview in the right window of how our images grid to look once we apply the adjustment. So on the left window we can see everything that Photoshop is going to try to sample from to remove the distractions. And only color is designated in green here. I really don't want it to sample from this fight is red fire hydrant. So I want to remove that area for the selections. So I want to do is I'm gonna click the minus symbol up on the Options bar. This allows us to remove portions from my selection and I'm going to remove this fire hundredths. So I'm gonna just gonna drag over because see that once I drag over, the green area is being removed. So knob only selecting from the grass area. And again in the center we see the end result. So the end result doesn't look the way you want. Try removing or adding to this selection sort. We wanted to add support to this lecture. We would click the plus and then think over there that you want to add. But I don't wanna do that, so I'm going to undo that last command. So yeah, what's nice about this feature is that it includes a live preview so you can see the changes made to the end result as you paint out the unwanted areas or add an additional areas, I'm going to remove some of these additional areas from consideration. So I'm gonna click the minus area. And I don't want to get these leaves here, so I just want the dark grass, the bromegrass area. So remove these areas from consideration as well. And again, we can see our center area just as we remove those areas from consideration. And this is beginning to look a lot more realistic. So on the right pane here under the content or were filled tab, we have some additional options that we can set. So if there's a lied or patch after the fill, try clicking the color adaptation drop-down list and try, try one of the options from the list. So right now just such to default by set it to None. You can see how the changes that we can see, the area that we removed if we set it to very high, we can see that option changes as well and that doesn't look good at all. So let's go back to the default that seem to do the best job. So again, to use the color adaptation to create a better match by adapting the contrast and brightness. So this is a good option if your selector ends up changing in color or texture. Now another option is rotation adaptation. This allows you to rotate content for a closer match. So this is a good option for rotated or otherwise curved patterns that didn't come out right? So again, try some of the options from this list so we'll take, okay, we can see the selection changed as we did. So again, the idea here is just to try these different options until you find the optimal adjustment scale allows you to re-size the contents for a better match. Or sometimes that can really make an improvement. And actually I liked called that looks mirror allows you to mirror the content horizontally or vertically of so what this does is kinda flips it. And that looks pretty good. So for the Output Settings area of this panel, we have a couple of options. Current layer, new layer, and duplicate layer. Now note that outputting to the current layer is considered destructive. So if you're working on your made the image with the outer using layers. And this is a destructive editor that will affect your main image. And again, we're going to talk a lot more about layers in a later video. So I've fake selection looks good. So let's click OK and there's did a pretty good job. So let me undo that and I'll tap command or control D to Deselect. What I want to do now is show you how to remove more than one item from an image. So to do so, I'm gonna select the first item. And let's go to edit content aware fill for the menu. So I'm going to click my Lasso Tool. And I want to select this area as well. And now if you're looking at our preview window, both items are being removed. And again, you can do the same thing with the Colorado rotation or rotation adaptation. So experiment with those a little bit until you find the right result. Just wanted to assure you that you're able to do that. I typically prefer to do one item at a time. Way. These items, these options will be applied to both of the selected areas. But I get to play around with it didn't do what works best for your workflow. So I'm gonna click apply and then we'll click OK to complete the operation. And we can see we still have these two selections or our screen. So to remove a selection, you hold on commodity of using a Mac or Control D if using Windows. So let's do that. And we can see the selections have now been removed. And you really cannot tell that there were originally two items in his image. And I think we're done with this image for now. So let us choose file close from the menu and we'll save our changes. Thanks Rick. Okay. And we returned to the Photoshop main screen. 38. Using the Color Replacement Tool: The color replacement tool, which is located under the brush and Pencil tool group on the Tools panel, allows you to sample a color from an anchor point and paint over a colouring of your image with the assembled color. Now before the introduction of the road, I've tool an excellent it was for the color replacement tool, was repairing red eye in images. Now if you happen to be working with a bitmap index to a multi-channel color mode, you'll need to convert your image to another mode, such as RGB, as the color replacement tool does not work in these modes. So if you're following along, you want to open the image named red underscore I dotted JPEG. Here we have an image which suffers from red eye because he, the man's eyes are red. The center of the man's eyes are red. So we'll start by activated the zoom tool. So tap the Z key on your keyboard and that's clicking the image directly below the man's eye, and that allows us to zoom in on the eyes. Next we'll click the foreground color square. And that's the topmost square in the Tools Panel. And the RGB boxes, we're gonna type in 0 in each of those boxes. So 0, Tab, Tab 0. So now we have 0 in each of the RGB boxes. And what this does is sets block as the foreground color. So that looks like ok. So now we want to click the color replacement tool. And again that's in the brush and pencil group. It has right above the clone stamp and patterns time tour. And it's the third option in the menu here. So we'll click color replacements tool and we want to take a tolerance drop-down list and drag that slider until it's right around 30% or so. The lower the tolerance, the more particular the color replacement is 2l is we wanted to be a pretty particular. I'm gonna zoom in a little bit more, I think. So I'm gonna type the command or control and plus key on my keyboard. So our brush with a little bit too big for this, you've got a smaller brush, maybe let's go about five pixels of source or click the Brush Preset picker. And the size box, we'll type in five, the top return or enter. You wanna make sure that sampling is such a contiguous setting sampling to contiguous. You can repair more than one area that assembled color. So now we want to position across area around the eye and drag around the pupil without won't do is change the color from red to black. We zoom in a little bit more. Thank some of our cross pointed as drag around the red pupil of the eye. And if we zoom out, we can see that I did a pretty good job of removing that I read. I must touch us up a little bit more as a little bit red leftover here. Yeah, that looks pretty good. Although my preferred tool for using this is the red I2, and we're going to actually work with that in the next video. 39. Using the Red Eye Tool: So what can feature in Photoshop is the red eye tool. And this allows you to quickly and easily remove red eye from photos with just one click. Simply Center the red eye cursor over the red portion of the image and then click. If the darkening effect spills over too much into the surrounding areas than he would reduce the percentage of the pupil size of the Options bar. Likewise, if the pupil appears too dark, but he wanted to lower the dark and amount percentage. So the road I tool shows us based on the tool bar with the Spot Healing Brush Tool, the Healing Brush Tool, and the Patch Tool which we've already worked with a little bit. And that group of tools is located directly under the eye dropper. And you can always tap the J key on your keyboard to activate a group or tools. So let's right-click and choose right i2 AS a last option in the menu. So if you're using a Mac hold down command and then plus or Windows hold down control and plus and tap until we're about about 300 or so. That again, we want to make sure that the red eye tool is activated. So click in the central a rare diarrhea and then just click with a mouse and look at that. Instead removal of red eye. You can see that it did a much better job of removing the red eye than the color replacement tool did, which we worked with in the last video. I click over here as well so that our colors consistent. And again, you can experiment with the pupil size of the dark and amount. If it didn't come out quite the way you wires, I can increase the pupil size if I wanted to make sure that it included, could add more of the pupil and I could even darker lighten the Deccan amount. And that zoom out sewer tap command or control minus the allows us to zoom out. So I think we're done with this image, are we're going to choose File Close to the menu and you don't want to save any changes. So we're going to click don't save to return back to the main Photoshop screen. 40. Using the Marquee Tools: And the next several videos we're going to be working with Photoshop selection tools. Though selection tools allow you to select an area of an image for editing. And when an area is selected for shop will display a dotted line around the selected area, referred to as Marching ads, or activate the marquee tool, for instance, and draw a little line over on this side, we see the little marching out. So this lets us know that this area is selected. Now there are many selection tools that come packaged with Photoshop. There was the marquee tools and that's the second icon from the top here. And these relevant various mark key tools we have, there's a Lasso Tools, there's the magic wand, the Quick Selection Tool on the objects selection tool, and also the crop tool, which is considered a selection tool. So for instance, if I jog around this sign here, everything is cropped out except for our selection. So I'm going to undo that. So in this video we're going to work with the mark key tools, which are located under the second icon group from the top in our Tools panel. So for now we're gonna be working with a filename bb dot J peg. So if you want to follow along with me, you want to open that file and that's located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. A group of bar cubed tools contains several tools that have rectangular marquee tool. And this allows you to create a square or a rectangular marquee selection. So again, if our drug or on this side we see that we have our square selection around the area that I'm dragging. Now if you want to drag from the center out rather than from a corner, would hold down the option or the Alt key on your keyboard, then dragged out of North, I am greeting off from the center rather than draining from an edge addition if you want to create a perfect square holding the Shift key as you drag it. And this lecture will be constrained to a perfect square. So when an area of an image is selected using one of these selection tools and the editing that you apply such as colors and filters, etcetera, will be applied only to the selected area, the area within this bounding box. In other words, when you use one of the selection tools, what you're doing is saying that who wanted to do something to this area of the foetal only, such as apply a filter flow this specific color. You get the idea. So it's an accurate way of targeting a specific area of your image. That is to say, you're restricting your edits tool only that part of the photo. For instance, you can apply a filter to only this selection by choosing filter. Let's say I wanted to sharpen this pride to sharper than a choose unsharp mask. And that will only sharpen the area within the bounding box. But let's cancel out of here. So right now we see we have a selection on our screen, a little square here. And to de-select a selection, you can either choose, select D, select from the menu, or tap that Command or Control D key on your keyboard. So commodity if you're using a Mac or Control D, if using Windows. So let's do that. So hold down command or control and attempt to de qi and our selection is de-selected. So let's activate z rectangular marquee tool. So we'll right-click on that second icon for the top inch whose rectangular marquee tool from the menu. And again, this allows us to create a square or rectangular selection. Now on the Options bar we have some additional options. One of these is feather, which allows it to soften the edge of our selection. But we want it, we don't want to do that right now just so you aren't sure if the feather is set to 0, that the style is set to normal. We have a couple of other options for the style box. Now another feature of the Options bar is the select and mask option. There's allows us to modify the edge quality of your selection. And we have several sliders here that we can use to modify or a selection. But let me go back over here. Let me make a selection first. So you can see this, this works. See these tools activated, I should say, I'll click selected mask. So the radius option here, radius slighter here, use a lower settings for simple objects and then a higher setting for more complex selections. And this is a pretty simple selection, so we'll leave it says 0. But notice how the edges change and they kind of blend in with the background is that rigor to the right. Contrast interprets the abruptness of this selection. You'll want to use a lower setting for more out of focus are blurry objects, whereas objects with complex edges may look better at a higher contrast. And again, with a lot of this, you just want to eyeball it, it, until it looks the way that's who aren't. Shift Edge. You drag the slider to the left to tighter the selection or to the right to expand this selection. Smooth higher settings will change the sharp corners to rounded corners. We already mentioned feather which will soften the edge of your selection. And we'll be working with the selected mask properties more in detail in upcoming videos. So i'm going to escape out of here. I'm going to click cancel. So again, if you're following along, we have that rectangular marquee tool activated. So that's drink of a taker selection from the signer or in our image cern Teller about right here. So what we're going to do now is copy this selection. So I'm gonna choose edit, copy from the menu. Now let's choose File New from them in here. There's just, there's our New Document window. And notice that's the preset option is set to clipboard here. This means that the new image that we create will be exactly the same size as a selection that we placed on the clipboard, the selection of that sign. So now let's click the backward contours dropped all Esther was set this to white. And then we'll click Create. As we can see, this creditor document with exactly the same dimensions as our selection. So now lets choose edit, paste for the menu and paste the copied selection into the New Document window. So this gives you just a little idea of how to use selections at how selections can come in handy. So let's close this out. New documented, we don't want to save it. So click file, close for the menu and then click on Save. And we're back to our main BB dot JPEG image. So now let's click the selected Basket button on our Options bar. And again, this is where we can modify the edge quality of our selection. And let's type in 15 in the feather box. So I'll type in 15 pixels. And then we'll click OK. And we don't really see too much of a difference here. So now lets choose edit, copy them, or create a new document again. So File, New clipboard. We wanted to make sure backward contents are such a light. Never click Create and will choose Edit pennies from the menu. And now we can see the feathering effective. Our edges are, edges are much smoother rather than the sharp contrast the edges that we had last time. Let's close this document. So instead of choosing File Close to the menu, you can also use the keyboard shortcut command to W if you're using a Mac or Control W if using Windows. So that's tap that they will choose, don't save. So now I want to deselect this selection. So we'll tap Command or Control D on our keyboard to the select selection. So there are a couple of other tools that are Marquis group here we have the Elliptical Marquee Tool, and this allows you to create an oval or circular Mark he's selection. So again, you would hold up the ultra Option key to create a selection from the center out or hold down the Shift key to create a perfect circle. There's also the single roll marquee tool and the single column Marquee Tool. And this allows you to create a horizontal or vertical border selection that is one pixel wide, rectangular, the rectangular, the Elliptical Marquee tools. His first two options allow us to choose a style from the Options bar. Again, that's the style option right here we have three options. You have normal, which is the default. And this chooses a free form, rectangular or square selection for the rectangular marquee tool, or an elliptical or circular selection for the elliptical murky tool, and their proportions are determined by dragging. We also have the fixed ratio, which allows you to create your selections based upon a specific width and a height ratio that you would type in. Someone's r choose r that we see these boxes become activated. And also fixed size, which allows us to create a selection based on a fixed size. And again, we enter the value in pixels and the width or height box. But I want to set the style taught Karl's. So I'm gonna click the drop-down list and choose normal from the little menu. So we're going to open up another image. So hold down the Command O key. If you're using a Mac or Control, if using Windows. Then you'll want to navigate to the Lesson 1000. Desktops or Gamow choose desktop in the left pane. Double-click the lesson files folder. And we want to open the image named a globe dot JPG. And there's this image right here, globe dao to JPEG. And then I'll click open. Let's zoom in a little bit. So I'll hold down command or control. And then the plus symbol. That looks good. So we're gonna do is actually be the'll Elliptical Marquee tool. So you want to right-click the marquee group and choose elliptical murky tool from the menu. So now we want to click in the center of a globe, but we're going to do is draw our marquee from the center out. To do so, we need to hold down the option key views can MAC or alt key, if you're using Windows, then drag to the lower right until the marquee selection completely covers, aren't gloves barred right here, looks good. Source selection is a little bit off center. So to move or we just click anywhere in the center of a selection, Andre, and then moves our selection. So I've moved it to about there. So now lets choose edit cut from the menu. And you can see though, removes our selection from this image. And again, if you wanted to, we could paste this in another image or into a new image, but we're not gonna do that, but let's just undo that. So a choose Edit, Undo cut pixels from the menu. So again, a couple of options with the Marquee Tool, rectangular, marquee, elliptical, murky, these are probably the ones you use most often. In fact, I actually rarely ever used the elliptical, but I use the irregular bar key, or I would use one of the other RLabs. So tools are magic wand tools, but we're going to look at all of those in future videos. 41. Using the Lasso Tools: The last group of selection tools we're going to work with are the last. So tools, those are the third icon from the top here, right-click and we see we have three Lasso Tools here. The Lasso Tool, polygonal SO 2a and the magnetic lasso tool. So these are used to select areas in an image that may not be round or square. In the last video, we saw how to use the rectangular mark here in the elliptical murky. So the first tour, the last so 2A group is the regular lasso tool. But when this is activated, you could draw a free form selection around an irregular shape by simply pressing the area on the image that you want to select. No, you would not use this to select anything precisely. There are much better tools in Photoshop for that and we're going to actually work with some of them in upcoming videos. But you would use those just for a quick, Less so selection. And we've already working with his Twitter a little tiny bit in previous videos. Now when you use the lasso tool, you need to ensure that our to complete your selection by connecting together that beginning and ending points. So for example, if I'm drawing a lasso, draw it all the way to the beginning parties so that they are connected. So let's work with this a little bit. So I reflected a lot. You want to open the image named that last so dotted JPEG, and that's the lesson files folder on your desktop. And we have an image of a pepper here on our screen or in a dress selection around this image. So to do so, we'll right-click the third icon from the top, the group of Lasso Tools, and we'll choose the first tool of this list for regular lasso tool. So that's dragon on the pepper until the entire image is selected. So then you just drag slowly. And again, I wouldn't, I would not use this for are making a precise selection. It's mainly just use for drawing a quick selection around an area. And we'll see uses for this in upcoming videos as well. And I'll just draw a basic selection around air. And again, we want to collect the beginning and ending prions. And now we see our selection. So let's choose additive copy from the menu. So we're going to open an existing Photoshop document, so we'll choose file open from the menu. We went to open their image named one underscore pepper, and that's a JPEG file. So we'll select that and then choose Open. And as chews on it, paste that inserts are copied selection into the image. I've attempted 70K here my keyboard to activate the Move tool, and now it can move this around in our image. So let's close. This image will choose file close from the menu. And we'll save our changes. So we'll click Save to save a close the file and notice that it's going to save it in Photoshop format. So will actually end up with two images. The one pepper, which contains just that one Pepper, and our Photoshop document, which will contain both on the peppers. So I'll click Save to save that file and it looks like ok. So there are a couple of other last so tools in this group of icons. The second is the polygonal Lasso Tool, and this is great for selecting straight sided areas. Now this is a little bit trickier to use in a regular last so tall. So to use the polygonal tool, you click where you wish to begin selecting. So have you move your mouse pointer where you want the straight line to end, and then you click. There, you continue moving your boss part two by clicking to attach new lines, segments. Let me activate that tool or show you quickly. Clicked here, she knows I'm drinking my mouse, I'm drawing a line. We can always hold down the Shift key to ensure we have a straight line and click again. Now about it by second segment, drag again until I want to add my third segment. Once I'm happy, I click, drag up till another location where I want to add my first segment. Click there. We could drag it all the way to the end to close our selection. So again, this tool is ideal for selecting a straight line to objects such as our window panes or doors. Now the third tour of this group is that magnetic lasso tool. This tool creates a selection by snapping onto the edges of a visible object, which can be a nice alternative to the regular last so tool. As you draw around the area you want to select, the tool sticks to the visible edges of a selection, dropping magnetic acre prints as you drag. So if activate this tool should, let's drag arrived the pepper with our magnetic Nassau to Illinois that has dropped, dropping anchor points. As I drag. So many people prefer to use this rather than the irregular lasso tool. But again, there are better tools to use for creating precise selections. Now once we come to the ending area, we double-click our mouse procedure to complete the selection. So let's open up another image. So we'll choose file open from the menu. And we're going to open the image near the ocean window. We're going to play around with some of these other tools here. And that's just the image right here. So we're selected and then click open. So now let's document the polygonal Lasso Tool. So right-click this group of icons and then choose the second option, Pluto less or too low. So there was this little frame above the doorways, such create a selection around that. So we'll start by taking the top left corner of the frame. Then we wanna click on the top right corner of the frame. That creates our first selection line. Now we'll click on the lower right edge of our frame. I'll click there, and this completes our next line. They all drank to the lower left corner of our frame and click and then drag up to the top until we meet our selection. And this completes a selection soon after you've drawn your selection and if wish to move it around in your image, you click directly in the center of it and then just drag around. And also I've now moved my selection around. So if you didn't get your selection quite as straight as you would have liked, tried regular around and line up the edges a little bit better. But if you want to add to the selection on additional errors to the selection, to use the ICT cuts of the Options bar. So if you move your mouse pointer over the night kind of tells you what the, what I can't die. So here we have agile selection, subtract to selection or intersect with selection, can also hold the altar Option key to subtract from the selection. And this works better like but their last so tools, for instance, that you could add or subtract your selection by using the altar option keys to subtract them a selection or the shift key to out of this selection. Or again, he was Zhi Zai. Use these icons are the Options bar. If you want to select everything except for what's currently selected, you can invert the selection by choosing Select Inverse from their menu. And notice now that now everything is selected except for a selection. So virtue is edit, cut. For instance, everything will be cut out except for a selected object. Again, to these select everything we tap that commanded D or Control D key on our keyboard. So those are using the last. So tools in Photoshop. 42. Using the Paste Into Command: The paste into command, which is located on the menu, edit, paste special, and then paste into what this does is pastes an image that you haven't memory into a selected area, into a selection. So you can paste a counter copied selection of an image or an entire image if you so choose into another selection such as a doorway or a window frame, when you do the original section is pasted onto a new layer. So let's see how this works. So we're gonna close this document that we have opened on the screen. So we'll choose file close from the menu. And we're not going to save any changes. So we'll click don't save. We want to open up the filename in Glenda dot JPEG, and that's the lesson files folder on our desktop. So choose file open from the menu. And again, you want to navigate to the lesson files folder in your desktop. And England theory does. So select that and then choose Open. Let's make this a little bigger. So now I'm going to select everything in this image. I want to start this entire image. And to do so we choose, Select All from the menu. Or you could use the command, a keystroke combination of using a Mac or Control a if using Windows. So now this entire image is selected and we want to choose out of it copy from the medium. So let's open up another image, sort of choose File Open. And the name of the image that we wanted to open is named. So right down here somewhere, tunnel window dot JPEG. So we'll select that and then click open. So now I want to activate our rectangular marquee tool. And if remember, that's a second Hooper tools and our tools panel and thus the first tool in their Mandy Source select that soon where we wanted to do is draw a selection around the window or the area of the window that displays the outside. So I'll click on the upper left corner of the window and then drag around until I have a selection around that area. So about right here. And now we'll execute our Earth paste into command. So I'll choose that printer paste special and then choose paste into. And that inserts that copied selection to images every copy on our clipboard in to the currently selected area. Now keep in mind however, that when pasting a selection from one image to another, the Pasted data retains its original pixel dimensions. So you might need to experiment a little bit with the image size by changing the size of the police to the image. To do so, you choose image, image size for the menu, and then you can adjust the size of the image. After you've pasted in your image, uses that paste into command. You can actually move the image around inside of that frame by clicking the Move tour of a tool bar again, if that first tool and then dragging and nervous and I can move the image around the selection. So we'll leave it as is. And I think we're done with this documents, so we'll choose File Close from their new and we don't want to save our changes. So a click, don't save when prompted. And I have a couple of other ridges opened here. Their last saw the England. I think I want to close all of my images. So we're gonna use the file close all commands. So we'll choose file, close off of the video. And that brings us back to our main Photoshop screen. 43. Using the Magic Wand Tool: In this lesson, we're going to work with a magic one tool. And this tool allows you to create a selection based on consistent colors in an image without you having to drive and select to create a selection based upon a color, simply click the color in your image to select all adjacent pixels of a similar color. So when you click on an area, a will then select similar tones in the image. And it does that based on the tolerance that you have a set in the Options bar. So let me activate the magic wand tool that's located in the fourth group of icons from the top in the Tools Panel that shares a space in the toolbar where the objects selection tool and the Quick Selection Tool. So let me click on the magic wand. Here we see the tolerance option and I think by default it's choosy, set to about 30 tours saw, which is a pretty low tolerance. So note that this doesn't select based on color, but rather one brightness values. So the higher the tolerance, the more areas it will pick up. Truth be told most people prefer to use the Quick Selection Tool or rather the magic wand tool. So there are some hadoop refer this tool. So again, I'm going through all of these tools to show you how they all work. And then you can choose your favorite tool based on your particular workflow or the tools that you like best. Also by default, a victory, the sample size is set to point cyber, but you'll want it steps to five-by-five average. This works best and he also wanted to show it anti alias is set and this will help smooth out your selection. Contiguous will only select in a contiguous area. So if we have other objects in your image, a particular journal, or select this object that you want to ensure that contiguous is selected. So the image that I have open here is near dread Dash Pepper dot JPEG. So if you want to follow along, you want to open that for the lesson files folder on your desktop. So let's click the magic wand tools for getting us the fourth tool from the top, and we choose magic launched from the list. So let's click on our pepper. So notice that because our tolerance is set pretty low, it only selected a small portion of our pepper. So let's choose selected, de-select for the menu. And let's type 85 of the tolerance box. Increase the tolerance a bit of a click of the pepper again. And notice that it's selected more of the pepper this time. And that's de-select that. Now in order to improve the selection, you might want to play a little bit around with a sample size. So we haven't set by five-by-five average. Let's change that to 11 by 11 average and then click on our paper. And this selected much more of our pepper. Let's try it again. So let's deselect. Yes, so I'll tap Command or Control D and our keyboard. Let's try 31 by 31. Now, instead of messing around with all of these settings, there is another study, relatively recent addition to Photoshop is to select Subject option. And what this will do is Photoshop will look in your image or your document, or trying to determine what the subject will be and that's selected automatically being stored its algorithm. So if I click select Subject, lucked out that it's selected the entire pepper, including the green stem. So every chose to cut from the menu. And you can see that every part of the Pepper was selected, except for the shadow here. And we can always add to our selection, but holding the Shift key or a keyboard or than drinking down to the shadow there. Now our shadow was selected as well. Remember holding down the Shift key allows you to add a selection. Whereas holding down the altar Option key allows you to remove from the selection. So usually before I mess around with these settings in the options by their tolerance, the sample size, I try using the select Subject ten more times than not. Photoshopped does a really good job at figuring out what it is that I want to select. What my thing I wanted to mention, as I'm a select menu, there's an option, grow and similar. You can try to use these options to expand the selection to include all adjacent similar colored pixels are all similar colored pixels throughout the entire image respectively. So it's a good way to expand your selection a little out of time. So that is using the magic wand tool. 44. Using the Quick Selection Tool: A favorite tool of many people is the Quick Selection Tool, which shares a space in the Tools Panel. What's a magic wand tool? Again, that's the fourth group of tools from the top. The Quick Selection Tool is the second tool on the menu. I think that this is the best selection tool inside of Photoshop. It's kinda like a brush on magnetic selection barrage. You just click and drag and paint and it's also the fastest tool. And again, as with all brushes, you can use the right bracket to increase the brush size or the left brackets to decrease the size of your brush. So this tool allows you to create a selection by painting with a brush cursor across the image. And the tool automatically selects surrounding areas that are similar in color, contrast and texture to the IRS over which you are painting and thus creates a selection in the process. Now before I do any of that, the first thing I do is click the Select subject button. And again, using this Photoshop automatically selects a subject for you and does a fairly good job of selecting, and in this case a did a phenomenal job, is selected the entire pepper including the stem. And then it could apply an adjustment to this selection such as changing the brightness I adding Dodger burden, et cetera. But let me show you how this tool works without using the select Subject to Zora. Just say Photoshop did a horrible job of selecting our subjects. So we'll deselect our selection. So again, we use Command or Control D or keyboard. And if you're following along and working with that red Dash Pepper dot J peg. So you want to open that from the lesson files folder on your desktop if you'd like to work alarm. So I'm gonna increase my brush size a little bit by tapping the right bracket key on my keyboard, it'd be about there. And now I'll drag cross the pepper, slowly drag across the pepper, and then release I mouse button. So I did a pretty good job in selecting except for doubt here, kinda went a little bit too far. So note that what do you release your mouse button, you're automatically in the ad to selection mode. So we didn't select everything you could add to that selection, but you want to do the opposite. We want to remove this portion from this selection if snow as hold down Option or Alt. And then we'll drag it a little bit too. Rigorous selection up, and now it's selects just the pepper. Now if I wanted to include the shutter as well, you can use our shift key. And then I'd to our selection slowly until that, till the shadow of the pepper is selected. Maybe a little bit more yr. I'm down here. Alright, so now let's say that I did want to include this stem here. I just wanted to include the pepper I could drink over this portion of the image to remove from a selection. So let's click the Remove from selection button this time. And you can do that instead of using the algebra Option key for prefer, I'll drag across this selection and that area has been now removed. So now we see that everything except for the stem is selected. So yes, as you work more and more selection, you'll be using the addtwo selection or removal of selection features quite often, pretty much constantly actually. But that's something that I wanted to include my stem. So I'm gonna click the selection icon and then drag over the rest of the stem. And now that portion has been added back in. So yes, so that is using the Quick Selection Tool, One of my favorite tools in Photoshop. 45. Using the Crop Tool: In this video, we're going to work with the crop tool now. But the crop tool, you can isolate an area of your image and remove unwanted portions from the top and bottom and sides of it. Cropping an image reduces the file size of an image as well as removes extra space around it. So for instance, I could remove all of his whitespace is extra and needed to whitespace in this image of the pepper. So it's actually read the crop tools. So to do so I'll tick of the crop icon. This is this icon of h here, the fifth one from the top can also tap the C key on your keyboard. Takeaways that group of icons and the aircraft tools, the first icon in this group. So a selected, once you activate the tool, sizing handles that appear on the center and corner edges of the image. So to crop an image, just simply drag the sizing handles until they're cropping areas fine tuned to your liking. So now once a commit this crop, all these areas are designated by grade, will be removed from the image. Now another way of cropping is simply drawing them are key, are about the area of the image that you want to keep sort of dreary. The sizing handles Alderman drawn or draw little selection around our pepper that once I release my mouse button, only that area inside of the bony box that are juke will be selected. Anything outside the areas, again as designated by gray will be deleted. So let's undo that sewer tap command-and-control 0 keyboard. Now if you need to constrain your crop to a specific aspect ratio, choose the desired value from the aspect ratio GFDL list here on the Options bar. So I'm gonna click on the list. We see a variety of Ask aspect ratios or weekend set, four by 55 by 72 by three, etcetera. Can also choose it and choose a specific width and height. So I can type in two by three. And then it can trace constraint to that ratio. Again, I can drag my image around here. I'm going to undo that. Whereas ratio allows you to crop to a customer spectra ratio. That is to say you can free form your crop. So let's crop this image. So if you're following along, you want to click the Crop tool to act to activate it. Next we want to click on the lower left sizing handle and Drake inward until the crop mark here's just around a pepper. Now if you notice that it seems to be cropping to a racial you'll want to take that racial drop-down list. And she was racial other than one of these Pacific ratios. So if I have this set of two by three, for example, that's the only way that I can crop this image is an R two by three ratio. So let's clear this original. So we'll click the clear button on the Options bar. I'm going to go back to ratio. Then we can apply a free form crop tour image. So you want to drink a lower enough sizing handle and Drake Edward until a crop mark key is just around the pepper. So like so then will release the mouse button. Now note that when you're cropping several overlays that you can use. An overlay is this grid that's placed over my image. It can help you to align your images as well as stick or adhere to the up photography rule of thirds. So there are several overlays that you can use to change the Overlay. Click the little overlay icon next to the right of the swerved straighten. And here are all the overlays that you can use. By default, the rule of thirds overlay is selected in which the grid is divided into nine equal parts. And this adheres to the compositional rule of thumb with a subject of an image should appear at what are the intersections of the grid? And they're all digits. You can set just a regular grid. And this can help you to align specific areas of your image, diagonal, triangle, et cetera. But let's go back to rule of thirds. So now we have a couple of options. We could cancel our crop. I click in the council icon and that's this middle icon here in the center of three icons. Cannot have just tap the escape key on your keyboard to cancel the crop. Or you can confirm the crop. Once you confirm the crops or crop will be executed, can also tap the return or enter key on your keyboard. So retype escape on my keyboard, that capsules are a crop. So let me drag this in again to set our crop area. But we actually want to confirm or crop soil type return or enter our keyboard. And our image has now been cropped and everything outside of that selected area has now been removed. So let's say this image to what she was file, save from the menu and see, notice you can also use the command S keystroke combination if you're using a Mac or Control S of using windows to save your changes. And let's close as immiscible Choose File Close. And we want to open a different image. So you want to chop command o if using a MACRA control all of using windows. And the image that we want to open is the image named Cardinal. And again, that's in that lesson files folder on our desktop. And now it says image here, so a selective and click open. So what we're going to do is use photoshops, straighten feature. And how this works is you take straight into activates the tool and then who draw along something. You had your image that should be straight, such as the top of a door or along the horizon. And then photoshop le attempt to stray The image. So let's draw a line along the bottom border of this bird house. So drag along here. So about right there. And then we'll click release the mouse button and Photoshop straightened the image for us. Then we'll tap the return or enter key to confirm the crop, or in this case confirmed the straighten. So that is using the crop tool in Photoshop. 46. Feathering Selections: Feathering a selection creates a more visually software selection edge by blurring the boundary between the selection border and the surrounding pixels. So the effects of feathering or especially apparent when you copy, copy, or move a selection. So you can set the feathering value for any of the mark here Lasso Tools, they first selected the tool that you want to use, that entering a feathery value in the further box on the Options bar, the larger the value, the smoother and whiter the feathered edge will be. So if you're following along, you went open the image of the Cardinal. He worked with his image in the last video, and that's cardinal dot JPEG. And that's the lesson files folder on your desktop. And that's activates the last So tool and that's the third tool for the top was the first tool of this group of tools. And we want to select the area that we wanted to feather. So we're gonna draw a selection around the cardinal neighbor just like so with R less or to all. Let's first take a look at what a little look like without feathering applied torque. So we'll choose edit, copy from the menu. Then we'll choose file new. We want to show it on a white background is select us which was wife of the Background Contents list. And then click Create and then will choose to paste from the menu. So to increase the size of this, because see that it created a very hard edged selection. The edges are quite a jaded in this case. So let's close this image without Soviets or choose File clause and then don't save. So now let's feather a selection. So there are a couple of different ways of fellow. You can type in a value in the feather box, or it could choose, select, Modify, Feather, two feather an existing selection. Or it can use a selected mask dialogue. And then you can drag the slider to the right, so we'll do that. So let's drag this tool, maybe about the radius is about 20 or so. You can see the effect being applied Tory image as we drag, but I think we'll go about 20. Keep it out there and then we'll click. Okay. So now let's copy a selection, sort of choose Edit, Copy. Now we want to create another new Wherever it somewhat Choose File New from the menu. And again, we want to wait for a background. And then we'll click Create and will choose edit paste. So if we zoom in on this little abed, we can see that the edges are a selection are now smooth and blends nicely into the background. So let's say this emission would choose File Save As from the menu. And I think I went to name this my Cardinals. So let's save as box will type in. My underscore carted off on ensured that the lesson files folders, reactor folder. And then we'll click save, and I'll click. Okay, so let's close the syllabus or hold down the Command W keystroke combination if you're using a Mac or Control W using Windows. And then we'll close this image as well. I mean, and we don't want to see what journey. So take, don't save, hammer closest pepper fall as well. So press Command or Control W again, and we won't save our changes and brings us back to the moon for a sharp menu. 47. Modifying Selections: This video we're going to look at how to modify a selection, the modified command, which is located off this select menus or select modify right now is grayed out because I don't have anything selected. So if I did a selection or on this image nerve, so you've chose select, modify. We have several different options that we can choose from it. Several different ways of modifying our selection. For instance, we could add a border or honor selections smooth the edges of the selection, which is especially helpful if you're creating a custom shape or even expand or contract is selection by specific number of pixels. So the first option here is border, which allows you to create a border around your selection. So you would click border, enter the number of pixels for your border. So it'll cancel out. The next option on the slide to modify my nu is smooth, which allows you to smooth the edges of a selection. And again, you enter in the value in pixels in the box. Expand allows you to expand a selection by a certain number of pixels. Likewise contract, you hit a contract, a selection by a set number of pixels. And feather we've already worked with allows us to smooth the edges of our selection by a specific number of pixels. So let's work with this a little bit. So if you're following along, you want to open the image named Purple underscore flowers dot PTSD, and that's a Photoshop document. So now over here in the right area of our screen, we wanna click on the layers tab and that displays a layers plateau. And don't worry, we're going to delve deeply into layers at upcoming videos. But for now I want to do is click them later as tab2 May to activate the Layers panel. And then you want to hold down the command key, fuschia Mac, or control key of using windows, and then click on the thumbnail to the left of the words layer one. So I'll click directly on the thumbnail here, and that places a selection marquee around the image. So this image was actually pasted into a plane document. But whenever you paints a selection into a document, it's automatically placed on its own layer. So we have two layers of your background, which is the white background area, and then the layer which is that pasted image. So to select a layer in Photoshop it, you just need to select it in the layers panel by holding the command or control key and then click on the thumbnail. So now we want to choose select, modify border from the menu. And we're going to type in ten and the width box. And then click okay. So this created a ten pixel wide border are under selection. So I'm gonna click the foreground color square, the Tools panel. We want to select red and the color picker. So we'll click on any red area or you can click the center's callers spectrum here, click read there. And regulatory friend, torn of red that you want. So we're doing it all the way up and then we'll take okay, so all I did was set the foreground color to red. So now you want to activate our painted Bucket tool. And that's as this icon right here. It's below the background Eraser tool. So I'll right-click it and ensure that paint bucket tool is selected. That's the center tool. And w1 to click in the white area, bid in the borderlines. Once we do that supplies a red border to our image. It fills in that area with red. So the paintbrush tool will only apply that effect to the selection, which in our case is our ten pixel white border stuff. We want to hold down the Command or Control D KeyStore combination to de-select our selection. Next we want to check the rectangular marquee selection in the Tools Panel. So again, we'll write tektites second icon and choose the first option from the list. And we're going to create a small rectangular selection above our image saw maybe about like so. And the O release my mouse button. So that's selection is activated. Now we wanted to click on the page Bucket tool again to act afraid that tool. And let's click inside of the rectangle. And we see that only that area of the rectangle was filled with our foreground color. Now we want to choose select, modify. And this time we're gonna choose contract for the menu. And this allows us to contract our selection by specific number of pixels. And we'll type in ten in the box and then click OK. Now we'll click on the foreground color square again. And this time I want a dark blue color, so I'm gonna click dark blue, blue and my color spectrum and picker dark blue maybe like so. So about right there and our color window, and then we'll click OK. And now let's click inside the selection. We can see that that applied a dark blue fill to our selection. Such de-select everything against. So tap Command or Control D on a keyboard. And it will tap the 70K here keyboard to deactivates the Paint Bucket tool and activates the Move tool. 48. Selecting by Focus Area: Depending on your workflow, you may find the focus area command in the Select menu, a handy feature. So what's this does is allows you to select the pixels in an image that are in focus. And it does a pretty good job of it for the most part. And this allows you then to apply a filter or otherwise modify everything that's in focus. And the focus area cannot is located off of this Select menu. So click select and then focus area for the menu. There's this phase, the focus area dialog. So most of the time you want to keep the in-focus range slider, as well as the image is noise level which is under the advanced area. You want to keep those set tau TO, as photoshop will automatically select the appropriate values in these settings, it's going to cancel out of there. And let's work on this together. And the here we have the same members that we worked on in the last video, there's a Photoshop document named Purple underscore flowered. I'm gonna go back to the original student as images though I'm finding that borders a little bit distracting sermon a spear, the history paralleled by choosing a window history from the menu. And we'll click that first image state the purple Florida PSD. And that displays stood at the image before we make any adjustments and book closed the history panel. So now let's display the focus area of exhibits and will choose, select focus area from the menu. This displays that focus area dialog. So by default, the focus area command will automatically outputted twist selection. But if refer, you could output the selection to a Layer Mask and new layer. A layer with a Layer Mask, a new document or a new document with a Layer Mask. And rho will be discussing layers and layer Basques in upcoming videos. So now as a part of the image here is cut out. And anything that is cut out, our errors are the images that were not in focus. So I want to bring in, bringing back some of this image before it created my selection. So to do that, we want to click the focus area I'd tool, and this is this tool here on the left side of our window. We also could tap the Iike it I chemotactic reads as tool. I'm gonna increase my brush has a little bit, so I'll tap my right pocket key. I'm a drag to the left or this is bringing back some of that area and I'm going to drag all away. So there are all of the areas to the left of this flower hunger storage for maybe about some. So again, this allows us to brush back some of those missing areas of the image. So we went out to put this to a selection that you want to click the box and choose selection from a list. And then looks like, okay. So what this does is creates a selection around the areas of the image that are in-focus or that we've added back in using that the focus area odd tool, snob allowed to, I can apply a filter to just this area, for instance, of a particular painted like a tour of the Clinton era. It would only fill in the areas that are in focus. Me undo that and it undo paint bucket. But if I wanted to make an adjustment, everything that was out of focus, I could invert the selection by choosing Select Inverse from the menu. So now I could apply a filter to just the areas of the image that out-of-focus versus like Apply Filter Blur and then choose Gaussian Br and out a little bit more blurred to that image that probably wouldn't go that far. So like a blur of that era, the image a little bit more if I wanted to. So that just gives you an idea of how you could create a selection. From there is every image that are either in-focus are not in-focus. So let's deselect this by tapping Command or Control D on our keyboard. Then we'll choose File Close from India will be, will not save our changes. So we'll choose don't save. 49. Selecting by Color Range: Another way to make a selection in Photoshop is by using the color range command and using this command, you can select specific colors, select areas based on highlights, midterms and shadow or use skin tones. So for this video, we're going to be working with the one underscore pepper, dodge, Pierce, defile. That's a Photoshop document. So if you're following along, you want to open an image in this. Again, located the lesson files folder on your desktop. Now we're going to choose select color range from the menu. And this displays the color range dialogue to sample colors from the image. You want to click the selected dropdown list and choose sampled colors from the list and then using the eyedropper tool, simply click on the color that you want to sample. You can increase or decrease the tolerance of the colors by dragging the fuzziness. Slider. That's a slider here to the left or right. And the higher the fuzziness, the more shades of that color will be selected to limit the selection to the general area. You'll want to click the localized color clusters checkbox. The red slider here determines how far away colors from the original sample point. So now that we've chosen sampled colors for our selection, it's going to click on the eyedropper tool and thus the leftmost tool in this group of three eye droppers. And let's click anywhere on the red pepper with this. Does is subgoals the color red? Notice that our foreground color changed as well on the bottom of the color. Each panel here, we have a drop down list and title selection preview. So let's click that and choose Black Matte. What this does is it changes the background to black, allowing us to see our selection more easily noticed that some of the red on the right edge of our pepper was not SABL because it's colored in black. So now we want to click on the center eyedropper tool and this allows us to add to our selection and bring some of that area back. So I'm going to do is drag on the red areas of the image. But we want to be careful here not to click on any of the green soldiers trigger on the red areas. This increases the area of our selection to include all of the areas of the red. So I think I'm happy with this. Will click. OK, so again, using the colourings, we're able to select Pacific colors in our photo based on the highlights, Medek tones and shadows. So just another way to select the items in a photo. 50. Transforming Selections: So once we've created a selection in a Photoshop document, we can then rotate and resize our selections using the transformed selection command. And that's located on the Select menu. And that's right up here. Right now is great art because we don't have our document open. Sore we're going to do for this video is create a new document. So you want to click the create to-do button on the home screen, or you would choose File New from the Photoshop menu. Now look, click web on the top of our screen. We're going to use the web medium preset, and that's the 440 per 900 pixels. So you select that. You wanted to ensure that background contents is set to white. And then we'll click Create. From here, we're going to start by dragging a triangular selection on our document. And for that we're going to use the polygonal lasso tool. So that's the third group of icons from the top. So we'll right-click that and choose polygonal lust or tool. So let's draw a triangle. So I'll click on the center of our document. That's, that's the first. And I'm omega triangle maybe about like so. I'll drink to the right side, to the second line of our triangle. Then we'll click the first line to join the alliance I create or selection. So right now we see that we have a selection and the shape of a triangle. Now we're gonna choose select, Transform selection from the menu. Once the transformed command is selected and his activated, a box with sizing handles appears around a selection, these little squares on the edges of our selection or our sizing handles. And using them, you can change the size of an image or scale it by clicking on the sizing handles are dragging in the desired direction. So if I click the top right sizing handle a Drake inward, this reduces the size of our selection, whereas triggered outward will increase the size of our selection. And I can click in the center of the selection and move our selection around in the document. And notice that as I drag Photoshop automatically retains the proportions of our selection. Now if you do not watch that behaviour, that is to say if you want to transform the image without maintaining proportions, hold down the Shift key and then drag and notice that as I do, so let me click at the bottom center sizing handle or with my shift key held down, I'm gonna drag downwards. And notice that our triangle is a lot skinnier and taller. Now, photoshop did not maintain proportions and B and do have a couple of times. Now if you want to scale from the center of the selection, hold on the Alt or Option key, and then drag and we can see that now we're scaling out from the center. Sorry, yes, using the transform command, you can easily scale your selections. Now you can also rotate a selection, moving your most pressure always side of this selection, I notice that my most cursor transforms into our curved a double-headed arrow. To rotate. I just click outside of the selection and then drag until the selection is the weather to lunch. So now I've just rotated my triangle by 90 degrees. So once you're happy with the scaling and the rotation of your selection. So we'll set it back to about here. If you'd either press return or enter to commit the transformation, or click the little check mark icon on the Options bar. This will also compute the transform. To cancel the transform, you can either tap the escape key on your keyboard or click the capsule transfer my kinda on the Options bar. So if I chose select, Transform selection again, and I scale this selection. If you wanted a castle that could just click this icon on the Options bar and that produces the same result as tapping the escape key summary tab in Germany keyboard. And that's commits the transformation. So we don't want to documents, so let's close it and we're not going to save us. So choose file close from the menu I will choose don't save when prompted to save our changes. 51. Saving and Opening Selections: Photoshop allows you to save the selections that you make as load them at a later time. Now this is especially useful for complicated selections that you may wish to use again, so you don't have to redo your selection every time. You can either save or selection in the current file, the current Photoshop document, or in a new file. Now by default, selections are saved in that particular document, the document that you're working on, let's Hank, is that you can save multiple selections if you want. So if you have several objects in a documents for which you want to create selections, you can do so. You'll then want to ensure that we save the document PSD format in Photoshop format so that the selection will be available for next tab you open Photoshop. So I have the one underscore pepper dotted JPEG image loaded on my screen. So if you're following along, you want to open that file from the lesson files folder on your desktop. And that's activated selection tool. Let's do the Quick Selection Tool. Without me could just draw around our pepper deselected. But of course it easier way to do that is clicking that sludge subject budget not automatically makes a selection around our pepper. So now we're going to save our selections. So to do so we choose select, Save Selection, and that's on the bottom of the menu here. And this displays the Save Selection dialogue. So the first thing you want to do is provide a name for a selection. So I'm gonna name this red pepper and the document adopt our list. We have two options. One underscore pepper dot JPEG, which is the curd file that we have open. Now if I wanted to save this in a different file or different Photoshop document of a click to list and then choose new. But we're gonna keep this as is in the one pepper document. And then it looks like okay. And that just saved our selection. Now we're going to click select D, select from the menu and that deselects there's selection. Now selections after you save are stored in channels and you can view a list of saved channels by displaying the Channels panel. So let's do that. So we'll choose window channels from the menu. And here we see our channels over here on the right. We drag this over sores floating on our screen so you can see it better. So we see the RGB channels, red, green, and blue. And then we have that red pepper channel, and that's the one that we just created. The Charles parallel is just a quick way of viewing all of the channels that you may have created for a specific document. So doll that we've created our channel, let's load it. To do so it choose select Load selection from the menu. And we can see that this displays the Load Selection dialogue. To learn a selection, you choose the channel drop-down list and then choose the selection that you wanted to load. Right now we only have one selection saved that such a red pepper selection. So we'll select it and they'll click OK. And there's selection has now been placed once again around our object. So again, it's a handy way of saving your complicated selection so you don't have to redo them every time. So I think we're done with this. We're going to de-select our selection. To do so we press the Command or Control D keystroke combination. So do that and a selection is de-selected. And I think we're done with this pepper miss, I'm gonna choose File Close and we're not going to save our changes. So we'll choose the Don't Save. 52. Object Selection Tool: In this video, we're gonna talk about the object of selection tool. And this is a newish tool that Photoshop and that's in the group of the selection tools that us, the fourth icon from the top, we can also just tap the W QWERTY keyboard to highlight that group of icons on the object selection tool is the first option in the list. And to use this, simply click and drag around the subject and object or a group of objects and Photoshop will then do its best to port a selection around those items that you selected. Now as with most of the selection tools, they may require a little bit of work after you select, you may need to do a little refining for falling alive. We are working with Theia Bella in a basket mentioned that's a JPEG image located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So you want to tap the W key, the key border to give me one activates that first option objects selection tool. Now the default select mode is rectangle and what that allows you to do is draw a rectangular on this subject that don't really work the way I wanted it. So I'm going to deselect swore, choose, select, de-select. Instead, let's choose the last soul. And this allows us to draw a free form selection around the items that we want to select. So I'm gonna click a little bit above the white blanket and then draw a round. My subject here. So maybe right around here. They're going to do and to join the two lines to complete the selection and that do a much better job. Now another option for making this selection is using the select Subject button. We talked about that a little bit in previous videos. So whenever you click on any of the tools in the W grouping these objects, selection, Quick Selection and magic one tools to select Subject button appears in the Options bar. Can also find this in the select minuss, choose, select and then subject from the menu. So let me de-select by selection of a heavier server, choose, select and deselect. Now my objects selection tool is still active, so we have the select Subject button. So I'm going to click the Select subject budget. And that did a pretty good selection except for the 0 here. And we're going to add this part back here and in the next video. 53. Adjusting Selections: In previous video, we worked a little bit with the Modify selection option located off the Select menu. So we choose Select Modify. We've seen the recurring adverse selection expanded or contracted as well as feather or selection or on a border around it. But by preferred way of modifying a selection is using this select, unmask a dialogue. And what this does is opens a whole new area inside of Photoshop on the right, what it does is provides a visual representation of what your selection is going to look like. And as you adjust the sliders, it provides immediate visual feedback. So this aspect of it is quite handy. If you'd like to follow along. We're working with the Abella in a basket dotted JPEG image. And again, that's located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So let me add a selection around those dogs sermon dislike what I have here. And if you're following along AS top the W key and a keyboard and that activates tongue group of selection tools. It also displays a select Subject button on the Options bar, which is the command that I wanted to it. So I'm gonna click select subject. And the place is a selection around an area in the photo. And it didn't slough this bottom here. And that's our k we are going to fix sounds a little bit later. So let's see what this would look like if I pasted this into a new document. So we're going to choose edit copy. They will choose File New from the menu. We just want the clipboard here selected and we want to ensure that the background contents is set to white. Then we'll click Create and then will choose paste. So that's what our pasted selection looks like. So let's go back to our main image. So we'll check the belay, the basket tab on top of our screen lists, which is back to that selection. With our subjects still selected, we're now going to collect the selected Mask button of the displays as whole new section in Photoshop, which allows us to modify our selection. So the first thing I wanna do is add two are at my selection because we see that Photoshop miss this area directly below the dogs phase. So we're gonna click the plus icon in the toolbar. And then I'm just going to drag right in this area. We can see that we added that area now as part of our selection, squander the edge detection area here we have several powerful sliders. So you drink the radius slider to see the edges of the image. And I typically leave us all the way to the left. And I think the Smart Radius budget, and with this option activated, the radius will be sicker where we need to and center we're, doesn't quite need to be so thick. So here we see some of the same options that we saw this Select Modify menu so we can smooth our selection, feathers selections. So let's drink this further to the right. And again, we can see a visual, real-time visual representation of what our image will look like as we drag yummy cannot contrast Charles selection and that's kinda the opposite of feathers. So far selection is to feather that we could drag the contrast to the right to add contrast. If I'm going to keep that as is during the further a little bit down. I don't want to he quite that feathered. And they can also shift the edge. Regan, play around with these sliders and see whether it looks good to you. If you wanted to see what the images look like before your adjustments, click the Show Original checkbox and that shows our selection before we started modifying it. So let's just go back to our post modification state. Can also invert the selection if you so choose. So if I click the inverted button here, it will select everything except for that area that I have selected. So that can sometimes come in handy depending on what you're trying to accomplish. I'll click invert again to go back to where it was on the bottom of the pain here we have the Output Settings area. So remember here we choose how we want to output our selection. So right now it's set to selection, but you can also output it to a Layer Mask, to a new layer, a new document, New Document With Layer Mask, et cetera. Again, we'll talk more about layers and layer masks and upcoming videos. There are fewer selection has fringes of cars around the edges. Sometimes this option here, the decontaminated Colors option, can help fix that. So I think I'm happy with this. I'm gonna click OK. Now I want to make sure that this is set to selection. And then I'm going to click OK. And so now I will choose Edit, copy from the menu and we create a new document against their will choose File New. And again, we want to use our clipboard and then ensure that White to sit at the backward contents list and then click Create, and then will choose edit, paste from the menu. And now we can see that areas filled in and our edges are much softer than they were originally. So I'm going to close all of these documents are going to choose File, Close off of them and I don't want to save any changes. So I'm gonna click, don't save, don't save, don't save. 54. Content Aware Move: Content Aware Move is a feature in Photoshop which allows you to move an element from one area of the image to another. So, but this is a tool I can only use with certain photos because it only work if there's consistent color and texture. So it needs that to work properly. So this way the content that were removed will not work in all situations. So it is located in the spot healing brush group to retype the J key on your keyboard. And we see this group of icons as highlighted. So if you right-click to counter the world moved tool is the second option from the bottom. So how this works is once it's selected, who draw less so on the object that you wanted to move, then click and drag it to the new location. So for falling, like we're working with image named pelicans, Dr. JPEG, politas Dao JPEG. And that's located on us and files folder on your desktop. Well, then he went to tempt that Jake here on your keyboard and then select the content or were moved tool from this group of icons. What we're going to do is we're going to move this Pelican a year to the top of our image, maybe bot rate here. So now we want to draw a selection around our bird. And the key here is to get as close to the bird as possible. So draw around, leaving a little bit of space between the burden of the sky there. So once we've created our selection to a click in the center of a selection and drag it to where we want to place it. I wanna place it above the Tableau's burgers for maybe about right here that I release my mouse button attached to commit, I move, we click the little check mark icon on the Options bar. We notice that there's still selection or Ronan are bird and we don't want to de-selected quite yet because if there's a little bit of funkiness in the colors of your image or maybe a seam around the selection. You can fix this by using the structure on the color drop-down lists here. I think by default it's set to about three or four hours. So if I set out to far, we see some artifacts around the wing here and that's not what we want sewer to drag us all the way to seven. And the same thing for colors of the color didn't come out quite the way you want. Again, click this color drop-down list and drag the slider around until it looks good. So to bunch or a happy just to select, a de-select. And that looks pretty garden. So now let's get rid of this little half a bird that's on his screen here. So attempt the J key on a keyboard. I'd be want to, we're going to use the spot healing brush. I'm gonna make sure we have a pretty big brush size to tap the right bracket key on your keyboard to increase the brush size. Right now minds about 500s, and I could just brush right over this area. And that erases that part of the bird and the left side of your screen. Or we can also have just click the Crop tool and cropped it out. So for instance, if I tap the C key on my keyboard, I can just crop this area. So there are fills up our entire green window, there were tough the Enter key on our keyboard. Now as I mentioned, this is a touchy feature server. You don't get the result that you wanted the first time around. Sometimes just undoing it and doing it again will work. So sometimes that's all you need to do, which is we do the operation and it'll work fine the second time for whatever reason. So again, this future won't work at all images, but it is a cool option in photoshop when you have the perfect image, like we had here. 55. Understanding Layers: In the next several videos, we're gonna be working with layers. And layers allow you to work with the different pieces of your document design separately. So let's open up the file that we're going to be working with and we'll choose File Open. And again, that's located in the lesson files folder in your desktop. So we wanted to navigate to the desktop and then double-click on lesson files. Of any other follow we wanted to open. It is entitled layers, and that's layers dodge PTSD as a Photoshop document. And then we'll click open. So think of layers as several panes of glass resting on top of each other. And they can see each pay them the stack and any changes that you make to a pane of glass will only affect that pain and not to the others. Thus, a layer is a way to separate your changes and edit non-destructively. So thus, when you click the Layer icon you're taking are transparent pinnacle as at placing it over the photo. So imagine that I have a picture of a man sitting on my desk, a photo of a man. And now I take a pane of glass and rested on the table over the picture. So now let's draw a moustache on the man. But what I'm really doing is drawing it on the pane of glass. So I draw a moustache. So now add another pen or glass. I draw a hat on-demand. And again, I'm only affecting that pain or that layer. I can always go back to my original photo by simply removing the panes of glass from the image. So thus, if I wanted to remove the hat for the amount, I would just take the pivot glass on which I drew that hat and remove it to return to my original image or would remove all of the panes of glass that I place term the image. But if I took a magic marker, I drew directly on the image. This is considered destructive because eventually we will not be able to undo that change once we draw on the photo with a magic marker, it's there for good. Thus, this is considered a destructive edit. Now in previous videos, we've already seen that when we copy and paste a selection into a new or an existing document, that pasted item is inserted into its own layer. And the layer is parallel, is right over here on the right side of our screen and ensures the panel group with the Channels panel and the paths parallel. So I'll click on the layers tab again. So every Photoshop document must have at least one layer. And when he first create a new document, the background layer is created automatically for you, and that's the background layer right here. By default, the Background layer as locked, which means that you cannot have move it or change its position in the stack. But you could easily unlock it simply by clicking the lock icon in the layers panel. Now one nice thing about layers as the ability to move each stack or each layer individually on your document until it is to your liking, Nova entity one layer in the stack will not affect the other layers. And by the way, if you don't see the layers panel, just choose window layers from the menu to display the panel are good. Window layer is to hide that panel. And north of the whole group is now a hidden together back was select window layers and our parallel group is back. So from the Layers panel you can create, move, rename, hide, group, and delete layers. And we're going to learn how to do all of that in upcoming videos. So the active layer is the layer that is currently being edited and it's highlighted in the layers panel right now because see the way how the, your board layer highlighted. So wanted to work at layer two or with select layer two, the Layers panel. Now that's layer becomes the active layer, can also activate the Move tool and then right-click or the layers image and then choose the layer name from the contextual menu. So if I click on layer five, the Layer five is highlighted, you know, Layers panel. If I right-click on the bench, we see that this is layer six. So if I click it, then layer six becomes the active layer. Once the layer is active, you can then move the layer on your document. Again, my selected them, Move tool on the toolbar and then dragging. And notice that I can move that element around on my document. If we wanted to select the blocks layer would right-click it, choose Layer five, an hour can move that element around on my document. So let's work on this together a bit to so to falling along. And let's click on the words layer five. And we can now edit or move layer five. So let's take the Move tool, the tool bar. And Layer five is the blocks layer. We can see a representation of the blocks in the layers thumbnail here. So let's click at the blocks and that's drag about a half an inch to the right. So now let's click on layer six and the layers panel, which is the bench element. So let's click and drag the bench elements so that it is over the text your board. And there will be some loss button. Notice that some of the text now is now a hidden because this layers on top of it. So let's undo this moves to what she was added and removed from the menu. Now let's select a layer or two in the Layers panel, and that's the image of the fruit bowl. And again, that's clicked a drag that image so that it's over the text or your board of them will release the mouse button. This time, however, the object of the image did not hide a new UV, your board texts. And that is because that layer is below the, your board layer in the layers panel. So when working with layers, it's important to pay attention stacking order as this affects how items are displayed in the document. So I ads in the bottom of this stack are displayed at the bottom of the list, dragging a layer that is higher on the list over a layer that is lower the list will cause that area of the lower layer to disappear from view. And we saw that when we move the bench image. So let's select layer six again. We move that over the Texture Board. That text disappears because that layer is above the text layer. But that did not happen with the fruit dish layer because the fruit dish layer is below the text layer, you can't hover modifier leaders transparency so that have lower layers will become visible. So I could choose the capacity of this layer. And notice that as I actually drink is the past of the slider. The text below becomes visible and the active layer becomes less and less visible. And we're going to work with data given in future videos. Now photoshops way of showing you that nothing is selected is the checkerboard. That means transparency. God has to say touch, nothing is selected. So if I click on the i icon, which signifies visibility. So but clicking the i icon next to the Background layer, dot backer layer had disappeared and instead we see are transparent checkerboard layer. Or in other words, it's, they're transparent and background that displays. And to bring our background layer back, we click on the little box to the left of the background layer, which is again that I icon and this tacos LED display of a particular layer. So I'm going to drag this badge back to its original position. Well, one last thing I wanted to mention to keep them layers in your document intact, you must see the document in a Photoshop PSD, tiff, or Photoshop PDF format. So every choose File Save As from the menu, was odd funds are Photoshop, Photoshop, PDF, and tiff, saving the file and any other format while automatically flattened all the layers in your document into just a single layer and the layers will no longer be editable. Most of Taggard typically want to stay with the Photoshop file format is that it's a preferable file formats. Let me cancel out of here. And in the next video we're gonna learn about creating and deleting layers. 56. Creating and Deleting Layers: We have already seen that pasting a selection into a new or an existing document inserts the selection into its own layer. He'd also create a new layer by clicking on the Add New Layer budget on the bottom of the Layers panel. And this is, I kinda rate here, but the plus, I'm going to drag this group of panelists here to the top of by panel bar says attended uses panel the most. So again, that icon is this little plus icon is to the left of the trashcan icon. Another way to create a new layer is by choosing a layer, New and then layer from the menu. Then type the name for your new layer in the name box and then click OK. Now if you have many different layers in your document, you might find it helpful to rename your layers to something more meaningful. To rename a layer, you double-click it sname i, that's simply type with a new name for the layer. You can also rename an existing vary by choosing layer. Rename layer from the menu, and then type in the new name for your layer. We see that the layers panel, that name is now highlighted. So they're falling along. You want to click Layer two in the layers panel here to select that layer. And let's create a new layer. So to do so, we're going to click the New Layer button. Again, that's this little plus icon. So we're gonna click that and in a place that layer directly above layer tool and give it a default name of layer seven. Notice that new layers are placed directly above this selected layer. So if a Latina to add a new layer above the your board layer, I would select that layer and then click the New Layer button. But I want to rename this layer seven-layer to something else. So that's don't click on the words layer seven. We're going to name this cross out, so I'll type that in. And then temporary Turner enter on a keyboard. And that provides a name for a new layer. So now we wanted to spend a swatches panel, so we'll fix the swatches tab in our paddle bar here. I don't want to expand the RGB swatches on the swatch thought I want is RGB yellow, so I'm gonna select that and that changes our foreground color to yellow. Next we're going to click on the Brush tool in the Tools Panel, and that says icon right here. So we'll right-click and click brush tool to ensure that tool is selected. And let's take the Brush Preset picker icon, size box. Let's go about nine pixel. So I'll type that into the size box, nine px and attempt to return or enter key and a keyboard. And that's why we want to do is draw an X across our fruit plate. So I'm going to draw x that draws it x over that image because this crossover layer is above the layer two, which is the fruit dish, we see the complete x there we drew. Now if we wanted to delete alert for the Layers panel, you select the layer that you wanted to delete and then click the trashcan icon on the bottom of the layers panel. You can also click the little layers File menu here and giving us a little hamburger icon, then choose deletes layer from the cloud venue. We see that we can also create a new layer from this menu as well. So let's tap the escape key on your keyboard. To close this menu, we want to ensure that the cross out later is selected. And we're going to delete them by clicking the Delete icon on the bottom of the layers panel. So we'll click it. A Photoshop asks us if we really want to delete the layer and we do so we're going to click yes. And the layers Dogen. You can also create a new layer from an existing layer. That is to say, you can duplicate an existing layer in your document. And there are several ways to do this. One method is to select the layer that you want to duplicate and then click and drag it to the Create New Layer icon can also click layer on the menu and then choose Duplicate Layer. Or it can also use the keyboard shortcut command to j if you're using a Mac or Control j if you're using Windows, how to admit the command J is probably most used keyboard shortcut in Photoshop. So let's select now your board layer. And we'll click the little flyout menu here and then we'll take a duplicate layer. So let's name this your board shadow. So we'll take that in and then we'll click. Okay. So now we have a new layer named your board shadow. Now if it's not directly above the your board layer, for instance, let's say you have the background layer selected when he created this layer, but it click it and drag it. You see the little blue line that lets us know where the layer will add up when we release the mouse button. So you want to ensure that it is above the, your board layer. There were released the mouse button. They'll repositions the layer to the second position and the layers panel. So we have an exact duplicate of this layer, but the your board shuttle AIR selected, I'm going to double-click of the capacity box and type in 50. And then I'll tell return or enter on a keyboard. And what this does is since the capacity or the transparency of the layer to 50%. And we're going to use our new layer to create kind of a shadow effect. So now we want to activate the Move tool. So attempt the 70K here, a keyboard. And to create a shadow effect, we're going to click on the words your board and then drag just slightly down. Like so. You can also use the down arrow key to nudge the selection down or up. So you can tap the up arrow key or down arrow key until the shadow effect is the way that you want. So there is our shadow effect. So let's say this documents. So choose File, Save for the menu. And again, you could also use the command units or control as keyboard shortcut as well. So that is how to create or delete layers in Photoshop. 57. Selecting Layers: At times you may wish to select the elements that make up a layer. And then you could turn that selection into its own layer, either of the same image file or in a different image file. By copying and pasting that selection, sort selects the elements have mega bilayer, such as the blocks for the bench of the fruit dish. You hold down the command key. If using a Mac or control key on Windows, then click on the layer thumbnail, not the words but the layer thumbnail, which is to the left of the layer title. But once you do, a selection is automatically placed around the layer items and then he can copy your cut the items into the road layer of who's so choose. If you simply want to reposition an item in the, in the image, or you need to do is directly click on the item and then drag it and the element is moved. Or of course you have to activate the Move tool and they click your DRE. If this doesn't happen for you, but you'll want to ensure that the auto select checkboxes checked. So if I uncheck this box and try to click on the blocks, we see that the fruit dishes move because that is the active layer, the auto select checkbox, but this will do is select whatever element is clicked on the image stuff I click the blocks. Now I can move the blocks around on our image. And if you look in our layers parallel, as I click on the different elements in my image, those layers become activated. So we're falling on us. Double-click on the words layer six, the Layers panel and we're going to rename this layer. We're going to rename this to bench. So I'll type in bench, help return or enter a keyboard. Next, you want to hold down the command key using a Mac or Control key of using windows, and then click on the layer thumbnail to the left of the word bench. So I'll click directly on that. We can see that a selection has been placed around that element in our window that will choose that it copy from the menu. We wanted to do is place a selection in a new documents that will tap command. You end up using a microcontroller and you're using Windows. And you want to ensure that the backward contents is set to white. And then we'll click Create to peers to randomly choose edit, paste from the manure. Or again, you can use the command via Control V keystroke combination. And that pace that selection into a new document, into its own layer. So we see we have two layers here, the background layer, which is created by default, and the new layer that we just added. But I think we're done with this document or we're gonna choose file close from the menu and we're not going to save our changes. So we'll click don't save. As we can see, we still have that bench selected here. So if you recall, we can de-select a selection by person that Command Z or Control D keystroke combination, or by choosing select D, select from the menu item. So we'll do that. The D selects the bench layer. 58. Selecting Multiple Layers: Photoshop allows you to make more than one layer active at a time by selecting multiple layers. By selecting multiple layers, you can apply actions such as moved, delete, transform, changing the stacking order, and do more to all of the selective layers at once to select a adjacent layers and the layers panel select the first layer in the group, hold down the Shift key, and then select the last layer in the group. This will select all layers between the first layer and the last layer on which who clicked to select a non adjacent layers. Let me click on the bench level here, we hold down the command key music a Mac or Control keys using Windows, and then click on the layers that you want to select. Only those layers on which you click, there'll be selected. There are also a couple of helpful commands on the Select menu. So if we click it, there's all layers which will select all of the layers in the layers panel. Whereas de-select layers causes all selected layers to be deselected. So if we hold our Command or Control key and select bench of the your board layer and then layer two. And B choose, select, de-select layers that deselects all of those layers that we have just selected. Another helpful command is the find delayers command. And this comes especially ad if you have a whole lot of layers in your Photoshop document and you want to find a specific layer by name. So if we click it, we see this little Name box appear at the top of our layers panel. So let's type in the name of our literalists. So let's begin typing bench. I mean, you see that as we begin typing on the layers mashing where we typed are displayed in the layers panel. So again, this command is helpful if your document contains a large number of layers which they very often do, and you want to work in a specific layer. So let's choose, select and deselect layers from the menu. So let's work on this together little bits. Let's click the bench layer in the layers panel. Now we wanted to hold down the command key if using a Mac or Control key if using Windows. And now we're going to click Layer five is the Layers panel. And that selects layer five in addition to the bench layer. Now let's tap the V key to activate the Move tool. Let's click of the blocks and drag to the right to about a quarter Vientiane, notice that both the blocks and the bench move as we DRE. And that's because both of those layers, I selected the Layers panel. Let's hold on the command keys using a Mac or Control key if using Windows. And we'll click on layer two in the layers panel. So what this did is selected layer two in addition to layer five and the bench layer. So now if we drag again to the left, we see all three elements move as we click and drag. So let's deselect on all these layers. So we'll choose select, de-select layers from the menu to de-select all of those selected layers. In the last video, we talked about how you can select and move and element on your document or if the auto select checkbox is checked, you'll also need to ensure that layer displays the drop-down list, but you can also select multiple layers directly at her documents. If this option is checked simply by holding down the Shift key before selecting the elements. So let's see how this works or forgetting if you're following along, you wonder ensure that the auto select checkbox is checked. The layer displays in the drop-down list. And again, this allows us to select a layer directly on our document. So you want to click on the park bench. Imagine that's later named a bench. So I'll click on the bench in a document and then drag about half an inch to the left and that moves the park bench and image, smell its hold on or Shift key and click directly on the fruit dish on our document and the layers panel, but directly in the document. And we notice that in the layers panel, layer two is selected now in addition to the bench layer. So now we can click and drag to the left, and we can move both of those layers at the same time. So let's move this down a little bit. Now Let's de-select all these layers by choosing Select, de-select layers from the menu. So let's click directly on the park bench image in our document, we can now see that the bench layer is selected, the Layers panel. Then that's click select all layers from the menu. And now can see the layers parallel. All layers except for the background layer because it's locked, are selected. So we're going to click and drag. And now every element on my document moves as I drag. So let's deselect all of these layers. So we'll choose select, de-select layers from the menu. And now none of the layers I select it and our Layers panel. And let's turn this auto select option of's and we're going to take that little checkbox next to auto select. So now in order to select a layer will need to do a directly from the Layers panel. 59. Linking and Hiding Layers: Linking layers together allows you to move, duplicate, or transform more than one layer simultaneously. When layers are linked, they are treated as a single unit. And older versions of Photoshop, you were able to link selected layers by clicking on the link column in the layers panel. Well, we don't have a link column anymore. However, with the ability to now select multiple layers, as we saw in the previous video, the need to link layers has become less essential. So Adobe has removed the link column from the Layers panel. However, you can still link layers by selected the layers if you wanted to link, they click on the little link icon in the bottom of the panel. That's on the bottom of the Layers panel. And once you do, a small link icon will appear next to any layers that you've linked. So I want to undo that. So if you're following along, you want to ensure that the your board shadow layer is selected in the layers panel. So you wanna click it to select it. Then we'll tap the vk UNA keyboard to activate the Move tool. And with the move to activate and let's click on the words your board in the image and drag downwards. And we wanna drag until the words are below the your board layer and then will release her mouse button. This moves there your board shadow element beneath a your board element. So now we'll click edit, undo moved from the menu that reverses the move action that we did stuff I'm going to quickly your Barton layer in the layers panel. They will hold down the command key music imagine or control key music windows. And then we wanna click on the your board shadow layer, and that's selects both of those layers. To link these layers together, we need to click on the link icon, so I'll click on that. And that's, that's the first icon on the bottom of the layers panel. So click the link layers icon and we can see that there are now both linked by the little link icon, which appears to the right of the layer name. So let's choose select, de-select layers so that deselects all the layers and the layers panel. Nobody want to click on the your board chateaux layer in the layers panel that's selects that layer or with the Move Tool selected. Let's click on the words you're born again and drag down. And we see this time both layers move as we drain. And that's because they're linked together. And again, links layers allows us to move the layer group as one unit. So next to each layer thumbnail in the layers panel is the layer visibility box. When a letter is visible, we see an icon displayed and the layer visibility box to Hajnal layer, you click on the icon to de-select it. We see that element has now disappeared from our image to unhide a hidden layer, second layer visibility box next to the layer. So I'll click the little box next to the layer thumbnail. And the layer element is now back. So the next video we're going to look at how to merge a layers together. 60. Merging Layers: Merging layers entails taking two or more individual layers on combining them into a single layer. Now once you merge layers, it is permanent. He will not be able to extract the individual layers from the merged layers. Again, merging layers can help you to manage multiple layers as well as reduce the size of your image file. To merge layers, you first select the layers that you ought to Burj. So if I select these two layers, for instance, the word choose Layer, merge layers from the menu. To merge all visible layers choose merge visible from the Layer menu. There's also the merged down commands. So if a Selected Layer five for instance, and then click on layer, we see the Merge Down command now appears in the menu. What this does is combines them layer below the currently selected layer and this selected layer. So that would be layer five and layer two in this instance, and merges them into one single layer. And the layer enable change to the name of the layer that is below the selector layer. So if I merge these two down, but new layer would be named layer. To solve your folding a law, you want to select the, your board layer in the layers panel, if we want to hold on the command to keep using a Mac or Control key fusing windows, select for your board shadow layer. The Layers panel thus selects both of those layers, and these are the two layers that we want to merge. So now we choose Layer, merge layers from the menu. And notice I could also use the commander control ie keystroke combination, so well, thank emerged layers. And now we see that the two layers have been merged into one. So what do we want to do now is hide the Background layer. To do so would click the little icon to the left of the backgrounded layer thumbnail. So click on that and that hides the Background layer. So what do we want to do is merge all of the visible layers except for the background layer, which is now not feasible. So it's the backward Larry hinted it will choose Layer merge visible from the menu. We can now see that all of our visible layers have been merged into this new layer named your board shadow and the backward layers till his hidden. So that's kicks a little checkbox next to the Background layer to unhide to that layer. Instead of merging individual layers, you can choose to flatten the image. This command takes all layers visible or invisible, and merges them into one single layer. Now once you flatten inImage, your layers will be gone for good. So if you think you may need to ever work with the individual layers of your document. And again, it's a good idea to first make a backup copy of your file before flattening your image. So let's flatten this image. So we'll choose layer from the menu and then click flattened image. And now all of the layers have been flattened into the one background layer. But I wanted to go back to the original state of His image and we can still do so because we haven't closed to this file yet. So let's choose window history from the menu. And let's scroll all the way to the first state, which is layers PSD. There is the state where we first open the image. What this did in essence is reversed. Every action we performed before and including the merge layers are flattened layers command, which is the last command that we did. So let's kick the layers tab to return us back to the Layers panel. And I think we're done with this image. So we'll choose file close for the menu and we'll save our changes. 61. Setting Layer Opacity: Modifying the opacity setting for layers allows you to create some interesting transparency affects the capacity of a layer, determines how visible that layer is. For instance, you can blend one layer with the layer behind it by reducing the capacity of the layer that is above the lower layer. The layer on top of it then becomes semi-transparent, allowing the layer or layers below to show through the lower the opacity setting, the more transparent the layer and the capacity setting is on top of the Layers panel, and it's right here. To adjust capacity, you click the drop down list, drag the slider to the left or right until the desired capacity is attained. Solver folding along, you want to open the image named a bowl BAU underscore LacA LacY dot PSD. And we see here that this document contains four individual layers, subadult, click the layer named manure, that's the first layer in the layers panel. Next we want to click the capacity drop-down list. And again that displays the opacity slider. And I'm gonna drag the slider to the left to a baby about 40%. And notice the capacity of the image reduce on our screen as I drag. And there we go, 40%. And they would tell return or enter to confirm the setting. Now, attempt to save you a clicker too is the scrubby slider. For instance, instead of taking on the passive dropped DO list, and begin the slider to the left or right, you can simply click directly in the word opacity and then drag to the left or right. It's just so notice if I click on world Palestinian trigger there, right? I mean increasing the capacity of this layer or drag to the left. And we're reducing the capacity of this layer. And we can see the value adjusted the capacity box has I dre, So I'll keep it right at 40. So it's nice that you can use scrubby Slater's with many options, various panels in Photoshop. And it's Receiver1 option has described the spiders enabled simply move your mouse pointer over the name of any feature in a panel, then drag to the left or right. But you can also tell because you're most part two will transform into a little hand pointer that lets us know that the scrubby sluggers features enabled for that option. So you can see that it's enabled for the fill future as well. Again, very difficult future to the left or right to adjust the intensity of that option. So with our Pasi sit at 40%, you're on the field back to a 100% here. And then we'll save this image by clicking File, Save from the menu. 62. Using Layer Comps: Layer comes allow you to take a snapshot of the current state of the layers panel. It's a way to save different versions of a file without having to save separate files. And Lightroom we have virtual copies. Four, shop, we have layer comes, sorts of creatively or comp you display the layer comes panel by choosing a window, layer comes from the menu. And then to create a new layer comp, we click the Create New Layer competent in this budget right next to the trash icon. So here you then choose the options you want to layer comes to record a couple options here we have Lear visibility NOT chooses whether to record the current visibility states of the Layer. Layer position records the current position of the layer. Their appearance specifies whether to record the current style of the layer and layer comp selection for Smart Objects. So with this, you could create new layer comps in the parent document to capture different combinations of layer comes within your smart objects. This option will save those layer comp combinations by adding a new layer cop in the parent document. And you can choose any or all of these above options. So let's provide a name for our layers. For the name box, I'm gonna name this transparent man. Then we wanna click the checkbox stuck to visibility, position and appearance. And then we'll click OK. And now we see we have a new layer carbon our panel named transparent man to view a letter, a copy you'll want to display the layer commas panel and then click the little icon to the left of the layer name. And once you do this selected layer comp snapshot will then display, I want some rare copy selected. You can then obligated so you'd make any desired changes. Then click the object Age layer Cobb icon that says icon is directed to the left of the crazy new layer comp icon is says icon right here, kinda looks like a recycle icon. And what this will do is rewrite the Selected Layer comp with your changes. So in our layers, polis selects the layer name Conner, and I'm gonna close this layer come dialogue for knob, selected layer named cure. And what we want to do now is change the opacity of this layer to a 100%. So I'm gonna click the capacity drop-down list that drag the slider all the way to the right until the box reads a 100%. And then we'll tap return or enter on our keyboard to confirm the change. And we want to tap the V key on our keyboard to activate the Move tool. I'm a drain the contour elements here, there's some guy right in front to the left, maybe about two inches or so, maybe just like some sonatas display or Lear comes parallel sewage shoes, window layer come from pneumonia them. Now we want to take the little gray box to the left of the layer compromised name, which is the transparence man Lear competently created. So we'll click the little box here. And that applies that layer comp to the active image. So this way you can always go back to our previous layer state by creating and saving layer counts. Now notice that layer cops won't work for permanent changes to a layer, such as converting it to black and white, brushing, cloning or healing whatever will save our options such as visibility and position. If we need to make brushing changes or edit an image, you'll need to use an Adjustment Layer. Layer comes only work with position and visibility. So let's save our documents. So we'll choose File safe from the menu to save the current state of our document. And I'll take whatever the layer comes, panels or technical little x and the upper-left corner to close that panel. 63. Locking Layers: Locking layers allows you to protect a layer by ensuring that it cannot be edited or relocated by mistake. Now there are five layer locking options to choose from to fully or partially lock a layer. These are located here on top of the layers panel. So the leftmost icon is locked transparent pixels, which means that you can only edit colored pixels. The lark image pixels locks the pixels of the currently active layer. You can move the image on the layer, but not edited. So next one is locked position. This one is activated. You cannot move them layer in the document. You can't however, edits the pixels of the layer. The fourth option is prevent Otto nesting into and out of our two boards. And this disallows auto nesting of a specific layers into and out of the ER to board. The last option is lock all, which completely locks the currently selected layer. You cannot edit or move the layer. Whenever you create a new document, the Background layer is automatically logged. Choose File New from the menu, and they will tap return or enter on a keyboard to create a new document, we see the Photoshop automatically created this background layer and it is automatically locked. It we can tell it's locked by the little lock icon to the right of the layer name. There are a couple of ways of unlocking the layer. The first is just clicking on the little lock icon. Or it could double-click it suddenly on the Layers panel provide a new name for the layer. And whenever you rename a background layer, the backward layer then becomes unlocked. So it is named as white. And then click OK. And notice that the background layer has been renamed to white and the lock disappears. And we undo that. And again, we can just click directly on the lock icon layer becomes unlocked. And notice that Photoshop also renamed the layer to layer 0. So I'm going to close out of here and we're gonna work on this together. And I'm not going to save this Sorting Layers panel here. And again, we're working with the bowl underscore loc dot PSD image. We're going to click the two Incan new layer in the layers panel. And let's activate the brush tool. So tap the beak key on our keyboard and we want to ensure that the first tool is selected. So we right-click on the icon and choose brush tool. Now we want to click the lock image pixels icon, and that is the second to lock icon from the left here. And it looks like a little pay bursts or we'll click on that snow activate the brush tool. So what's happened to be key in our keyboard? And if the Brush tool isn't the active, truly, we want to right-click on the icon and choose brush tool from the menu. And now let's click on this image of the two people are the cannula on our document. So try to brush across there and we receive a message telling us that we could not use the Brush tool because the layer is locked. So I'll click OK and now tap the V key on your keyboard to activate the Move tool. And let's click on that same image of the two people in the canoe and it's triggered down Northside recant, reposition the image, but we cannot make any changes to the pixels. Let's lock everything in this image. So we're gonna click the lock. All Bettina would just as the last icon, this group of lock icons. And now if you try to move the image again, we receive a message telling us that we cannot use the Move tool because the layer is locked. So I'll click. Okay. So let's toggle the lock all Abaci in ofs. We just click on the little lock icon again. And now we can move this to and canoe layer if we so choose. I'm gonna move this backup. That's also unlock the lock image pixels icon. And again, that's a second icon from the left to toggle that one off. So now we could modify the pixels of this image or this layer if I so choose. And lastly, I want to unlock the background layer, and I'm going to do that by renaming it. So I'm going to double click on the thumbnail from the background icon that is based a new layer dialogue. And we're going to name this lakes or type in Lake in the name box, and then click OK. And we see that the lock icon has now disappeared. So yes, using these lock icons is a good way to protect your layers from accidental edits. 64. Removing the Background: When you unlock your background layer, the Remove Background button will appear in the Properties panel. This is the Properties panel right down here. And right now we don't see it's because background layer are still locked. If you don't see the Properties panel again, he would just choose window properties from the menu. So we'll start by unlocking the background layers. So we'll click the little lock icon and we can see that our background layer has now been unlocked and it's been renamed to layer 0. And if we scroll all the way down in the Properties panel now we see we have our remove background button. So when you click this button and what it does is selects the subject but removes the background. This does pretty much the same thing as this select Subject feature, except that it removes the background for us. If you'd like to follow logger working with that red a Dash Pepper Dr. JPEG image. And again, this look here, the lesson files folder on your desktop. So the first thing you want to do is click the little lock icon to unlock the background. And then you want to scroll down in the Properties panel and then we'll click Remove Background. And we can see that the background is now transparent. Now in the Layers palette, we want to select the image of the pepper, not the mask that it created, but the actual image of the pepper. Click on the leftmost thumbnail to select the pepper. Now let's select the subjects that we're going to click the Select subject budget and this selects the subject. And again, Photoshop did a really good job, selected the subject. It's not, she says there's no longer a background. And now if we wanted to create a new document and pasted or selected pepper. So let's do that. So it shows that it copy from the menu and choose File New, and want to make sure their clipboard is selected urban and click Create. And then will choose edit, paste. And that pastes in our pepper. So that is how to remove the background from the Properties panel. 65. Setting Layer Blending Modes: Blending modes allow you to blend a layers pixels between two or more layers. Most of the blending modes change either dark or light pixels in an image. Others enhance the saturation and brightness have an image you may wish to experiment with many of the different blending modes to get a feel for what each one does. To access bending modes, clicks a little drop-down list on top of the layers panel we can see all of the available blending Modes and bloody Mozi divided into five categories. The first category is the darken category, and that's just group of options right here. These belly modes always darken or birds your image. And many people like to use the multiply blending mode out of vignette to their image. Multiply is also good for getting rid of a white backbone in a black and white image such as a logo. The next group contains the lightened blending modes, and these lightens or dodges your image and the screen mode is a favorite of many people. Screen also comes in handy for getting rid of a black background and a black and white image. It keeps the white part, gets rid of the black. Lexically bubbly modes is contrast. These lightens or dark injury image. Many people use a soft highlights blending mode to add a nice contrast to the image. The overlay and soft light are excellent blending modes for adding texture to images as well. The next group here is comparative, also referred to as adjective or subtractive, which surely the differences between the two layers, these budding modes can really create some interesting results. The last one is color, which blends the tones and colors in the current layer with their tones and colors of the layer underneath. Now you can cycle through all the bidding of modes at your keyboard by holding down the Shift key and then tapping the plus key on your keyboard. So shipped postural, moving forward is a blend menu. And tapping shift minus will move you backward in the blend menu. Another handy feature is the live preview feature. So at this point to the blending mode that you want to view. So if a points to overlay, we see that it is temporarily applied to my image. So this really can take the guesswork out about figuring out how a blend mode will affect your photo. So again, as you move the most pressure with a different blend modes are image. Octave layer adjusts to show us what it'll look like with plenty about applied. So let's play with this a little bit. So let's select the manure layer in the layers panel. And then we went to attempt to command git keystroke combination. If you're using a Mac, control j, if using Windows, this creates a duplicate of our layer. This way, if we don't like the result of the blended, we could always go back to the original layer or they always do this whenever I would make changes to a layer l was create a duplicate of the layer and make changes to that layer, not the original. This way, our adjustments are always non-destructive. So let's click the blending mode drop-down arrow. I'm gonna scroll up until we see Linear Dodge ad, and I will click on that. What this does is brightens the base color to reflect the blend color by increasing the brightness, lets choose a different beanie modes. So let's choose lighten this time, still click lighten. And this lets the base color or blend color, whichever is lighter as the result color. Let's click our list again and let's see what luminosity it looks like. That's all the way to the bottom here, so we'll click on that. What this does is it combines the hue and saturation of the base color and the luminance of the blend color. And in this case, the result is kinda of a grayscale effect. So yes, definitely spend some time experimenting with the blending Moses can really create some interesting effects in your Photoshop documents. 66. Color Coding and Renaming Layers: Many people like to organize their layers by color-coding them. Color-coding it plays a specific color to a layer in the layers panel, allowing you to quickly identify key layers. And this could come in handy if you have a lot of layers in your project. Now in previous versions of Photoshop, you could color code your layers from the layer properties dialogue, which no longer exists in the latest versions of Photoshop, certainly color to a layer. You right-click the layer thumbnail and then choose the desired color from the menu. To rename a layer, you double-click on the name of the layer in the layers panel and we see that the text is now selected and limbic, you just type in the new name for our layer and then press which rotor Enter to confirm our change. So let's work on this together. So let's double-click on the word can, newer and newer paddle. And then we're going to rename this transparent man. So I'll type in as parent a man. And then we'll tap return or enter to confirm our change. So if you end up with a lot of layers of your Photoshop document, you may wish to name your layers, so you don't end up with 60 layers named layer one, layer two, layer three, etc. So you want to name your layers something meaningful so you can find them quickly. Where do you need to? So now let's apply a color to this layer. So we're going to right-click on the layer thumbnail. And let's choose orange from the contextual menu. And we can now see that our layer visibility column is now set to orange for this layer. So yes, that's color-coding and renaming layers. 67. Adding Adjustment Layers: Adjustment layers allow you to experiment with a different color and total adjustment effects without permanently changing the pixels in your image. For instance, you can change the brightness or contrast of your Photoshop document without permanently altering the image of the process. This way, if you ever wish to revert to the original brightness and contrast, all you need to do is hide or delete the Adjustment Layer. Note that adjustment layers effect to the entire image, not just parts of your image. Now if you wanted to apply an adjustment layer to just a specific area, simply create a selection of own the area to which won't apply the adjustment and then as the adjustment layer effects. So there are a couple of ways to out an adjustment layer. The first is to choose the design adjustment from the adjustments panel. And here's the adjustments power right down here. And again, if you don't see it, just choose window adjustments from the menu. We have all these different icons representing the adjustments that we can create as you move your mouse pointer over each icon. Nora's said, I'll generalize text tip displays in the upper left corner of the paddle, telling us what that icon does. Another way about even Adjustment Layer is by clicking the create new fill or adjustment layer button on the bottom of the Layers panel. And that is the fourth button from the left, and that's this button right here. So once you click it, a list is pleased with all of the available adjustments that you can create for one or two out of brightness and contrast adjustment layer, I would choose that the menu. A third method is by choosing layer, new Adjustment layer, and then choosing the type of adjustment from the menu. So let's work on this together. So if you're folding alone, you want to display the adjustments panel up is not visible, so we'll choose window adjustments and he can tell it's visible because there's a little check bargain next to it. I'm actually going to click on the Adjustment is tab and drag this out, sort of easier for us to axis. So let's click on the transparent man layer and other layers panel. This someday, someday or above which we want to create an adjustment layer. So we're going to create a brightness and contrast adjustment layer. And that's the first option in the adjustments caudal. So we'll click on that and notice that a new layer automatically appeared at our Layers panel. So we make adjustments to our justice layer from the Properties panel for that later. So here we see the Properties panel down here and we have a Brightness slider as well as the contrasts lighter. So let's drink the Brightness slider to the right to about 25. And let's modify the contrast as well. So we'll drag that slider to the right to about plus 20. So I think we're done with the brain is in contrast properties. So we're gonna right-click the Properties tab and choose close for the contextual menu item, and that closes that properties group. You could modify the adjustment at any time by clicking on its layer in the layers panel. So this is our adjustment layer arranged here. And then we see the brightness and contrast sliders again display in the Properties panel. So we're going to, if you just have the regular Layer selected rather than the adjustments layer, you could just double-click on the adjustment layer thumbnail to display the options for that particular adjustment layer. So let's choose a contrasts are retained during the contrast letter to about 30. And again, you can keep the Properties panel open because that adjusts to whatever option you have selected a selected the kayak earlier in my list, it displays options for that layer. If you go back to my adjustment, there, it will again display the adjustment properties. The Guinea could always close the panel by right-clicking on its tab if you want or if you click the flyout menu as well and choose close. But I don't think I'm going to leave the Properties panel open. So nobody wanted to do is create a selection around the transparent man layer on our image. And we're gonna do that in order to apply an adjustment layer only to the selection. Suing a hold on the Commander-in-Chief using a Mac or Control key music windows. Then click on the transparent to band thumbnail and our Layers panel, we can see a selection is placed around just that area of our image sorta adjustments panel here we wanna click on the hue saturation icon, and that is the first icon in the second roll. And we can see in the upper left corner of our pallet tells us what that icon is. So we'll click it and you Saturation adjustment layer has now been added to our mirrors panel. So the Properties panel, we see three sliders here. There'll be can modify hue, saturation and lightness thinker when I modify the lightness of this. So I'm gonna click the lightness slider and drag it to the right to about, let's go about 40. So now when a Haley's adjustment layers from view. So to do so I'm gonna click the little icon next to the hue saturation layer that hides that layer from view. Now click the little icon next to the braid as it contrast layer that hides that layer from view as well. So the image is now displayed without the adjustment layers. And as with regular layers, you could also select blending mode as well as modify the capacity of adjustment layers as well. So that is working with adjustment layers. 68. Adding Fill Layers: Phil layers allow you to add a layer that is completely filled in with a color, gradient or pattern. So rather than simply adding our color to objects in your documents, fill layers are flexible in that like adjustment layers, they can be edited and removed easily and they're filled content can be changed at any time soon start by selecting the layer in the layers panel above which you want your new fill layer to appear. Then click layer on the menu, prints a new fill air. And we see we have three options here, solid color, gradient or pattern. For solid color, you choose the color from the color picker that's you want. Likewise for gradient and pattern, you would choose a desired graded or pattern from the presets picker. You can also add a fill layer by clicking on the new fill layer or adjustment layer budget, and then choosing solid color, gradient or pattern from the menu. So let's work on this together. So let's click the top and layer in the layers panel. And what we're going to do is I'm a fill layer at the top of our layers panel. And again, you can always change the position of the layer later on just by dragging it to the new position in the layers panel. But we're gonna keep it here for now. And we're going to click on layer in the menu, point to new fill layer and then choose pattern from the menu. So we're going to create a pattern fill layer. We can provide a name for layer if you wanted to. I'm just gonna leave this as is for now and then click OK. Here we have a couple of options. So we can set the Aigul the scale, and choose a powder whenever you want. And we see that a defaulted to this leaf pattern here, I'm going to click the little drop down list. So let's click See you disclosure triangle next to the grass folder. And let's choose this the second word for the right here, no temperature in a render. And then we'll click okay, so now let's change the opacity of it because it's covering up the rest of our layers here. So it click the capacity drop-down list and drag that to the left, maybe to about 40%. Now let's go to three. Let's go to 30%. So right now it's a little background texture tour image as not another film layer. So we'll take layer them and you point your new fill air and this ten minutes out a gradient fill layer. So click gradient from the list and we'll stick with the default name for now, so I'll click. Okay, so now we want to choose this type of gradient that we went to add. So we're gonna take the gradient of presets picker. Let's expand the basics group and we'll choose a black to white gradients. So that's the last one in the list here that we'll click OK. And again, it covered up the rest of our layers so we need to reduce the capacity. So click the capacity drop-down list, drag to the left. Let's go to about 35% again, another good. So they would temp return or enter on a keyboard. So now let's click the KaiA for layer in the layers panel. What we're gonna do is drag this layer to the first position in our list. So we're drinking, click all the way to the top of the layers panel. Again, the little blue bar tells us where the variable end up. If free, release an off button, if you want to make sure the bar is all the way up to the top of our layers panel that will release the mouse button. So we see that this layer is now above these adjustments that we added. So the adjustments are not applied to this layer, but only to everything below the adjustment. So let's save our changes. So we'll click File Save from the menu. 69. Creating Smart Objects: In this video, we're going to talk a little bit about smart objects. And are smart objects is a feature that allows you to work with layers at a completely different way. A smart object layer can contain one or more layers from the active Photoshop document or even files for another application, such as our raw files, vector files from Adobe Illustrator or PDF files for Adobe Acrobat. So when you edit a smart object, the object will reopen in its original application. From there, you can make any changes to the Smart Object or even insert additional smart objects. Now what do you save and close the file? The object will be updated in the Photoshop and document. And what's nice about smart objects is that you don't lose quality when re-sizing. You didn't go smaller and then bigger without sacrificing quality and the process. So there are infinitely resizable. So how do you create smart objects where there are several different ways you can convert one or more layers in the act of Photoshop document by either right-click EA layer than choosing Convert to Smart Object can also use the flyout menu and the layers panel. And choose Convert to Smart Object. Additionally could also choose Layer, practice smart objects and then convert to smart objects. You can also place an external file into an existing Smart object by using the file place command or a fruit Adobe Bridge, you could choose. Let me switch to Adobe Bridge here. Select the file, then choose file put into place, and then choose it in Photoshop. You can also paste on dreg objects n from Adobe Illustrator or PDF content into an existing Smart object. Additionally, you can duplicate smart objects to create two versions from this same source image. Keep in mind however, that if you do edit one, both versions will be updated. Note also that smart objects will not let you brush on them or use any of the healing tools. So you want to keep that in mind. So we've already seen how to convert an existing there into smart objects, as well as to place an object from bridge. If you're in Lightroom, we can select an image and then choose photo and it in open as a Smart Object in Photoshop. And then you would just double-click the Smart Object tool, but it up in Camera Raw to make any changes. So rather than merging or flattening your layers, you may want to consider instead grouping them into smart objects layers. Now, while Smart Object layers do tend to increase the file size of your Photoshop documents. You maintain the ability to re-edit the original separate layers. So there's a definite plus to that. So let's work on this together a little bit. So let's click on the pattern fill layer there be created in a previous video and we're going to drag it to the trash can. I come and have you don't really need that anymore. So a Moor mouse pointer over the trash can, I kinda the release the mouse pointer. And that's layer has been deleted. And that's during the kayak or layer. So it's below the transparent to man layer. So I'll drag it all the way down. I'm like so, so now I'm going to click the biochar layer, the Layers panel, and we're going to hold down the Shift key and then select the lake layer. So what this does is select the cracker layer, the two and canoe layer on the leg layers. So let's convert these three layers to a Smart Object. So to do so, we're going to use the little flyout menu on top of the Layers panel and then click conferred to smart object. And we can see that photoshop created a Smart Object. These three selective layers. So now let's double-click the thumbnail for our new Smart Object. And what this did is opened up the layers that make up the Smart Object and a new Photoshop document. And we see the new tab for a new Photoshop document on our screen here. So this allows us to make changes to the individual layers in us, in our Smart Object. So let's click the TEU and a new layer and our Layers panel. And if I want to do is duplicate this layer. So we're going to take the flyout menu in the Layers panel, and then we're gonna choose duplicate layer from the menu. And we're going to type in Duke in the name box here to provide a name for a new duplicate it. And then we'll click OK. We have a duplicate of the two new layer named dupe. So let's tap the 70K here, a keyboard to activate the Move tool. And let's click on the people that to canoe and drink a little bit to the right. So now we have two versions of that same layer in our image. Snow, it's kicked the co-occur later. I'm going to drag this down a little bit. Maybe about a half an interests having to about their dollars, kid. I'm going to click the capacities, dropped her list. We're going to drag this slider to the left, maybe to about 65%. So I think that's all the changes I want to make to these layers here. So we're Choose File Close from the menu. I'll click Save when prompted to save our changes. And now we can see that those changes have been updated in our original bot locked document. So yes, you can edit the individual layers that make up a documented every time but just double-clicking on its thumbnail and then making your changes. I'm going to close that and I think we're done with this documents and we're gonna choose file close for the menu. And we'll save our changes by clicking the Save button. Now brings us back to the main Photoshop screen. 70. Auto Aligning Layer Contents: If you have several images that you want to combine, he may wish to give the Ottawa lie in layers command a try, and that was located on the edit span. You are right now is grayed out because whatever the layers open. But as auto ally layers and what this does is it aligns overlapping content. So this is especially helpful if you are combining bracketed images that are not perfectly aligned. And you want to bring them together into a new HDR, high dynamic range image. So how this works is you place images with overlapping content, such as those that are part of a panorama on separate layers. And then he used the auto align layers command, which will then analyze the contents and blend those images into one continuous image. So let's see how this works. Server falling along, you wanna choose file open from the menu and you want to click the 00 86 image, and that's a JPEG image. And you've got a hold on the command cave using a Mac or Control cave using Windows, and select the 00 age seven image. Now select both of those images, then looks like open. And we can see that Photoshop open both of these images and separate tabs. So let's click on the 0086 tab and I'll choose, Select All from the menu that selects all of the contents of this image. There would choose edit copy. Now we'll click on the 00 age seven tab and then choose that it Paste from the menu tsunami. You see that we have both of these images pasted in the same document and separate layers. The layers palette, we wanna click the layer one layer, hold down the Shift key and then select the background layer. And these are the two layers that we want to auto align. Now will choose Edit onto a line layers from the menu. This is phase the auto align layers dialog. So from here there are six options that you can choose from. So the first is Otto and Photoshopped analyzes the selective layers and attempts to determine the best alignment method, and this is typically your best bet. If however, the results are quite what you expected, you can try these other options. Perspective, we'll just the position of the quarters of each layer kind of producing a trapezoid effect. Collage, well, scale, rotate or reposition each layer without changing their shape, thus reducing distortion there, cylindrical, which are just the corners of each layer, as well as bends the sides of the content that it's kinda curved. This is sometimes ideal for panoramas. Spherical will reposition stretches, skew the layers a bit as well as attempt to fix Betty a barrel distortion. And the last is repositioned where it's aligns to layers and matches common content but will not transform the layer there was disabled, not scale, rotate, skew any of the source layers. And again, as I mentioned, typically auto is your best option, so we'll leave it at that. That looks like ok. Now what I want is the small deer to be looking at the camera, and that was in layer 0. So I'm going to place that on top of a layer stack. So I'm going to select lays layer 0 in my Layers panel and then trigger to the top of the stack and then release my mouse button. And now we have the little deer and looking at the camera. So let's see this new image as a new documents. We're going to choose File Save As for them in new. And we're gonna name this my dear. So I'm gonna type in my underscored dear. I don't it will save it as a Photoshop document. And we want to ensure that the less than Files folder is selected sort of Notch. You'll need to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. And then we'll click save, and we'll click. Okay. So now let's close all of these open images. So we'll choose File. Close All from the menu. And that brings us back to the main Photoshop screen. 71. Auto Blending Layer Contents: Sometimes after auto lightening layers, differences in color seems or other inconsistencies might up here the new image, the auto blend layers command was designed to be applied after a lightening layers and those located on the editor menu as well. And actually it's right below the auto ally layers command. So typically you would use Autolite layers first and then use the auto blend layers command. What this will do is match the color and brightness or the even the position of each layer I will often enlightened seems that were visible after using the auto ally layers command. Many photographers will use the auto blend command to combine multiple exposures of this same image in order to create a shorter depth of field. It's also excellent for blending images in a panorama or for focus stacking. Now if you're working with a large number of files in a panorama, it can become cumbersome to manually drag or copy or paste all of the images into a single Photoshop document. So photoshop includes a happy little script that I want a knighthood combined selected images into a single document. And to do so we choose File, script's loaded falls into stack. Then he would choose the Fossae you want to combine into a single document and each of the images NB stored in its own layer, it one Photoshop document. So let's do that. So for falling ally again, you want to choose File printer scripts, then click load files into stack. Next we need to choose which files that you want to load. So we take the Browse button and we want to unlock these three images named to building one, building too, and building three. So second, The first one, building one, hold down the Shift key and then select building three. And that selects all of the images between and including building one and building three. You can also stack them individually by holding down the command key, physical matter Control key fusing windows, and then selecting the individual files. So once they're selected books like open, then click okay. It takes a moment. So we see that these images have been located into one Photoshop document and each in its own layer. So the first thing we want to do is odd to align these layers. So click the first layer, the Layers panel, Motorola shift key, then select the last layer that's selects all three layers and the layers panel. So now auto lighter layers by choosing edit, auto ally in layers. So what we wanted to do is reposition the layers but not transform them. So we're going to choose the reposition option here and then click OK. So notice that in the leftmost area here we see a little bit of color and consistency now. So we see a little seam here between this section and the other two. So the three layers still selected, we will choose edit, auto blend layers from the menu. And since this is a panorama, we'll make sure the panorama is selected and then we'll click OK. And they'll blends the color and the brightness of the images into one seamless image. So let's save our image. So choose File, Save As for the menu. And I think we'll name this panoramas or type that in and save as box. And then we'll click save menu. Click OK. And I think that about does it for this image would choose file close for the magnetic close, I'd image. 72. Resizing Images: In this video, we're going to resize images in Photoshop. And resizing involves changing the dimensions and is the resolution of a photo. So resizing is done via the image size dialog box and to display or we choose the image and then click Image Size. And if you're following a line, by the way, we're working with the image's meaning, chance dot JPEG or JPEG file located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So from the image size dialog box, you can modify the size, resolution, and dimensions of an image. Alright, if you've worked with previous versions of Photoshop, you'll notice that the user interface of the image size dialogue has been revised in Photoshop CC. On the left side of the image size Datalog, we have a preview window which displays how the image will look after your resizing adjustments, let's dies or you can click and drag on the preview window to view different parts of your image. So if you just want to know when a particular the image that you find relevant, just click and drag until that portion of the image is displayed in the window. The pixel dimensions here below displays how many pixels there are wide, by how many pixels there are high fault this measurement is displayed in pixels, but you can't however, change the unit of measure by clicking the little downward pointing arrow next to the word dimensions and then choosing the desired unit of measure from the list. So for instance, you could do inches if we refer, but we're gonna leave it out pixels for now. Now most of the time you will want to ensure that the original proportions of your image are constrained. Well, this option is activated. You need only enter a value in the width or height box. So for example, if a Android in 25 in the width box, notice that the heighth box automatically changed to a teen. Again, if I typed in 13, the width box there, we see that the value in the height box automatically adjusted to retain the image proportions. Now if for some reason you don't want to constrain the proportions than he would uncheck the box next to resample. So the document size boxes here allow you to change the printed size of your image, then to maintain the pixel dimensions. Again, you want to ensure that their Resample image checkbox is unchecked. Once you uncheck this check box, it can no longer change the actual width and height of the pixel dimensions could only changes the distribution of those pixels. Notice that if I typed in 25 in the width box, notice that the pixel dimensions did not change at all. Let me undo that. And we have 35 in the box here, but with the receivable box checked. And if I change this to 25, we see the pixel dimensions adjust accordingly. So again, if you only want to change the print of the size of the image, but not the pixel dimensions. Then you'll want to ensure that that box is unchecked. So at the box unchecked. And if you increase the resolution of the image, which is this box down here, the principle size will be smaller Using the future, you can change the resolution without modifying image quality, which is helpful if you plan on printing your photo. To fit your image to specific preset sizes, you click the fit to drop, DO arrest, and then choose a desired preset from the menu. For example, if you're printing are five by 70, but you would choose this option. Now a handy feature in Photoshop is the preserved Details option, which can really improved the quality of your image when you're up-sampling or enlarging the image. To do so, the Arecibo option has to be selected and click the drop-down list next to the word reassemble and then choose preserve details, enlargement, Photoshop, but then will automatically apply the preserve details algorithm to the image. Now what this does is resamples the image in steps of 1.5 magnifications and uses that information in the source image to make the edges of the output appears sharper. Now of course there is, there is a downside to this feature of that is that it has a tendency to create N400s artifacts in the image. So if we select that here, we see that we have them to reduce noise. Slider appears here to help us reduce some of that noise that was added in. So to combat this noise again, you just drag the slider to the right. Again, the trade off is, is if you drag those noise slider too far to the right here, image may appear overly suffered. Another option from this list is the bike cubic smoother, which applies more of a softening effect. The image. I find that most of the time the automatic setting works just fine, but you may wish to use the preserve details are bi cubic, smoother and experiment with them a little better. Choose the best one for your needs. To change the resolution of an image, enter the desired value in the resolution box, and that's rate here, right above that, we sample area for images that will be displayed on the web. Resolution of 72 is recommended. But for full color images, men for Professional publication or color printing, you'll want to set the resolution to about 300. Now after you've better you changes here, you can always return to the original values in the image size dialogue by holding down the Alt key for using Windows or Option key if using a Mac and then clicking. And notice that once I do, the cancel button changes into reset. So for example, if I turned into width to 30-year And the height automatically adjusted to 18, I can either hold on the altar Option key and then click Reset. Or we can also click the drop-down list and choose original size from the menu. And that brings us back to the original size of this image. So let's work on this a little bit together to play around with it. Soldier fallen ally again, and we're working with that chance dot JPEG image. Then we want to choose image, image size to display the image size, dialogue. And ours, we see the image size is 11.3 megabytes. So let's shrink the width here to pixels. So I'm gonna click the drop-down list and choose pixels from the list. And notice the images, notice period in pixels rather than inches. I'm going to share just a four hundred, four hundred pixels. And again, you want to ensure that the resample checkboxes checked this constraints are proportions and those that are file sizes down to a 181 kilobytes. And we want to hold down the Alt key using Windows or the Option key for using a Mac. And then once that cancel button changes to reset when I click the recent pattern, and that brings us back the original state of this image. So now we're going to uncheck the reassemble check box. And we wanted to ensure that the width and height dimensions are sets to inches. And the width box we're going to type in six and we're press the Tab key and a keyboard. And notice of that pixel width of our image did not change. No matter if we change the width and the height, these dimensions up here, the pixel dimensions or remained the same. Let's reset our image to its original state. So this time we're going to click the drop-down list and we're gonna choose original sides from the list. And imagery is restored to its original dimensions and the resample checkboxes now checked, let's click the width dimensions drop-down list again. And now we're going to choose pixels to change the width and image highest pixels. And we'll type in 400 and a width box. And we notice that the height is changed to 240. And I think we're done with the image size dialogue. So IPsec OK, to close the box and apply our changes and can see every image is considerably smaller than it was before. Such choose View 200% from the menu to increase the size of the image on our screen. 73. Scaling and Rotating Images: In this video, we're going to learn how to scale and rotate images. And that is done from the transformed venue. And to access dodge menu choose edit, transform for the menu. But notice that in our case, transform is grayed out. And that is because our layer o, we only have one layer of this document and it is locked. You cannot transform a large layer. So let's rename our layer, this background layer, and that will automatically unlock it. So double-click on the word background and in the name box and type in doggie. And then click, okay. So now if we click the Edit menu, we see that transform is now available. So there are several options from the transform menu. When Scale is selected, a box with sizing handles appears around the selection. You can change the size of the image by clicking on any of the sizing handles and drinking inward or outward until the images the way that you want. But notice that the image will maintain its proportions as you Dre, you cannot however, temporarily turn off this behaviour for holding down the Shift key and then clicking. And notice that we are no longer constraining our proportions. And then he would leave release the shift key to once again constrain those proportions. So yes again, to click on any of the sizing handles and rigging inward reduces the size of the image, whereas dragging outward increases the size of the image if you want to scan from the central point to outward rather than for the sizing handles hold on the Alt key Fuzi windows of the option C0 if using a Mac and then DRE and then north of Madrid from the center rather for them from the edges. And I'm gonna go back to the original state of this image. Now another option from the transformed menu is rotate. I'm authoritative selection. We see my little mouse pointer turn it into a double curved black arrow. This allows us to rotate the image by clicking outside of the selection and then dragging in the desired direction. So if I drag downward to the right, we can see that I have, which is rotating to the right, like why they could drink in the opposite direction. Now if you wish to rotate your image in 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key as your Dre a data set. Each time I drag, it snaps to the next 15 degree increment. And we go all the way around here. You can quickly your rotator image by 180 degrees or 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise by selecting one of those options from the transform menu. So I'm going to choose Edit, pointed transform, and the bottom of that transform many we see these options here. Rotate, 180 degrees are rotated 90 degrees clockwise or 90 degrees counterclockwise. So let's rotate this 90 degrees clockwise. And again, each time I do that, it rotates by 90 degrees. Another way to transform an image is by using the free transformed command. And again, that's located on the Edit menu and this is option rage here could also press Command T if using a Mac or Control T if Windows to activate the command. And what this does is it combines the Rotate and Scale commands into one command. So again, we see the familiar sizing handles appear around the image, but you also get moved by Mao's pressure outside of the selection and then rotate the image as well. So again, to be his scalar selection by using the sizing handles are dragging the direction that we want to rotate the image. Many folks prefer to use the free transferred command rather than the standard transformed command. And I typically, and one of those people, I find it a lot faster to just press Command or Control T and then transform my object right away. So let me reset this image back to the way or was. So let's free transform this image. So if you're following along and first thing we wanna do, we wanna rename our background layer again. So I'm gonna type in doggie again, known as Hold On the commands T keystroke combination of using a Mac or Control TIF using Windows, and that activates that free transform tool. Next, let's click on the sizing handle in the upper right corner of the image. I'm going to drag Edward reduces the height and the width of the image at the same time. And we want to go until the image is about 1.5 inches tall. So maybe, maybe about their liberal release or most budget sonatas rotate this image. So we'll choose edit, transform. Rotate it 90 degrees clockwise, that rotates or image. So yes, you'll find that the transform tool definitely will come in handy in your workflow. And again, my favorite is the free transform tool. So I think we're done with it, as I mentioned, will choose file close for the menu and we're not going to save our changes. So click don't save. 74. Skewing Images: In this video, we're going to look at how to skew images. And that's another command that software that transform menu that we worked with in the last video to choose edit transform. And the SQL command is right here. So what this does is it involves slanting the elements of a selection. So to skew an image, you click on any of the sizing handles and then you drag horizontally or vertically, and the bounding box will be slanted in the direction that you Drake. So let's see how this works. So if you're following along, you'll want to open the image names skewing, underscore text, and that's a Photoshop document or to dodge PSD. And again, that's located in the less than Files folder on your desktop. So the first thing I wanted to do is ensure that the Layers panel is displayed. We see we have two layers there. We have the Background layer on layer named skewing text. And the t lets us know that though it is a text layer. So what we want to do now is to create a duplicate of this layer, this skewing test layer. So to do so, we hold on the commanded J keystroke combination of using a Mac or Control J of using windows. We can see that that created a duplicate of the layer. Another way to create a duplicate of the layer is simply selecting the layer than dragging her down to the New Layer icon in the bottom of the layers panel. Should I want to activate the Move tool? So we'll tap the V key on our keyboard. And what we're going to do is drag the skewing text copy layer downward until it's directly below the skewing tanks later, so click on the word skewing texts and then drag downward until our text is right about like cell number, release her mouse button. Saddam was that copula is still selected. We're gonna choose Edit printed transform, and we're gonna choose skew from the transform menu. So that activates the skew command and places a bounding box complete with sizing handles around the selected layer. So let's click the bottom center sizing handle and we're going to drink a little bit to the right until the text is slanted. He would just like some and to confirm the transform your tap return or enter on a keyboard. So what I wanted to do is kinda add a shadow effect through skew in text layer. So to do so without layers still selected, we're gonna change the blending mode. So click on the blending mode drop-down list. And let's try luminosity. And that's the last blending mode in this list. That looks pretty good except it's a little dark, so we'll reduce the capacity that clicking the capacity dropped on arrow, I'm gonna drag it to the left until maybe till it's about 30% or so. And I think that'll do it. Soil temperature Enter, Enter to confirm our capacity change. And there is no skewed text with the shadow layer applied. 75. Adjusting Distort and Perspective: So distort and prospective commands can be helpful and adding 3D effects to your images. Both other commands are located off off of the Year transform menu. We worked within the past couple of videos. So the distort command allows you to drag an image in any direction by using a sizing handle, the image will then move independently without any access restrictions. Perspective command, let shoe change the perspective of a selection. So combined with Phil tools, these can create some very interesting 3D effects. So let's work on this together. A bit surfer falling along, you'll want to open the image named distort dot PSD. And that's a Photoshop document located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So if the image, albeit we're going to choose Edit, pointed transform, and then we're gonna choose distort from the menu. And we can see that the image is no surrounded with sizing handles. So let's click the top right sizing handle and that's drag downwards or bet. And then maybe just to about so enormous that our image is being distorted as we drag certainly everybody here. So now what I wanted to do as I activate the polygonal Lasso Tool, so we'll tap the keyboard to activate that group or tools. So I right-click the last So icon, which is the third icon, third group of icons for the top. And we'll choose the polygonal Lasso Tool. And what we're going to do now is click in the top left edge of the selection and then draw a thin rectangle selection. So click on the tab left, maybe about half an inch wide. So and then about so let me drag it back up to closer selection. So now we have an activated selection on our image. So what we want to do now is center foreground color to black. So let's have the DQ here, a keyboard or not, because this sets the foreground and backward culture to default values in the default foreground color is black. So now let's click the paint bucket tool. So click this icon right here and then choose paint bucket can also tap the G key to activate the group tools and then right-click it and then choose paint bucket. And then we're going to click right in our selection. So that fills that selection with black and credit kind of creates a 3D effect. So let's deactivate or selection. So we'll choose, Select, de-select for the menu. And again, he can always use the command of control D, keystroke combination. So now let's actually make the perspective commands. So we'll choose Edit, pointed transform, then choose perspective for the menu. And we're going to click the bottom right sizing handle and drag downward maybe about an inch. And that changes our perspective tool. It's not just have the V key and a keyboard to ensure that the paint bucket tool is deactivated. And then to confirm our changes, we press return or enter on a keyboard. And let's save our changes by selecting File safe in the menu. 76. Warping Images: Another future located on the transform menu is the warp feature. And what this does is allows you to bend, stretch, twist, pull and distort images in many interesting ways. So let's work with this a little bit. So for falling along, you want to open the image named warp dot PSD, and that's again located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So will activate the warp commanded by choosing edit due to transform, and then will choose war from the menu. And again, we see the familiar sizing handles and boning box placed her own are objects. So from the wharf Options bar, you can choose from photoshops, predefined work shapes by clicking on the drop down list and choosing the desired preset from the list. Or you can create your own or use a combination of the two. So once warp is activated, you then click and drag at any of the sizing handles until the image looks the way that you want. So let's keep the warp drop-down list here, or we're going to start out with Arch. And that's it, this second group of commands here. So what shoes arch? Notice there's applies the arch presets warp style to the layer. Let's try and everyone, so think the work drop-down list again, and this time let's go with inflate. So click on that and that and place the inflate warp style to the layer. Again, you could increase or decrease this by clicking on the sizing handle. So let's go back to the way we were. So that's Chris Command Z or Control Scanner, keyboard to the image was the way that was reopened IP. So we want to ensure that the warped God don't list is set to constant. And this is activated. We could click and drag on any of the grid lines at grid squares or grid points until the desired effect is attained. So notice that as I click and drag, the image is warped in that direction. So again, you could use the preset. Options are combination of preset and adjusting the points on your own. Once you're happy with your changes, will topic Turner enter on a keyboard to confirm a warp adjustment. So yes, using warping, Photoshopping, he creates very interesting effects on your images. 77. Adjusting Brightness and Contrast: Sometimes an image might appear dull, too dark, or baby overexposed. And the brightness and contrast commands allow you to lighten the pixels of an image. Now the first thing I want to say is that most people will do this either is Lightroom or camera RA, which is a filter in Photoshop for many people, the preferred workflow is doing all of your basic image adjustments in cameras such as adjusting the brightness contrast that blacks and whites, the shadows and highlights, et cetera. And then jump to Photoshop to do anything that you cannot do in Lightroom camera raw. And that's actually my preferred workflow. And I have a whole series of videos just on camera raw in this course. But if you want to do the adjustments in Photoshop, there are couple of ways to do it. Now, the old way of the legacy of ways by choosing image, pointing to adjustments are then choosing the desired adjustment from the menu. So we wanted to adjust the brightness and contrast. I would choose that for the menu and then drag the brightness or contrast sliders until the images. The way that you want. This is not from the preferred method anymore, because this is a destructive edit. You are editing directly on your image. So you can always create a duplicate of your layer and then only make the adjustments to that layer. The preferred way of doing this, however, is by using an adjustment layer. This is a non-destructive at it. I will preserve your original image and to create an adjustment there, choose Layer, pride to new Adjustment layer, and then choose the command that you want. In our case, we're lucky we're going to be working with the brightness and contrast command. You can also click the new Adjustment Layer icon at the bottom of the Layers panel. And that's as I kind of rates here, the fourth one from the left. And this is despite all of the adjustment layers that you can add. So back to brightness and contrast. So this you can individually changed the value of the brightness and contrast of your image. The Brightness slider tends to enhance the darker areas every image, whereas the Contrast slider enhances the lighter area of her image. So let's create an adjustment layers. So we'll choose Layer, New Adjustment Layer and what she was brightness and contrast. Then you can provide a damn free labor if we launch, but we'll just leave this as brightness and contrast elliptic. Ok? So you make your adjustments in the Properties panel. And if you look down here on the lower right corner maze screen, we see the brightness and contrast sliders in the Properties panel. Let's move this up. Let's move then let's move this free form here out of our doc. Yes, so again, the brightness and we'd bring it to the left at Darwin's or imaginative rigor to the right, brains are image Lanka is with contrast to the right to increase contrast or drink it to the left to decrease contrast. And we can see that our image adjust as we drank. So it's real time as we're making our changes, the typical get to maintain an overall balance in your image. You want to use a similar value, kind of a similar value for both the brightness and the contrast. So let me revert to the original state of is an edge server falling lie when working with the purple dash buds dot JPEG image. And again, that's located in the lesser files folder on your desktop. And we're going to create a new adjustment layer. And this time let's use the adjustment icon at the bottom of the layers panel. So it's just a little circle icon here. So I'll click it. And we'll choose brightness and contrast from the menu. Because I already pull up the properties powerless now free-floating on our window. And if it's not, you can always drink it out from your dock. So now properties probably gonna to drink the brightness to the right and we're going to drag it to about 25 or so. Let's double-click in the contrast box here, and we'll type in 25-year as well. So now brightness and contrast have been set to 25. And that's tough. We Turner Enter to confirm our entry. So that is using the brightness and contrast adjustment layer. 78. Setting Hue and Saturation: This video, we're going to look at another adjustment from the adjustment layers. And that is setting the hue and saturation. So if you have an image that is dollar lacking color, you can use the hue saturation commands to fix it. The unicast saturation power contains three sliders that you could adjust. There's the hue, saturation and lightness, silver falling along. We're still working with that same image that we worked with in the last video. So let's create a hue saturation adjustment layer. And this time we're going to use the adjustments panel. So to display it, if it's not already displayed, choose window adjustments from the menu. This is just another way of adding an Adjustment Layer. Again, as we've already seen, you can use the icon, the fourth icon from the left to the bottom of the layers panel or choose Layer, New adjustment layer. Then choose the type of adjustment layer you want. But we're going to use the adjustments panel this time. And the hue saturation is the first icon on the second row. So we'll click it. But first we wanna make sure that the Background layer was selected in our panel. And then we'll click the hue saturation icon. And now we see the three sliders appear at our properties panel, hue, saturation and lightness. So they use slider changes the color of the image based on its position on the color wheel. So at the bottom of the dialog here we have two color bars which represent the colors in the color wheel. The top bar displays the color before the adjustment. You can create some rather interesting custom colors using the US slider. The saturation slider increases or decreases the color in an image. So drag into saturations federal all the way to the left removes all of the color from the image. And let me undo that. So a quick way of removing all the color from the image is by using a black and white layer adjustment. So you could choose their adjustment layer, black and white, and that converts the image to black and white. Or you can also choose a black and white icon in the adjustments panel. And let's look at the third starter here, which is lightness, and that increases the brightness of the image. So if you're folding a line where he went to drag the slider to the right, to Bibi about 15 or so and nor as a color change in the image as I Drake, who ended up I had about 15. And that's increased the saturation in our image. So we'll drag the saturation slighter to the right to about 20 and thus decrease the lightness or during the lightness either to the left, which is called Baby above five or so. So there is our image with the humans Saturation adjustment. 79. Adjusting Shadows and Highlights: In this video, we're gonna take a look at how to adjust the shadows that highlights had an image. Now again, you would typically do this in Lightroom or Adobe Camera Raw. But if we wanted to do it in Photoshop, you can do so. Although there is no adjustment layer option for the shadows and highlights adjustment, you'll need to go to image prior to adjustments and then choose shadows and highlights from the menu. So if your image appears shadowed or silhouetted, he may wish to try this command, the shadows highlights command. It's also helpful for bright to dig up shadows in an otherwise finally lit image. Photoshop it lightens or dark as an image based on the shadows and the highlights of the neighbouring pixels, thus improving the contrast of overexposed or underexposed areas of the image. So let's apply an adjustment, but we want to ensure that our adjustment is made non-destructively. So what we're going to do is duplicate our background layer and then make the adjustments to that layer, to the duplicate layer. So a selected backdoor layered on Layers panel. So if you're following along, you want to hold down the Command DJ keystroke combination. If you're using a Mac or Control j if using Windows, that creates a duplicate of our background layer. So now let's apply our adjustment to this layer. So we'll choose image 0.2 adjustments and then choose shadows and highlights for the menu. So the default settings here correct for highlighting problems. And we can see that Photoshop did not do a very good job of applying the adjustment. So we can bring those brightness down by dragging the slider to the left, brings a brightness down a bit. So again, we decrease shadows made during into the left or increase shattered by dragging into the right. And some of the highlights flattered. And again, we're driven to the left or right to adjust the highlights of the image after he may wish to click, Show More Options checkbox to show additional options that you can set. This kind of enables more of a precise control. So under the adjustments here we have a couple of options. You can fine tune the color correction by dragging the colored slider to the left or right seemed for the mid-term. So here you can adjust them mid tones of the image and notice the adjustments as a drag. If we have some additional options also for the shadows and highlights. So again, we see the shadows amount here, you're just the tone as well, the radius. So again, you know, you want to play with these sliders, I tell you end up with the effect that you're looking for. So you're now starting to value is in the black and white clip boxes that values are entered into percentages. And this specifies how much of their shadows and highlights will be clipped to the new extreme shadow. So the larger the value of the greater the contrast. Now if we wanted to save these settings as a default, so that next time you apply this adjustment to an image, it'll use these cyber settings. You take the same Defaults button in the bottom left corner of the parallel here. But I think that I'm going to adjust the shutter is a little bit I'm going to create to make sure that this amount reads. Let's go about ten. Now I'm going to read the highlights to about 10% as well. Let's drink the translator to about 60%. I think that looks good. So I think I want to increase the highlights of this just a tad, maybe look good about 44% in the highlights spring the midtone slider, and I think it was pretty good world was maybe we'll leave it about 30 plus 30 and the color. So I think we'll leave our settings on about here and then we'll click okay, so again, we can turn off the visibility of the, of the Background layer. So this is before, after, before and after. So a new version is much more contrast teeth in the other one. So for happy with the adjustment want to keep it can always merge these two layers, layers together, the background layer and the copy of the black rural layer. So select both layers, but holy donor shift key and selecting the other layer, they will press the command E keystroke combination if you're using a Mac or Control IV using Windows. And now the two layers have been merged into one. So that is adjusting the shadows and highlights in Photoshop. 80. Setting the Color Balance: You can change the mixture of colors in a Photoshop document by using the car balance command. And again that's available. I had their eyes on adjustments there, or I could choose image 0.2 adjustments and then choose color balance. So this method is considered destructive, so you're better off using an adjustment layer. So let's do that. So choose Layer, New Adjustment layer, and then we'll click color balance. I will keep the name as is color Bellman's wine. And then we'll click OK and you can see the dual layer and our Layers panel. So using color balance, you can correct or enhance the existing mixture of colors and change the shadows, mid tones, and highlights of each image separately. And we see that it'll Tang drop-down list. So we could choose shadows to adjust auditors, shadows, mid tones, although the neutrons or the highlights. So the color balance adjustment is ideal for warming up images or enhancing faded scanned photographs. For instance, you can remove yellowish tense from your image by increasing the red colour. As far as we can see, the color balance properties here contains three sliders. Slighter has a color name at the end when it's complimentary color listed at the opposite end. So if I increase the cyan and reducing the reds may increase the reds and reducing this cyan. To, let me undo that. So for folly along and that's not just the mid tones. So take the tundra less than shoes made tons. And let's treat the cyan Red slider will drink it to the right. Let's drag it all the way to plus 25. And notice that as I drag, those reds begin to pop in the image. Next, let's drink the magenta and green sweater to about, let's go about plus 15 or so. Now there are strictly yellow, blue slider to the right. So that reduces the yellows are the image and adds more blue to the image. So let's click the little icon to the left and the color balance layer to view the before and after. So before, after, before, after. So a little adjustment can also adjust the shadows that are a little bit if you want. So let's sort the shadows and string them magenta a little bit to the left to maybe about plus six herself. I think we'll leave it at that. So again, before, after, before, after. So again, play around with the color mixing sliders here until you find the perfect balance. 81. Using Levels: So levels feature in Photoshop allows you to modify the tonal range of an image and allows you to specifically adjust the highlights, mid tones, and shadows by using a histogram. So let's see how this works. So again, you can add levels as of adjustment layer. So if the adjustments window was invisible, choose window adjustments from the menu. And the levels option is the second icon in the top role. So we'll click it out a new Levels adjustment layer. So here we see the new in the Properties panel little histogram window up here on the bottom of the histogram or three sliders. The first is the inputs shadow slider, which adjusts the shadows level. The center slider adjusts the mid tones. So this is the input midtone slider. And then the far right slider adjust not highlights. So there are some a preset you could use as well. So make clicking the presence dropped to a list that see I increase contrast plays that preset. Let's undo that. Darker. So increases the darkness of the image. Or it can use costume and then drag the sliders manually. He'd also have Photoshop adjust this sliders automatically by clicking the auto button and it tries to guess the optimal settings for the sliders. Finally, this little bit darker, I think now if you know the values that you want, you can also enter the manually in the little box is below the sliders. So let's enter in some values here. So let's type in 26 in the first box, which again is the input shadows slider, tap the Tab key to keyboard to move to the input midtone slider, and we'll type in 0.95. then we'll tap the Tab key again on a keyboard or this template typing 230 in the input highlights boxes. So in here we have a much more contrasty version of our image, a little bit darker as well. Let's trauma to the presets again. So we'll click the preset drop-down list and let's try lightened shadows. That doesn't look very good. So let's Command Z to undo that. Let's increase contrast three, that's tray increase contrast one. This doesn't look too bad. Stuck in the shower is a little bit, so let's drag the input shatter slider left here during that a little bit to the right, notice that the mid tones adjusts as well as I drag, and I think that looks pretty good. So let's take a look at the before and after. So we'll toggle the visibility of this levels one adjustment layer. So before, after, before, after him, so that it'll difference. So that is I using levels. 82. Using Curves: In this video, we're gonna be working with curves. And curves are another adjustment layer in Photoshop. And they are similar to levels except that you control the mid tones with much more precision, as well as more accurately control the total balance in an image. Curves can really help improve flats looking images, unlike levels, the left side of the curve represents the shadows. On the right side of the curve represents the highlights. So let's add a new Curves Adjustment Layers. So click on layer in the menu, approach a new adjustment layer. Then we'll click curves from the menu, and I'll leave the default name as curves. One of them will click OK. And then our curve pain displays here on her screen could also use the adjustments panel to create a new curve adjustment. And to do so we would choose a window adjustments. And then the curve option is the third icon from the left curves. So when you first display the curves panel, I should say in this case, the Properties panel, you will see a diagonal dividing line and a histogram that you saw when we were using levels for dividing live, which is considered the curve. The histogram represents the current values in your image. To add a new adjustment on the image, you click on the curve at the desired location. And then new Drake operas to lighten or downwards to darken. So just click on the area of the library went out into a judgment. Well, click and notice a little dot here that lets us know that undo adjustment has been auditing and a curved line. And then we can just drag up to lighten our regrade, drink downwards to darken. You can modify different errors every image by adding multiple points. And I do believe a Photoshop all, all you have to add up to 16 points. So I could add a point down here towards the shadows and then modify their shadows from this point. So once you have an anchor points selected, you can also use the opera Down Arrow keys on your keyboard to make an adjustment. And notice that that adjustment plate here, the lower have compromised cream slowly moves as I tap the up and down arrow keys on my keyboard. So this is an excellent way of nudging and adjustment. So likewise, I could click this point here and then use my arrow keys to nudge that adjustment. Now if you don't like the adjustments you've made, you can revert back at any time, clicking the reset icon in the bottom of the panel. And that is the third icon from the left here. So as I click got all of the adjustment points, a gun for my curve, often a good starting point is using the auto button, and that's in the upper right corner of our screen there of our window here I'd went you click that Photoshop will apply an algorithm which with the image and adjusted accordingly based on its best guess. And I got, Of course, we could always adjust from there if you don't like what Photoshop did. So when make an adjustment to your curve, you should try not to have any flat areas of your curve. Ideally, you would strive to have an S shaped curve, kinda like we have with the auto adjustment here. So you can bring down like this up a little bit, maybe drink this down a tad to get more of an s-shaped curve. So you can read an S-shaped curve again by dragging up on the right side of the curve to lighten the highlights in the image. So again, as we see, if I drag up the highlights are getting brighter, while by dragging down on the left side of the image to darken the shadows. Let me reset this curve is I'm gonna click the recent icon on the bottom of the panel. Now photoshop also has several curve presets that you can apply to your photo. So if we click the preset dropped DO list, we see several precess though we could use. So let's do a lighter preset and we can see that the considerably lightens the image and we can see the anchor points on our curve that's choose the darker preset. So we can see that the line is pulled down more towards the left and area of the image. Let's try medium contrast. So you could check out some of the presets first and then if you find one that you like or simply use a preset as a good starting point. So let's click the preset rhabdo list again, and let's change this to strong contrast. So this again a place that preset to the image. So now let's click on the Adjustment pin. Second square, the bottom row, we're going to drag it so that the pin rests in the top right corner of the first square on the bottom of our panel. So I'll click on the pin and then drag it up a little bit so that brightens our image a little bit, brightens up those shadows. Next, we're going to click on the third in the curve and then we're gonna drag to the right. And then off the panel I'm, and we see that this is a way of removing a point from outlined to simply click on the line and drag to the right to remove it from the curve. Snow, we're going to click on the line at the point where it meets the histogram in the third row, third square from the top, this is the third row and the third square from the top. So we'll click right here. That adds another point of that area. And that's moved this upward, just a smidge by tapping the up arrow key on a keyboard, so that adjusts the image accordingly. And lastly, we're going to click on the point in the first square in the bottom row. And we're going to drag this down just a little bit. So you end up with a kind of an S curve here. So yes, using curves, you could really fine tune the adjustments on the image and only modify specific portions of your photo by adding anchor lines and draw an adjusting those lines accordingly. So I think we're done with this image and we're gonna choose file close for the menu. I don't, I don't think we're gonna see our Chinese, so we'll click a. Don't save. 83. Replacing Color: In this video, we're going to play around with photoshops. We place Color command. And what this does is allows you to replace the color in your image with another color. So once you have the replace color dialogue displayed as I do rate here, you click the color on the image that you wanted to change. So the wanting to change the color of these strawberries that were just click anywhere in the image on a strawberry. And now we can see that that color is displayed in the color sample box. So to replace the sampled color with a new colour, you drag the hue saturation and lightness sliders to the left or right until the desired color is displayed. Because see the colors in my image adjust as I drag the sliders to isolate the color you've selected Greg the Feizi, this slider until only the desired color is changed. So you design it and bring it to the left or to the right. So let's play with this a little bit together. I'm going to cancel out of here. And if you'd like to work along with me, we're working with the image named fruit id dash dish has a JPEG image located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So the first thing you want to do is make a duplicate of our background layer because this is a destructive edit. So we don't want to make that change onto our main layer. So we'll tap command J if using a Mac or Control JV using Windows to duplicate that layer. Now with the layer one layer selected, and we're going to choose image printer adjustments and then choose replace color. That's how the way in the bottom of the menu here. So click on that. And enzyme just pleased that replace color dialogue and they know how to open into just a moment ago. So again, we want to change the color of the strawberries. So I'm gonna click the top strawberry in the dish here. So select that and that updates the color in the sample box. So I'm going to adjust the fuzziness ladder but rigor to the left two, let's go about 145. So Australia's saturation slider to about 30. And that increases the saturation of all of the strawberries That's drink the lightness slider to. And we don't want to get into too much, maybe about five or so. So that considerably brains up there, strawberries in our image. So now let's click the button, a blue area of the bowl here we want to adjust the color of the bull. And that's strictly hue slider to the right. And that's gone. Fifties. Swirl ball ends up more of a lavender color. So yeah, it's just a quick way of changing the color in your images using the replace color tool. So I think we're finished for this. Let's just cancel over here to close that dialogue. 84. Matching Color: The match color command allows you to match the colors statistics from one image, which is called the source image, and apply it to another image called the target image. So this can be especially useful in achieving a consistent look across a set of images or when the color scheme of a particular element in the image must match an element and another image. So again, the match color command is located on the adjustments sub-menu. And how this works is you will open the two images that you want to use. And you want to make sure that the target image, which is the image that is to receive the adjustments, is the active image on the image on top. I'll let you do that from the match color dialogue you could, even for you could further adjust via luminance, color intensity, and the fate of the colors. So here we see our target image. That's the image that I have opened his food to dash dish, Dr. J. Peg, and the source image, the image I was using for the adjustment is deemed fruit dash, dish, dash two dot JPEG. So let me cancel out of here. And if a father going on, you want to open those two images. So you choose File Open menu, and they're both look kinda the lesson files folder in your desktop. And thus the fruit dish image isn't the fruit dish to image, sorry, a select both of those and then click open. So we wanted to ensure that the fruit of dash dish images are active image. So click that tab and that's this image right here. There was a blue ball as compared to the image with the lavender ball. So we weren't fruit dash dish to be the active image. And we want to ensure the layer one is selective because again, this is a destructive adjustments are going to make sure that we're making them adjustment to our layer and notch to the main background image. Next we choose image. Prior to adjustments. You want the match color option, and that's at the bottom of the menu source select to that. The first thing we need to do is choose our source image, image that we're going to be using to change the color in our target image. So click the source drop-down list. This will display any images that you happen to have open and Photoshop. And we want the fruit dish to image. So we'll select that. And we could see what that's going to look like was preclinical k. And again, we can modify the luminance of a colors bright or dark unit not or IV and color intensity is termed the intensity down just a tad. So we can choose how much of the source image to apply to our new image. But we'll leave that turned all the way down. And now let's click. Okay. So now the color scheme from the fruit dish to image has now been applied to that main fruit dish image. 85. Converting an Image to Black & White: It's a black and white Adjustment Layer, allows you to convert an image to black and white. Once this is done, the Properties panel displays with six sliders from where you can control the brightness in the different areas of your image. For example, dragon, the yellow slider to the left or right, brightens or darker, it's areas that were yellow before you've converted the image to black and white. Like wise, if I drink the red slider, it would only change those areas of the image that were read before we converted our image to reset all the slightest back to their initial position, we can take the reset icon. And again, that's the third icon from the left and the bottom of the panel. There are also some presets that you can apply to your image. So if we take the preset, dropped our list here, let's click the blue filter so we can get an idea of what those look like and that's darker, lighter, red filter. So before you start reading the slides, you may want to experiment with some of these presets and now use them as a good starting point. Let's reset this again. Oh, and one more thing. If you want to add a touch, just a touch of tint back to your black and white images and you click the drop-down list to do so. But I'm going to cancel out of here. And we're gonna do this together for image looks like this from the last video that we did. We want to choose Edit, Undo, match color. We want the irregular blue fruit dish, and this restores the color to what it was originally. So now we're going to add a black and white adjustment layer. So to do so, let's just pay the adjustments. Panel, service not displayed, choose window adjustments from the menu. And I have mine right over here. So let me drag it over or towards the center of our screen. And the black and white Adjustment Layer icon is the ICA directed to the right of the scales here as this icon right here. So I'll click on our image is now converted to black and white and the Properties panel width, the color sliders displays. And again, these allows us to modify the brightness of a specific areas of our image. So let's drink the red slider to the right to about 80 or so. That's been a fun. The yellows as well. So we'll drag the yellow slider to the right to die. We'll go about 80 without what as well. And if you remember, there were both red fruit and yellow fruit of the image and the cause of those fruit adjusted as we drink these sliders, or should see the brightness of those colors increased as we dragged to those sliders to the Right. Now let's drink this cyan Slater and we're going to break that to the left and we're going to darken that color member. The bowl was kind of a cyan color and we're going to drag it all the way to the left. Let's go to about minus 80. So let's take a look at the previous state of our image. And to do so, we click the second icon from the left, and that's the previous imageData icon. So click on that. So that's before, after, before, after. So it just displays the black and white version of the image before we've changed any sliders. So yes, that is converting an image to black and white. And I think we're done with this image, so let's close it and we don't want to save our changes. So choose File closer then don't save from the menu. 86. Duplicating Images: So this is just going to be a quick little video on how to duplicate the images. So that might be times when you want to work off a copy of an image rather than with the original image. For instance, you might want to adjust an image of that, compare your adjustments to the original. So in this case you would create a duplicate of your image. And to do so, we choose Image duplicate from the menu. And once we do receive the duplicate image dialog, and this allows us to type in the name for a new duplicate. So I'm gonna name this my dash fruit dish, fruit gosh dish. And then I'm gonna click. Okay, so worth it clicked, okay, I do bucket of the image has been created and that includes all layers. So thorough a bunch of layers in this, the layers would exist at our duplicate as well. It is identical replica. And we can see the Photoshopped, placed it in its own tab. So I just wanted to show you a quick way of duplicating images in Photoshop. 87. Placing Images into Frames: In this video, we're going to work with the frame tool. And the icon for the frame tool is located on the toolbar as directly below the crop I counted above the eye dropper north we don't see that I cut down your D2 receptor toolbar back towards defaults because I do believe in an earlier video, we removed that ICA for the toolbar slots right-click and a little three dots at the bottom of the toolbar here. And we'll choose toolbar for the menu. And then we want to click Restore Defaults. This remove any of those icons are removed to the extra tools area, back to the toolbar, Some of the clicker done. So the frame tool is a new layer type that allows you to draw a frame on your image and then drag an image into that frame from either your computer or from your library. The image will automatically resize to fit the frame. So think of a frame as kind of a place holder or container for content. And what's nice about phrases of the allow for a non-destructive workflow. It that any content out of two frames is stored as a Smart Object. Now note that the purpose of frames is to contain images. You cannot add a shape or texts two frames, you can't however, convert a text layer to a frame where it should enables you then to fill the text with an image or a texture. In fact, you can actually convert any shape into a frame by simply right clicking into the Layers panel than choosing converts to frame from the contextual menu. So let's work with frames and a little bit. And for that we're going to work with a different image. So that's Choose File Open from them in you, you want to navigate to the lesson files folder on our desktop. And the name of the image that we want to open is tunnel window. And that's a JPEG image. That's this image rage here, tunnel underscore window and it looks like open. Now let's tap Cabana control plus to zoom in a little bit variable right there. Now we activate the frame tool. You can either click the icon which is directly below the crop icon, or tap the K key on your keyboard to activate the tool. Now we wanted to draw frame around the open area of the window, around the above the bars here. So let's do that. I'm going to click and drag like so. Now we have a frame and this area of our image. So now we wanna drag in an image from our computers. So I'm going to dismiss played my dock here and tap the finder icon. And on the desktop we want the lesson files folder. And the father we're going to drag in is named squirrel and dish. We worked with this a little bit previously. So I'm gonna click the image, either drag it and drop it right onto the frame. There's ads the image to the frame. So if you're using Windows, you would launch Windows Explorer than drinking a dog to the frame. Or if you have an image under desktop, could simply simply drag the image from your desktop or drag or directly into the frame. And again, you cannot, can also rearrange the image within the frame, but just clicking and dragging. And we can see that we can change the position of the image in the frame. So that is using the frame tool in Photoshop. So I think we've doubled his image of what she was file close for the menu and we're not going to say what he changes. So take a don't save how it closes image as well. And we'll choose don't save. And that brings us back to our bead Photoshop screen. 88. Using Standard Type Tools: In this video, we're going to begin working with photoshops. Type tools, or type refers to the process of adding horizontal or vertical text to your Photoshop documents. When adding type to an image, the editable text is placed on its own layer, called a type layer. And if you look over here on the right pane of the layers panel, we see a couple of type layers, the About Us and the lorem ipsum type layer. Type layers allow us to modify attributes such as font, type, font size, style, and alignment, as well as move that text to different areas of your document. And you can easily identify a type layer because it's designated by a t in the thumbnail box and the layers panel. So as you can see here, these tool or type layers. So you create a type layer from the Tools panel, from the toolbar here. And again we see the letter T that lets us know that these are the type tools we have for type tools available. There's the Horizontal Type Tool, the vertical type of tool, the vertical type mass tool, and the horizontal per mask tool. The Horizontal Type Tool, which is the first one in the list, is the ones that you're most likely to work with some most to user you click if I cut it into menu here, and then click in a location in your document where you wish to begin typing and then simply type her text. As with other Photoshop layers, you can modify the capacity percentages or select a blending mode to a blended text with the underlying layers directly from the Layers panel. So if you're following along, you want to open a file name of buttons and dot PSD of that's located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. And you want to ensure that the letters panelists visible, not if it's not choose window layers from the menu, then tap the V key on your keyboard to activate the Move tool and the id selector. Anything else? So you may have had selected, I'm gonna click on the About Us layer. And again, this is a type layer as designated by the letter T and the thumbnail. So now that we've selected a layer, we're able to modify and move that layer. So yeah, you wanna show the Move tool is activated. Let's click on the words about us and the drag the text all the way to the bottom. We're going to bring it to the bottom bucket sort of. And it's about Sony and release the mouse button. And if you're looking at it lowers probably can see that each of these buttons are on the road layer. So now we're going to modify the foreground colors to take on the foreground color square in the Tools Panel. And then the RGB boxes, we're going to type in 255 in each. So I'll type in 255255255. And there's churches, the foreground color to white. And then I will click. Okay, so now we want to activate the Horizontal Type Tool. So you can check the T on your keyboard to activate that group or tools. And they want to ensure that the first tool is selected. So right-click and choose Horizontal Type Tool. I want to click at the top left of our document and maybe about right here. And we're going to click and type in wild web designs. Now while you have the tool type tool activated, you could actually reposition the texts by moving your mouse cursor directly below the text. And once you see your cursor changed into a black arrow with a faraway crush. You can click and then drag it to reposition it. So let's drag it right to the center of our documents have right about here. And then we will release the mouse button. So I think we're happy we're this or to commit to our changes. We click the little checkmark on the Options panel and our new text layer as doublet confirmed. So I'll several document by choosing file, say from the menu. 89. Setting Type Options: You control the attributes, have your text by modifying that type options and the options var, and those are the type options right up here from the Options bar, you can change has attributes as the font type or the font-family. That's this drop down list here. The font style we have regular bold, bold, italic or bold. The font size, anti-aliasing. And here we have three alignment icons. Align Left, Center are aligned right. The little white color swatch here is where you choose the color for your text. As we can see, clicking out and displays the color picker. There's also a text warping. So here you can choose a warp style for your text. And he could toggle between the character or the paragraph, panels, Creek 3D from texts. And then again, the checkmark is to confirm or commit your changes. Now if we wanted to modify the text itself, you click the type layer in the layers panel, sort of click a wild web designs, activates the type tour on the Tools panel and then click directly on the text. And now I can modify the text if I wanted to. I'm gonna leave this as a capital D. So again, just like any other word processor, you can delete a character by clicking it after it, then taffy, the backspace key on your keyboard. Likewise, to insert a new character, click is the location where you want to insert a new character, then type in the word, my wild web designs. If you wanted to select all of the text of the layer, double-click the layer thumbnail and we can see now that all the text is selected. So if you're following along, you want to click the wild web designs type layer here. And if you don't see these type options on the Options bar, you wanted to ensure that the type tool is activated. So tap the Tiki and your keyboard. So what we're going to do is change the font size of this text to 36. So choose the font size doctor lists from the Options bar, and choose 36 from the list. You can see that our text on a document has adjusted accordingly. So now we're going to click in front of the word wild. And then we're going to drag to the right until the entire word is selected. And we're going to change the color of the text for just this word. So I'm going to click the text color box in the Options bar. And I think we want to change this to red. So we'll click on the RGB boxes and type in 2550 in the green box and 0 in the blue box. And then we'll click OK. Stella's click in front of the word web, and we'll select that word like we did last time. So hold down the left mouse button and drag to select a word. And we're gonna change the color of this text to blue. So we'll click the text color I kind of get in the options barn. And this time we're gonna type in 0 in the red box, 0 in the green box, and leave the blue box had to 255. And we'll click OK. And lastly, we want to select the word designs, just like we did last time. And we're going to change this text color to yellow. So again, we'll click the text color box under the RGB boxes were type in 255 and the red 255 and the green and then 0 and the blue. And then I'll click OK. Slots, kick the Move tool on the Tools panel that D selects the text. We wanted to center our text layer of the documents or just click it and drag it until it's once again centered on our Photoshop document, Siddha, it's not gonna be the type tool by tapping the Tiki and a keyboard. And we don't need to select the horizontal tool because already selected and always defaults to the last tool that you used in a group. And we wanna click the About Us layer. And that's not texts that we have in the third button. And we're going to change the font style, this too bold. So click the font-style drop-down list, which is the second dropdown list here, the Options bar. And we're going to choose Bold from the list. And let's choose the font family of this territorial. So click the font family drop-down list and that's typed in a IRI. We automatically jumped to selections matching what we typed. And where we want to is Arial Black. So we'll choose Arial Black regularly from the list, and then we'll tap into or on our keyboard. So yes, that is how to modify the text aid your Photoshop documents by using the type options on the options buyer. 90. Creating Paragraph Type: Point type, which we've been working with so far, is the default type in Photoshop. This is the type that you create by activity, the type tour of the tool bar, and then clicking in your document and then typing your text. As you type their texts continues in one line. Unless you create a hard line break by tapping the return or enter key on your keyboard. Point type is ideal for short texts consisting of only a few words. Paragraph type on the other hand, is created it a bounding box, a true creative bony box. You click the type tool in the Tools Panel and then draw a bounding box on your document. So just click and drag and release the mouse button. And then you type in your text inside of a box and begin to see photoshop put some default Lorem ipsum text into our inbox here, though it's not very readable. Now Azure type again to the bounding box, your texts will automatically wrap to the next line when it reaches the far right edge of the box. You can also scale rotator skew the text in a bounding box by using the entity of boxes sizing handles, As we see radiator, which can add some interesting effects. You can also use the free transform tool by choosing an edit Free Transform from the menu. And here you can now scale or rotate or flip the text in the box. Now as we've seen, whenever you create a bony box and Photoshop, it is automatically populated with a dummy text called the lorem ipsum, But you can't turn off this feature from Photoshop preferences. So we type return or enter to de-select this box. So to do so, choose Photoshop preferences if we're using a Mac or other preferences if using a Windows, click on type and then uncheck the box next to fill new type layers with placeholder text. So what you do so Photoshop would no longer and bounding boxes width that dummy text. So let's work on this together a bit, somebody out and do those changes that I have done here, sort of refine that I was working with that same document that we're working with in the previous video, the buttons, Dutch PSD document. So let's tap the t key on a keyboard to activates a tank tool. And that's draw bounding box on the left side of our image, maybe about one inch wide by two inches tall, and there were at least some mouse button. So let's click the font family drop-down list and we're going to choose to Homer from the list. So type in th and learn to home irregular. So we'll choose that. You still have the dummy text option enabled. You want to tap the delete key on your keyboard to leave that text. And we're going to type PID the following text. Our design experts can create that wild and crazy design for you, making your company stand out from the competition. I don't worry that our test is all scrunched together. We're going to fix that in a moment. So to do so would choose, select, offer them in you. So to fix this issue, we need to first despair the character. So which was Window character for the menu. So we wanted to, so I want to do is set the leading source of do. So we've taken the second box here, which is the leading box, and we type in 14 and temperature inner Enter. And when the text still selected, we wanna change the font size of this, maybe to, let's try 80 and see how that lux. So that looks a lot better. So you can see now that our text is much more readable. So let's keep that character tad her to hide that panel. And now we'll click the Move tool and our tools panel to de-select the tests. Now we can see the text in our new text layer. Now we created. 91. Formatting Characters: In this video, we're going to work a bit more with the Character panel, and we worked without just a tad In the previous video. So this panel gives you control over the individual characters in your type layers. And I have the panel on my screen right now and do display. You choose window character from the menu. And it shows a place in a panel group with the paragraph panel, which will be working with in an upcoming video. So the Character panel, you can modify the font family font style, font size, font color of your text. And we've already seen this. Many of these options are available on the Options bar as well, but the character power also provides some options that are not found on the Options bar. For instance, you can modify the leading, which is the space between lines of text, like we did in the previous video. Modify their space between characters, which is called kerning. Tracking the space between words. You not afraid that baseline shift, which will raise or lower text, the vertical scale, which will change the height of the text. Horizontal scale, which will change the width of the text and of course, font color. And I put a little screen shot on the screen of the character panel was everything labeled. So you'll be able to find these options easily. And the bottom on the Character panel or some additional options such as full bold for talent, all caps, small caps, subscript, superscript, et cetera. And I'll get, I'll have all of those elements labeled for you on the screen. So let's work with this a little bit. So you want to tell the TQ here new keyboard to activate the Type Tool and of the character parallelism displayed. You'll choose window character from the menu. And we wanted to modify this while web designs layer. So we'll click that to layer in the layers panel to activate that layer. So now what we're gonna do is select the W in the first word wild from the characters Pali when I click the font size drop-down list, which is the second dropdown list here we're going to choose 60 from the menu. That changes the font size of just that character to 60 points. Let's do the same thing with the W in the word web. So we'll select that to w and then choose 60 from the font size list. And let's do the same thing with the D and the word designs sector, font-size. Dr. lives then choose 60. So now we want to select all the text in this layer. So to do so, if you recall, we double-click the thumbnail. So double-click the T and the wild web designs and that selects all over text. So what we're going to do now is modify the vertical scale of this text. So we'll double-click in the vertical scale box and this box right here. So I'll double-click it and then type in 150, then temperature Enter to confirm our changes. And I want this text to be all caps as well. So I'm gonna click the all caps button and that's the third tucks budget here from the left. So I'll click that and I think I want to change leading to about 24. So let's click the leading drop-down list and choose twenty-four point from the list. And that's also changed the width of our selected text. So click on the horizontally scale box, and thus directly above the color paddle harem. And then we'll type in one 25. And then temperature and turn a keyboard, starts ticking the Move tool in our tool bar, and that activates the move children de selects the type tool. Sonatas click directly on the textured or document and as drag it so that all the text is visible and so that it's centered on our Photoshop. Document them. So they'll be about doesn't start saver documented by tapping commanders have using a Mac or Control S If You Xu windows. So yes, using the character penalty can easily Fermat the individual characters in your text layer. 92. Formatting Paragraphs: The paragraph panel gives you control over the paragraphs in your type layers. A paragraph exists whenever you create drought, a hard return, and you're Tipler. So thus to create a new paragraph, WHO tapped the return or enter key on your keyboard when you enter any settings in the paragraph panel. And if we don't see it, just choose window paragraph from the menu. I mean, you can see that this is in the same group as the character panel. So whenever you enter id settings into this panel, the changes will be applied to the entire selected are active paragraph. So I've activated by type tool is second is turned off. I don't necessarily have to select the paragraph. I could just be anywhere within the paragraph and their changes will be applied to that entire paragraph. So on the top here, the top row of icons here we have the alignment buttons. So this is the Allied left, central and aligned right. So the next four buttons are the justified buttons. So we have justified last left, justified last center justified allows to write and then justify all its first row boxes here there are two boxes, the leftmost boxes, the indenter left margin, and the next one is in dead right to bargain. And again, you can type in a number of points by which you want to indent. The next box down is the indent first line and then the last row boxes is a space before paragraph and the space after paragraph. So this allows us to designate how much space has between our paragraphs. So I have this text here, the retyped did in an earlier video. We are going to activate the Type Tool. So attempt the t key or a keyboard. And I want to increase the size of this bounding box. So I'm gonna click in the bottom center sizing handle and written down about 1.5 inches. And now we want to click after the exclamation point. And then we're going to template return or enter key on our keyboard. And we'll type him, call us today. Exclamation point. Now we don't want to activate the paragraph panel, so we'll click the paragraph tab to display it. We want to add a space between our paragraphs. So I think we're out of 12 points pace before this paragraph. So click in the before paragraph box and type in 12 and then temporary Turner entered. Or we can see that are placed extra space between these two paragraphs. And I think we'll centralist bottom line of text. So I'll click this centerline icon here. And then we'll save our changes source, choose File, Save for the menu. So yes, the paragraph palette allows you to apply changes to an entire paragraph had once. 93. Warping Text: So Warby budget on the Options bar, and that's this icon right here, allows you to transform your text to create some really interesting effects. So from the Warp Text dialogue here you select the style that you want to use it. We can see all of the styles available to us. And once you choose a style, you choose whether to warp it horizontally or vertically. You can distort your text even further by modifying the bend percentage or dragging the Horizontal Distortion or the Vertical Distortion until the desired effect is attained. But I'm going to cancel out of here. And I was working on this together. So if you're following along, you weren't really sure that the text tool is active and we're going to select the text on our document here, the wild web designs texts. And then we'll click the Create Work Text icon on the Options bar. That's Click the style drop-down list. And I think we agree to go with Twist, which is the last option on the menu. So we'll click that. And we can see what this style looks like immediately after we apply it. Let's try a different line and that's try rise. So we'll choose rise from the list. That's kinda interesting. Let's try arc lower from the list text selected. Let's drink the Horizontal Distortion slider to the right. Let's go to about maybe 30 or so. And I think that'll do it. So let's click OK. And now let's click the Move tool and our toolbar to dislike their texts or get an idea of what it looks like. And there is our work's text. 94. Using the Type Mask Tool: The type of mask tool is a masking tool which allows you to create type base selections that you can then move or formats like regular text to create a type mask, you right-click the type tool icon in the toolbar and then select either the vertical type mass tool or the Horizontal Type mass tool, depending on the effects you're going far. You then type the text for your selection and then click the committed budget on the Options bar when you're finished warrants your type ships selection has been created. You can then modify it like any other selection. You can move it up by a fill color to it, use it to create a Layer Mask. So let's see how this works. So for falling along, let's add a new layer to our image. So we're gonna click the New Layer button. Nobody want to right click the Text icon in the Tools Panel. And the one that we want is the Horizontal Type mass tool, which is the last option of the men here. So we'll click that. And before we type, that's changed our fun size and we want to fund size a little bit bigger, maybe about 60 or so. So we'll choose 60 for the list. So now let's click on the bottom left corner of our image. That's type 805552222. And once we've typed our textbook, committed to by clicking the little Commit button, the Options bar. So now we've created our selection. Now let's apply a fill color to our selection. So we'll start by clicking the foreground color icon on the toolbar to display the color picker. And I think I'll want a red color. Sort of the RGB boxes will type in 255 of the R box. Press the Tab key type 0 because the tab again and 0. Now we'll click OK and we're going to fill this selection by using our paint bucket tool. So a right-click the page bucket icon here and choose Page Bucket tool from the menu. And yet you could also tap the G key on your keyboard to activate this group of tools. And now we just need to click anywhere on our selections. So a click the zeros here, and that applied that red color fill to the entire selection. So now let's activate the move toward or tools panel. We wanna drag our selection until it's centered on the bottom of the page, maybe like so. And I think I want to modify the capacity of this event. So they're layers parallel again with that later still selected, I'm going to click the capacity drop-down list. Let's drag the slider to the left. It's cope up 35%. And now Let's de-select our selection to get an idea of what it looks like sort shrews select the select for the medium. And there is the result of our Horizontal Type Mask tool. 95. Adding Layer Styles: Layer's styles allow you to add special effects here, layers that can be applied to regular layers and type layers, but two dots to background layers. And we're all their effects are applied using the Layer Style dialogue. I do this play. You click the little fx icon at the bottom of the layers panel. So you can see all the different options that we have. Bevel and unbiased stroke, inner shadow, Inner Glow, sat and et cetera. So using layers, stars, you could really create some interesting effects. And each of these Layer Styles has its own settings. For instance, the bevel and embossed setting. You can select a bevels style inner, outer emboss, Pilgrim boss, stroke and bars. You can modify the size, the softness. We see all of these different options available to us here. Once you add a Layer Style 12 Blair, a list of all the styles that are applied to that layer display under that layer name, under the name of the layer in the layers panel. So you can modify that effectively timed simply by double-clicking on the Layer Style and that will display the dialogue box for that particular layer. So I'm going to cancel what I just did by choosing I edit undo for pneumonia. And we're going to work on this together. Silver falling along. You want to click the wild web designs layer in the layers panel. Then we want to take the Agile Layer Style icon, if you recall, that's the little effects icon. So I'll click on that and we're going to choose the bevel and embossed style from the list. And that displays that delayers style dialogue. So now let's click the style drop-down list and we're going to add an outer bevel styles or choose ultra bevel from the menu. And let's change the depth of this slider as well. Let's go, let's go all the way to about 600 and we'll change the sizes. Well, maybe we'll just go about 1010 pixels for this size. And I think though about it does it, so I'll click okay. So we can see the beveling and bus Layer Style as applied to our text layer here. So now let's click the layer with the telephone number and my, and my layers. Layer five, you can see the little telephone number at the bottom of the layer thumbnail. You're sorry, no, that that's a layer we weren't. And it'll click the i layer style budget again. And this time I'm going to choose drop shadow, which also displays a layer style dialogue. And that's during the past, the slider to the right, let's go all the way to a 100% on a really intense shadow to this layer. And that's double click in this red box here. And we're gonna type in 50. That will increase the site of the spread to 50%. And that's the spirit of the shadow and that about does it so uptake. Okay, so now let's click the arrow on the far right of the wild web designs layer in the layers panel, that's the little arrow right over here to the right to the words FX. We see that once we do, that hides the layer effects for that layer, but the effects are still applied. Everybody to turn off the effects, we would click the little icon, the visibility icon. Now we could see those layer effects are no longer applied to their Leo. And I click the little visibility box and it's hard to see, but it's raising it to the left of the word effects. So we'll click on that and the effects are reapplied to that layer. So let's double-click the bivalent emboss layer here under wild web designs and then displays a layer style dialogue from where we can modify that layer. So we wanted to make any additional changes to the layer. I could do so then click OK. But you know, I don't think I like a drop shadow effect, tried telephone number, so I'm going to remove that. So to do so, just click on the effect and then drag it to the trash can. So we'll do that. And the dark shadow effect is no longer applied to that layer and has been removed from our Layers panel. So again, experiment a little bit with the layers towers. You can add some really unique effects to your designs. 96. Understanding Filters: In the next several videos, we're going to be working with filters. And filters allow you to enhance your images with special effects, including artistic affects, others texture affects borough effects. I'm distortion effects. There are nearly, I think about a 100 different filters with which you could experiment. But we will only be able to uncover one or two filters or each filter group. Otherwise, there'll be tons of videos. The best way to learn what each filter does is to try out different ones. So don't be afraid to experiment. Can always use the I edit undo command to remove the last filter that you applied, as well as Delete filters states from the history panel. So filters are found are the filter menu and outside right, this menu here, an individual filters are categorized into groups. So next to each group is a right printing disclosure triangle, right pointing arrow that indicates a sub-menu. And each filter category has at least two individual filters in that group. So here we have the noise group, pixelate group, the render group, et cetera. So if you look in the blurred category that yours like 14 filters in this category alone. Now when working with filters, you can apply a filter to only a portion of your image by first making a selection around the area to which you want to apply a filter, and then choosing the filter from the menu. And that filter will only be applied to that selected area. Now if no selection is made in a filter that you choose will be applied to the entire image. And many filters will allow a preview before applying it to the image. Now the last filter you worked with will appear on the filter menu in the first position. So let's set played a blur filter to this, just this selective areas. Let's do print a blur. I will just choose calcium Blurb. And here we can see a preview of the filter. And most filter do provide a preview of what it will look like with that filter applied. So if we click OK, because he'd now that the filter has been applied to that selection. So the last filter we worked with this play in the first position of the filter menu. So you can quickly apply that filter again. We see that as also our keyboard shortcut or you can use rather than clicking in the filter menu. So let's not do that. So attempt Command or Control Z. And by the way, if you'd like to follow along, we're working with the image named that GMF and thus a JPEG image that's located and the lesson files folder on your desktop. Now, many of the more artistic filters can be found in the filter gallery. So you click on filter and then click filter gallery in the menu. So again, we have groups of filters. Everybody look at brushstrokes, for instance, may take that disclosure triangle to the right of the group and then click on the filter. And a temporarily applies that filter to the image in the preview window here circuit, good idea of what it will look like. But we're going to be working with the filter gallery in much more detail in upcoming videos. So we're just going to cancel out of here. So I'll click the cancel button. Sorry for falling alignments. Do this together and we're gonna open the filter gallery again. So we'll choose filter, filter gallery from the menu. And that's the spray, the filters in the artistic category. So click the right pointing disclosure triangle to the left of the artistic folder. And let's click on the dry brush folder. So I'll click on that because see a preview of that filter applied to the image militia. You could also modify the settings for their filters and the brush size can indeed brush detail. And notice that the image adjusts as I drag these sliders or texture. But I think what is leave this iss is, and then we'll click OK. And that applies the filter to this image. Now note that applied filters is a destructive edits. We just applied that filter directly to my background image. So typically whenever I play around with filters, I always create a layer and apply the filters to that layer so that way the energy is non-destructive. So let's undo this. So we'll choose Edit, Undo filter gallery from the menu that reverses the last action and removing the filter. 97. Artistic Filters: Artistic filters allow you to modify your image so that it looks like a hand painted or hand-drawn image, for example. And let's take a look at some of these filters here. So we'll click on filter and we wanna click our filter gallery, not the first filter gallery because that will imply the effect that we used for the filter that we used last time in the filter gallery, we want to display the gallery itself. So we choose filter gallery from the menu here, so that artistic filters here. The first filter is colored pencil. So it's kind of applies a drawing and look to your image like a bizarre drawn with a pencil. Whereas the dry brush filter applies a painted effect to your image. Now that are interesting, what is the plastic wrap filter which kind of applies an interesting highlighting effect to the image. Or each artistic filter, as we mentioned in a previous video, allows you to customize the filter effects via sliders are radio buttons and textboxes from the dialogue here in the right pane. So for instance, the dry brush filter allows you to set a brush size, brush detail, and texture by adjusting this slider values. So I'm going to cancel out of here. We're going to work on this together if you're following along. And again, it was to work with that same image for G, M, F naught, a JPEG image that we worked with in the last video. So the first thing you want to do, sums are going to be playing around with filters is to create a new layer so that any changes that we make are non-destructive. So we about to press the commanded Jacque Cousteau combination if using a Mac or Control j if using a Windows, and that duplicates the Background layer. Let's double-click on the word letter one here I'm gonna type in my filter and tap. We turned around to her. So now they'll be making any changes to the filter rather than to our original image. Now we want to click on Filter and we want to choose filter gallery. And let's click on dry brush. And that's the third filter, the top row here. And let's decrease the bras sizes go through about a wide width emerge sites. So it's a more subtle effect and love joy, the details slider lab believer does middleware just go up to nine and we want to ensure the texture is set to one and for lizard, but we'll kick it the texture box in type one. And then we'll click OK. And now that filter has been applied to our imagery. We can always hide the filter effects by clicking the visibility icon to turn it off. So now we're just seeing the Background layer will click the little visibility box again, redisplay the filter. And I think we're going to be done with this image for the time being sold. Choose File Close from the menu and we'll save our changes and then click Save. So the next video we're going to work with the blur filters. 98. Blur Filters: In this video, we're going to work with the blur filters in Photoshop. And blur filters reduce the amount of detail in an image, providing an auto-focus camera effect. Filters can be used to softened images or distort contents. And the basic blur filter, a pies a mile blur to an image. So if I choose filter blur, blur, you can see you play. It provides a very light blur to the image. To add more blur, choose filter. Blur, blur more from the gallery that provides an additional amount of blur to the image. For more control over the amount of blurry could use the Gaussian blur with filter, which is a favorite of many people. And then he was the radius slavery to control the amount of blur. So let me, I'll do these last two are blurred selections here, what she was Filter Blur, Gaussian Blur. And here we see we have the radius slider. And I can adjust the amount of blur to a mile blurred too, just a little blur. And again, you can move around on different areas of your preview window to see what it will look like. So it'll cancel out of this. If you want to make objects appear as though they are movie QU is motion blur, filter blur, motion blur. Or you could also use the radial blur to create kind of a swirling effect, radio blur. So this can create some interesting effects on your image. And now you probably would use a selection with this and maybe apply that blurred to just a selection. Now another interesting filter is the lens blur. And this allows you to adjust the blur and an image so that objects become fuzzier as their distance from the central focus point increases. So some objects stay in focus while others become blurred. So let's cancel out of here. There is also the box blurred. This is similar to the Gaussian br, except that it leaves more of an edge when working with high contrast images with distinct edges. Again, you can modify the pixel radius of the blurb. So again, with a lot of these, you want to play around and find the perfect blur for you. I typically tend to use a Gaussian blur when I'm blurring, but sometimes delve into some of these other filters as well. These other bluer filters as well, especially some of the more recent was ever added. And those are located on the Blur Gallery. So to access every choose filter, Blur Gallery for the menu. And there are five filters in this Galleria. And I will use these quite often when any of these Blur filters are activated, the blurred tools pane displays on the right side of your screen. So if I click on field blur here, we see the bird tools pane here, the right side of our screen. This contains settings for each of those five blurs styles to just spend a settings for us. Dot click of the disclosure triangle to the left of the style name and that displays the settings for that particular style. Now one thing to be aware of with these styles is that you cannot use a smart filter with them. That's to say they are destructive blur style. So you wanted to duplicate your layer before adding any of these filters. So let's take a look at these a little bit more depth. I'm going to uncheck the checkbox and knows that checkbox toggles the display of that border styles. So right now I've removed the burst off from this image. So let's take a look at field blur first. This makes it easy to just blur specific areas of your image by adding pins to those areas that you want to blur. So if I, let me drink this pin over to the right here. So if I click over here and then drag the pin, I could onblur this area from my image while keeping this particular area blurred, using the Bohr study can modify the amount of Earth. So you can either click a dreg in the pin are used to blur slider tool, Heidi amount to blurb. So let's uncheck this box and let's take a look at Iris Blur. Next was his does is creates a circular blurb which you can modify to change the shape of the circle to make it more rectangular if you want. And again, you're blurring everything outside of this circle. So again, if I wanted to blow everything except for this car here, can also rearrange that circle by clicking inside it is dragging. Let me bring this down just a little bit, a little bit to the right. So now I'm blurring everything outside except for his car. So again, this all depends on what kind of effect that you want to attain. So let's uncheck the checkbox next to this one and we'll take a look at the tilt shift blurred next. So with tilt shift more UDL and blur into specific areas. And you can click and drag these dotted lines here to modify the reach of the blur. And again, as we click a DRE, we can see the blur amount less than r increase as I'm dragging. You can also add additional pins to specific areas of the image to modify the location where the blur is taking place. So let's uncheck this and let's move on to Plath blur paths, blurry, you could create motion blur along paths. So for the path planner drop-down list, you first choose whether to you is basic blur or rear sync flash. But what we're seeing flash does is simulates the effects of a flash fired at the end of an exposure. So as we can see, that creates a quite an interesting effect. Or choose basic blur identity. Just drink the path on your image along which you want to create the motion blur. You can then adjust the speed slider here, specify the amount of path blur or the taper slider, which allows you to gradually taper off the blur and the last blurred, the Blur Gallery is this spin blur. Let me uncheck cup half per year. Spin blurs or radial blur that allows you to rotate a blur the image or gone to one or more points. So the one of his van to be blurred. I couldn't drag and modify the circle again, quadrillion the sizing handles. And I could drag a second pin to add another blurred for this image. So you could add one other one of these spin blur pins to your image. So click on this pin to activate it and then I can reduce or increase how much blur I want to add again by dragging the pin or trigger the blur angle slider. So I wanted to spend a little bit extra time on these blurs in the board Gallery. Because many people really liked them and they allow you to add some really interesting blur effects. And to many different areas of your image at the same time. So it's working this together. So I'm going to cancel out over here. And we're working with the image named cars. And that's a JPEG image located at the list of files folder on your desktop. So first of all, there's duplicate this background layer here. So we'll tap commodity if using a Mac or Control j if using a Windows. But it makes sure that layer is selected. So let's choose Filter Blur, Gaussian Blur for the menu. And then it plays a Gaussian blur to our image, again as a plane down to the entire image. So let's drink the radius slider to the left. We just want a mile to blur, maybe about two pixels or so. And it looks like, okay, now I want to create a snapshot of this image. States will choose window history from the menu. And from here we'll click the, create a new snapshot icon. And that creates a new snapshot here at this snapshot one. So we'll click on the cars J peg and that's steady original state of the image. And this time we're going to add a box blur. So let's choose filter blur, box blur from the menu. And that's don't click the radius box and type into that. We'll click OK. And that applies a box virtual image. So let's go back to that snapshot one state, and that was our Gaussian blur. So it's kinda fun about these snapshots states is that you could go back and forth between them and then choose the one that you liked the best. We can see a subtle difference between the bogs blurred in the Gaussian blur, the edges are a little bit more preserved when using the box blur. So I'm going to clear the history states except for the snapshots from a tricky little history flyout menu and then choose Clear History. So now only our original image unless snapshot there'll be saved remains. So let's return to the original state of the image. So we'll click cars down to JP in our history panel. Ever want to do now is just apply the blur to a portion of our image. So we went to activate the bar key tools by tapping the ever key on your keyboard. And we want the rectangular marquee tool That's not selected here. The tools parenting when I right-click the group of icons and choose rectangular marquee tool. And let's draw a selection around the closest for cars, around these four vehicles rate here. So I release my mouse button and now it's a PI of blur to that section. So which was Filter Blur. And we're going to apply a motion blur which gives the impression of movement. So we'll choose that everybody was sent their distance slider. Let's set it to about 12, I think. And we can see in our preview renewal locked to that filter will look like. So let's click OK. Then we'll deselect our selection of maturity, select, de-select. The Getty could also Command or Control D. So there's our blur filter. So with our rectangular marquee tool still active, that's drag a selection around the words prescription and Walgreens. He's two words or draw little selection around those. And we'll apply a blurred to this selections which was Filter Blur, lens blur from the menu. And this displays the lens blur dialogue. And where we want to do is invert the selection so that the filter is applied to everything except the area that we have selected. And this is a good way to display the effect of one focused object. So we're gonna click the inverted check box and then click okay, so now we can see that the only thing in focus is the prescription and Walgreens words here. But we went to undo that. So we'll choose Edit, Undo lens blur from the menu. And let's choose, select or deselect from ammonia. Now let's click that first stated the History panel and cars dot JPEG, which is the initial state of the image when he opened it. And we're going to add one of those filters from the Blur Gallery. So I'm gonna choose Filter Blur Gallery and that's Click on tilt shift blur. So that immediately expands the tilt shift blur panel and the blurred tools pain. And that's drink the blurred to the left two about Ted pixels or so. And we're going to click on the center pin here, the center of the center pin, and then went to drag upwards, maybe about an inch just to see that the effect of the blur, the reach nobler about change as I drag, we're going to drag it to maybe about there. And I want to click on the line above the pins. So this line right here, which is the one dot above the pin, we're going to click on the line and then break upwards. And again, that modifies the reach of the blur, tsunami only blurring, they're very upper portion of the image and then the lower portion of the image. And here I can modify the intensity of the blurred by dragging the ring to the left or right. Notice the blur slider move in the panel as I drag as well. So again, you can use either the blurry or slider or drag or the pin. So I think we're done with this. Let's click OK. And that's clauses. Image would choose file close for the band you. And what the heck, we'll save our changes. So I'll click Save. So that's using the blur of filters in Photoshop. 99. Brush Stroke Filters: It's a brushstroke filters transform your images using different brush and ink stroke affects so that your images end up looking like a brush painting. So if you're following along, we wanna open the image named of fruit, a dash, dash. And that's a JPEG image located less than Files folder under desktop. So let's work a little bit with these brushstroke filters and I see what they're all about. So this time rather than duplicating our layer, or we're going to do is convert our layer into a smart filter, which allows us to apply filters to our layer non-destructively. So to do so we choose filter convert for smart filters for the menu. And it tells us that this is going to be converted into a Smart Object and we'll click OK. Story can see a background layer has now converted into a smart filter, and we access the brushstroke filters from the filters gallery. So choose filter, filter gallery from the menu. And the brushstrokes filters are the sucker Guba filters in this panel. So we'll click the little disclosure triangle to expand it. And we can see that the names of the brushstroke filters designate their effects. So for instance, the angled strokes filter creates angle directional strokes in the image, whereas the crosshatch filter creates a simulated pencil hatching affect the splatter filter here replicates the effects of a splatter air brush. It's, let me undo all these. So what we want is the angled strokes filter. So that's this filter here. So what this does is this filter repaints the image using diagonals strokes. And again in the filters panel here we have some options that we can set those direction balanced stroke length and sharpness. So let's start by bona fides of direction balance. We went to drag to the left. So that is about how that's cool, about ten here in the box. And let's use the same value for the stroke length. So this tells us double-click and this stroke length box type in ten. And then the sharpest sparks will go above five. So during this ladder to about five and that about data. So we'll click OK. So that closes the dialogue and applies that filter tour image. And let's undo that. So we'll choose Edit, Undo filter gallery from the menu. And let's go back to the filter gallery again. So we'll choose filter. And yet we don't want the first option, but we want the opposite about a third of the list. So a filter gallery. This time let's apply that crosshatch filter. So again, you want to display the filters in the brushstrokes group and the cross hatches the top filters, the third filter in the top row, so I'll click on that. And for the stroke length that's gone about 14 someone to drag this up to about 14. Sharpness. And let's keep this at six and strength as bump up the strength a little bit nervous Hall intends to this gets as we move the slider to the right. But I just want to strengthen about 2C. So we just want to keep it kind of subtle here. And then we'll click OK. So that applies the crosshatch effect to our image. So you can see that really once we apply some of these filters to our image, they really take up the look of a brush painting. 100. Distort Filters: In this video, we're going to work with the distort filters. But before we do, I want to bring your attention to the layers panel here. And notice that because we converted this to a smart filter, the last filter that we applied to the gallery is listed underneath. So you could easily hide the effects of the filter from the image or delete their filter entirely. And actually we want to delete this filter because we're going to apply different filter. And we don't want this crosshatch filter applied any longer to this image. So we're gonna click on the words filter gallery. I'm going to drag it to the trash can. That removes that filter from legality. So that is start filters. What these do is geometrically distort an image, creating a 3D effect by squeezing and stretching areas of the image. And they're located on the filter menus. We choose filter to start on here all the distort filters that are available. So for example, the sphere eyes filter. What this does is creates kind of a 3D funhouse effect by warping the selection around a spherical shape. So if we do that, we can see the effects of this one. Top Command or Control Z to undo that. Another filter in this group is the ripple effect. This kinda provides the effect of viewing the image underwater. So you can see that all of the objects in this image are rippled. That's didn't do this one as well. To squeeze a selection, you can use the pinch filters. Let's do filter to start pinch. She had again, we can drag this slider so we're pinching outward or inward. So you can see how interesting the effects of somebody's filters are. Now filter that's especially welcome by photographers is the lens correction filter. And that's on the main filter menu. So he just click filter. And that filter is arrayed here, the lens correction filter. What this does is correct for several types of lens distortions, such as with the outer edges of your image appear to bend inward, which is called pin cushioning, or outward, which is barrel distortion from the center of the image. And this can also fix color fringes along the edges, which is called chromatic aberration, underexposure, overexposure along the edges of a photo, which is called referred to as Lens vignetting, as well as perspective distortion caused by the lens or the angle. So the lens correction dialog here contains many settings to help fix some of that distortion. So here under the correction area, click the check box next to the correction that you wanted to apply to the image, we see some additional options here, so you can choose the camera, make a camera model, and lens model as well. So let me cancel out of here. So if you're following along again, we're working without fruit dish, fruit to dash, dash. And I'm gonna choose filtered from the menu printed distort. And that's a pile ripple distortion to the zymogens or choose ripple for the menu. And here we have the ripple dialogue. Let's treat me amount tool right now, is that a 100%? Let's drag it to 200%. And we can see the preview wouldn't know what that will look like once it is applied so that it looks like okay, so there's a ripple effect. So let's tap Control or Command Z to undo that. So this time we're going to display the filter gallery sugar choose filter, filter gallery from the menu. We also have a distorted group here and the filter Googlers, let's expand that. We see we have three of them defuse a globe, glass and ocean rippled. So let's click the glass thumbnail. And this gives us the effect of displaying the image through glass. So let's keep this in its stores had set out five I think. And this moves us adopt a smoothness to about four, and then we'll click OK. So that's kind of an interesting effect. Let's undo that by pressing Command or Control Z. And this time there's plenty a troll effect to this or choose filter, prejudice start and let's choose twirl from the distorted by new. And that's drink up the angle slider. We can see the preview adjust as I drag it. That's what it's going to about one 25. And then we'll click okay, so that looks pretty interesting. So what we're gonna do now is work with the lens correction of a little bit. For that, we're going to open up another image. So I'm gonna choose file open from the menu. And the image that we wanted to his museum. So let's assume edge here and then we'll click open. Let's tap commander control plus to increase this, to increase the zoom level of this. So we can see that as images quite distorted. So what we're going to do is use lens correction to correct it. So we'll choose Filter Lens Correction from the menu, and I'm going to click on the custom tab here. This displays the lens correction custom settings. So this kind of distorted. So let's drink the removed distortion slider and that's drag that to the left. Let's go to about minus nine. Now under the transform area on string, the horizontal perspective slider, let's drag it to about plus three. What this does is widens the left edge of the image. So then we'll click OK. So you can see that that fixed the distortion in the image. Now let's choose filter, sharpen, and then click sharpen from the medium and his sharpens the image. And we're going to work more with the sharpening filters and then another video. So let's click file close from the menu item. I'm going to click Save and then click Save to save the image. And click OK. 101. Noise Filters: So noise filters in Photoshop add or remove gradient or noise from an image, allow you to create some unusual textures. So there's affect is created by adding pixels with randomly distributed color levels to the image. And the noise folders are located on the filter menu, printer noise. And here we have our noise filters here. So the adenoids filter allows you to choose the percentage of noise. So you enter the percentage of the amount box for drag the slider. And then we can see the image adjusting as we drag, distribute the noise along a bell-shaped curve for a speckled effect click guy that it'll Gaussian radio button here, we can see how that changes. So let me cancel out of here. So noise filters, they can be applied if an image appears to soft. Now the Dustin scratches filter removes noise by changing dissimilar pixels in the image, such as if you're working with a scanned photo with scratches. So yes uses a noise filters can create some interesting effects or remove unwanted noise. Speaking of removing unwanted noises also reduce noise. The bottom of the filter menu here, and what this does is helps you to improve the quality of your images by removing those unwanted artifacts, such as multicolored noise or noise that varies in brightness. If you're working with a JPEG files, you're able to remove JPEG compression artifacts, which is those pixel squares of appear as a result of saving files and JPEG format to median filter reduces noise in an image by blending the brightness of pixels within a selection, and I end up discarding pixels that differ too much from adjacent pixels. This filters especially handy for removing a motion effect in an image. Now I tend to do all my noise removal from either Lightroom or Adobe Camera Raw. I'm not sure if they do any better than the filters in Photoshop, but I mainly use Photoshop for adjusting images, adjusting those things that I cannot do in Lightroom or camera raw, sorry, I perform all my basic image adjustments in camera var length room, such as changing the brightness and contrast, brightness and darkness, et cetera, as well as applying noise reduction if necessary. But certainly play around with the both of them and use whichever produces the best results for you. So if a fallen along the left side, again, we're working with the fruit to dash dish image. Now let's click Filter, point to noise, and then click add noise from the menu. That is praised that add noise dialogue. So let's drink the amount slider to the right. Let's go to about, it's kind of about 40. And then we'll click OK. So he could see that that applied That Greeny, a colored grainy effect to the image. So let's undo this adjustments. So what she was Edit, Undo itineraries, stellate shoes filter noise. And we'll choose reduce noise from the menu. So let's enter 0 in the sharpened details box. I will enter three in the preserved details box. Now visit image suffered from noise it could drag to the right to increase the strength of noise reduction. Or if Remus suffers from colored noise because raid the reduce colored noise flutter to the right or left. So get them on a play with these sliders until the ideal affect is attained. He may need to also crank up the preserve details later after you adjust normally after you reduce noise. Because one downside of using the reduced noise filter is it can increase softening in your image. So the preserve details can help reduce some of that softening and preserve those edges. So I'm just gonna click cancel here and we're going to close this image. I'm gonna choose file close for the menu and we're not going to save any changes. So we'll choose don't save. 102. PIxelate Filters: So this is just a quick little video in which we're going to take a look at the pixelate filters. But these allow you to do is sharply defined. A selection in your image by segregating error is of the image into solid colors shapes. This is done by clumping pixels of similar color values in the cells. So ticket the filter menu imprint depict slave, we see all the available pixelate filters, some crystallize filter. What this will do is Tom pixels together in polygonal shapes. The fragment filter produces the effect of someone moving their hand just as a photo was snapped, kind of producing a blurred image. So basically these filters allow you to restore definition to images or simply creates some interesting visual effects. So you can just play around, attempt to see the one such who like silver falling along. We're working with the image named squirrel dot PSD. That's a Photoshop document located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So let's play around a little bit with these pixelated filters. So we're going to choose filter, printed pixelate, and that start with Fragment. Sorry, you can see this kind of creates a blurred photo effect. Let's not do this, which was added to undo frame and we'll click Filter again, point to pixelate. This time, let's choose crystallize. And this displays the crystallize Datalog for where we can specify the cell size for the Filter. Double-click into South size box here, but we're going to type in 20. That increases the cell size and then we'll click OK. And so we can see the effect of this filter. Again, you can play around with the cell size to two. You find all look alike. So let's not do this. So we'll choose edu.duke crystallize from their menu. So yes, using the pixelate filters, you can create some quite interesting effects. 103. Render Filters: So render filters there a fun group of filters in that they allow you to create 3D shapes, different cloud patterns, simulated lens flare effects, and various light reflections in an image. Strangely enough, the render filters all seem unrelated. The loop counter, the filter menu, render, sorry, all seem very different from one another. And with you is you could do everything from critical woven fiber effects to adding a cloud background. So the fibrous filter with tears, you could create a look of woven fibers using the foreground and background colors. The clouds are the difference. Clouds filters allow you to create cloud patterns and are great for designing quite interesting backgrounds. The lens flare filter simulates the glare effects that's created when the sun hits the lens of your camera and the lighting effects. What this does is allows you to produce a plethora of lighting effects in different areas of your image. You can create several videos just some year lighting effects filter alone. So let's play around with this a little bit. Oh, I'm thinking about I mentioned if by some choices render filters are grayed out, what you need to do is go into Photoshop preferences. So choose Photoshop provinces of using a Mac rat and preferences. If using Windows, then we wanna click on performance. And you'll want to ensure that the US graphics processor checkboxes checked. You'll also wanted to go into image, print him mode, and you want to ensure that the RGB color is selected as well as 8-bits channel. So let's work on this together a little bit and we're going to work in a different image. So good. She was file open from the menu and B 13 images, neighbors, squirrel, filter dot PSD. So we'll select that. And again, that's located less than Files folder on your desktop and it looks like open. Should we want to apply this filter to our background layer? So we'll select the background layer in the layers panel. The first thing we wanna do is change our foreground color. So I'll click the foreground colors square in the Tools Panel. And she want to type in the following RGB values in the RGB boxes. So for rebel wide 102 and will tempt the tab key to move to the green box, will tape it to o far. And in the blue box we'll type in 255, and then we'll click OK. So that changes are forgot culture kinda light-blue color. And you went to ensure that the background color is set to whites or if it's not. So you'll want to type in 255 and each of the RGB boxes. So now that we've set our foreground and background color, let's apply the clouds filter. So choose filter, printer render, and then will choose clause from the random menu that applied the clouds filter to the Background layer. So we're going to apply another render filter, but for that we are going to apply it to the squirrel later sued, but a sludge without layer, the Layers panel. They will choose filter point to render. And this time we're going to use the lighting effects filters. So we'll click on that. Now let's click the Presets drop TO list on the Options bar. You may have there drag up to display all the options. And we want the flashlight defects. So a select to that. This selects flashlight as the lifestyle. Because either we could drag this around if you want to bring out different errors every image. So illustrating this upward, maybe about a quarter inch, maybe just, just like so. And now let's kick up the white dot in the center or an image, and that's trig that sorts just to the left of this squirrel's eye here. So maybe we just like that. So drinking the central data allows us to reposition the location of the light on the image. You can also modify the intensity of the light by clicking on the adjustment ring and then drag it to the left or right. And we can see me lighten or darken the amount. The filter. Let's drag it to about 54. So again, you can move it to a different area of your image. And that's a little bit too bright, so let's drag it down. Let's go to about 45, kinda like that. So once you've made all your desires settings to the filter that we click OK to commit our changes. So let's save our file that we're gonna see that with a different name. So we'll choose File Save As for the menu. And we're going to name this my underscore squirrel, not PSD. Wanna make sure that Photoshop is displayed in a format to drop down list and it will click Save and click OK. And I think we're done with this or choose file close from the menu. 104. Sharpen Filters: In this video, we're gonna take a look at the sharpen filters. And these filters allow you to enhance the details of images by increasing the focus of the blurry areas in a photo. These filters worked by increasing the contrast between the adjacent pixels. So if you're following along, we're working with the imageData blurry underscore man, and that's how JPEG image and again located that us to files folder under desktop. Now let's click Filter pride to sharpen. And this displays all of the available sharpen filters that we have in Photoshop. So the sharper edges filters only sharpens the edges of an image, thus preserving the overall smoothness. Neither the sharper, norther, sharp edges have any settings that you can set. Ticking on either of them will automatically just apply the sharpening effect to the image. If we're not more shepherding, you click a sharper more option in the menu. If we wanted to adjust the contrast of the edge detail producing are lighter and darker liner each set of the edge, try playing around with the unsharp mask. So from the sharpening menu, let's choose sharpen from the menu. So we can see that the image pops a lot more than a dead. So as I image is still kind of blurry, let's apply that filter again. So which was filter sharpen as sharpen again and then again that produces additional sharpening. So let's undo these changes. So hold down the Command Z keystroke combination. If you're using a Mac or Control Z if using a window, but go back two steps. Well, clickers sharpen again, printer sharper, and this time let's try the sharper and more. And this produces a little extra Sharpening to her image. So let's save our documents. So choose File, Save for them. So I'm gonna do now is save a snapshot of the current state of this image. So to do so we need to display the history panel. So choose window history for the menu. So next we click the Create Snapshot button. Anime creates a snapshot of the current state of this image. So let's return to the original state of his image when we first opened it. So I'll click open and the history menu. And this removes the history of our actions. If you want additional control over the level of sharpening and your photo, photoshops. Smarter sharpen filter is worth experimenting with. So we choose filter, sharpen and then Smart sharpen. This displays a smart sharpen dialogue. So this filter with its huge array of options, gives you more control over their sharpening process. For instance, if you want to increase the contrast between the edge pixels, making edges more pronounced and easier to see than he would increase the value of the amount slider here. So to the right for more sharpening and Greg did a left for Nash sharpening. The radius slider allows you to specify how wide the area will be surrounding the edge pixels that the amounts setting is correctly. Can also choose the type of sharpening that you want to apply. Removed route TO list here we have a couple of options. If your eye image is blurred due to camera or subject movement, try motion blur to remedy that. Selects a lens blur to produce effects similar to the unsharp mask filter or our Gaussian Blur, which have escaped to cancel out of here. If you click on the disclosure triangle next to shadows are the highlights. We see several different shadows and highlights options that you can set. These all you to determine the strength of the sharpening apply to the different areas of your image. So once you experiment a bit with the various centers of this filter, you'll no doubt prefer it's for the sharper, sharper and more filters. I typically would turn to smart sharpen before I would use the regular sharpener, sharper and more filters. Let's take the disclosure triangle next to shadows, to collapses area. And we want to ensure that the lens blurring displayed in the removed drop-down list. So click the drop down arrow and choose lemons birth from the west and the Amount box. Let's drag this to the left. Let's go to a baby about 150 tours. So now we'll expand out shuttles and highlights area again. And under the highlights Syria, let's type in 80 and the fade amount box. And we wanted to ensure that 50 is set to the total width box. And let's do 50 in the radius box as well. That will take okay, so to click on snapshot one, we could compare it to the smart sharper and with the regular sharper filter that we apply. So sharpen filter, smart sharpen, so a little bit different. If you wanted to bring out the detail deliberate mar, you go back into the smart sharpen dialogue and adjust those settings until the image looks the way the 21x, Of course, when you have an image, this blurry, Yeah, there's only so much that you can do with it. So that's usually they're sharpen filters in Photoshop. 105. Shake Reduction Filter: In this video, we're gonna take a look at the shake reduction filter. And shake occurs if you're shooting in to law of light are if the exposure settings on your camera is incorrect, when this occurs, part of your image will appear blurry. But shake reduction filter does, is analyzes the blur and attempts to get rid of some of the goals team to apply shake reduction, which was filter, point to sharpen. Then choose shake reduction from the menu. That's the first option here there's sharpen menu. And Photoshop will automatically apply the filter to the areas of your image. Now if you want to apply filter to specific areas of your image, I expand the advanced area here if it's not expanded. And then draw bony box around the area that you want to be corrected through Dropbox or One is for trials, we can see that it's instantly sharper. Can also play around with some of these settings up here, the blurred trace bounces a source noise artefacts suppression until the image looks the way that you want. This feature to shake reduction to future works best with well-lit images with minimal noise. So let's work on this together. So I'm gonna cancel with here. And if you're following along or working on the image named foot to underscore trails. And that's a JPEG file, again, located and less than Files folder on your desktop. The first thing we're going to do is convert this to a smart filter so that we can apply our filter non-destructively to the image. We're going to learn more about smart filters in another video, a phenomenal choose filtered from the menu and then convert for smart filters that it will take. Ok. Now let's apply the year shake reduction filters. So we'll choose filter. Again, printer sharpen. And then she was shake reduction for the menu. So if you have vast areas and displayed, you want to place the right part of the disclosure triangle to display it. We wanted to ensure that the blur estimation tool executive and that's just tool though there's a left panel here and that's the topmost tool, this panel, as you can see, we can also tap the Iike and our keyboard to activate it. Let's draw bounding boxes around that for trails sign. And let's create a second blur as to mission area. So I'm going to draw another bounding box around this leftmost sign here, so we'll select that. And that created a tool blur estimation boxes on our image. So I think that about does it for Shake Reduction here, so I'll click. Okay. So now it's tough the Z key and our keyboard to activate the zoom tool, I'm going to click at the foot trails sign twice here. Just so we can zoom in a bit of the history LBL, Is it open? You wanna choose window history for the menu. And we're going to click the original state of the image. So this is before the filter, and this is after the filters. So we can see that it did a pretty good job of removing some of that shake blur from our photo. So yes, if we showed an image in too low of a light or you edit about moving while you were taking an image, tried to shake reduction filter to CO that will take care of it. So that's closest image. So we'll choose file close for the menu and we'll save our changes. 106. Sketch Filters: Sketch filters at outlining and texture to your photos, often creating kind of a 3D effect. For instance, the charcoal filter mixture image appear as though it were sketched with charcoal on a canvas. Many other sketch filters used the foreground and background colors for their effects. So changing either the foreground and background color changes the effects of the filter. And to access the sketch filters, you choose filter, filter gallery for their menu and they're located in the gallery. And this gets filters are right here. So click on the word sketch to expand this category, display all of the available sketch filters. So let's work on this together. So revival logo working with the image name sketch and after JPEG image, and it's located that that's an files folder on your desktop. And what we're going to do is create a sketch using red as the foreground color and white is the background color. So we're gonna click the foregrounds color square here in the Tools Panel. I'm going to set up foreground color to RGB red. So we wanted to Type 255 in the red box to have the Tab key, keyboard 0 in the green box and 0 in the blue box. That looks like OK. Next we went to set a backward color to white, so I'll click the background color square, then B type in 255 in the box, 255 and then a green box and 255 in a blue box. Then click OK. Now we'll display the filter gallery by choosing filter, filter gallery from the menu. And I'll click on the word sketch to extend the sketch category. And let's start with the photocopies sketch. So a selectors that. So we see a couple of things here. We see the filter automatically applied to our image in the preview window here, we also have some settings that we can set the right pane in detail and darkness. So let's trigger Detail slider to the right a little bit. Maybe let's go up to him to about 15 and we can see that for detail is enhanced. So the higher the detail, the more of the detail that comes through the doctor slider sets the darkness or lightness of the sketch. And I said we wanted to be maybe about seven or so, not too light but not too dark. Take okay, so now the photocopy sketch filter has been applied to our image. Let's take a look at a different filter. So we'll choose Edit, Undo filter gallery for them and you, this reverses that last action, thus removing the photocopy filter from the image. This tablets at the foreground color to black. So I'll click on the foreground color square. So to set the foreground color to black, u was 0 to be in each of the RGB boxes. So tapered 0 in the R box and make sure that zeros in the green box and the blue box is 0 as well. And then we'll click okay. So now our foreground color is set to black, so they're not choose filter, filter gallery from the menu. We don't want to click the first option, Americans, what this will do pi that photocopy filtering can, but we just wanted to display the basic filter gallery. So can choose a different filter, so would choose filter gallery for them. And this time we're going to apply our charcoal filters or click charcoal in the sketch menu. Let's increase the fitness of this a little bit. Let's go to five, the year charcoal thickness details that we'll leave this all the way is set to five as well. And that's increased from light to dark balance of this maybe let's go to about 80, none of our deserts. So then we'll click OK to apply the filter to our image. So those are the sketch filters in Photoshop. 107. Stylize Filters: The stylize filters allow you to produce a painted or impressionistic artistic effect. Here photos and those are located off this stylized sub-menu and the filter menu. So there are several interesting filters. Here are the Find Edges filter locates the edges of your image. I can create an interesting pencil sketch effect. The wind filter creates small horizontal lines which simulate a wind effect similar to the motion blur filter that we worked with in an earlier video. Use the boss or the solarized filters to create some visually interesting effects. If you want to give a three-dimensional texture to a selection or a layer, try given the extrude filter or try, there's also one additional stylize filter that's not available on the menu, but you can access it from the filter gallery. And that is the glowing edges effect. Or there's does, is applies a neon glow to the edges of your image. I'm going to cancel out and let me cancel out of here. And we're going to go back to the original state of this image to display the history panel of if it's not already displayed, we're going to click Open in the History power to return to the original state of this imagery. That's not sketch dot JPEG, which is we worked with in the last video. So let's start by applying the wind filter to this, we'll choose filter, stylize, and then will choose wind. And there's displays the wind dialogue from where we can set the method as the direction of the wind that's choose blast for the method area. So select that radio button and you can see a preview of the image without filter applied. And I think we'll click OK. And that applies the filter to the image. So let's undo this. So we're tapped Command Z if using a Mac or Control Z if using Windows, there's topple going to go into the filter gallery. So we'll choose filter, filter gallery for the menu. We want to apply that glowing edges us stylize effect. So we'll click the stylized group here and then click glowing edges are because see this creates quite an interesting effects tour image. But let's modify some of the settings over here of the rights paid sorta, make sure the edge width is set to two. Let's increase the brightness of this a little bit. We can see as we drink to the right, the brightness increases will go though nine, let's increase the smoothness of this too. So it's not quite so sharp. Maybe about seven or SOP and looks like okay. And then applies that filter to our image, sorts of pi, another filter, but this time we're going to apply it over the existing filter. So we'll choose folder for the menu part to stylize. And let's apply the solarized filter to this. So what this will do is a blend on negative and positive image, similar to the effect that you would receive if film was exposed to sunlight during developing. So we'll click on solar eyes. That filter was applied over that glowing edges folder, but it's kind of dark. So let's light this up a little bit. So we'll choose Image auto contrast from the menu. And this applies the auto contrast adjustments to the image, which kind of brightens it up. So as we can see, we append this filter directly to our background image. In most cases I wouldn't do that. I would usually create a duplicate of a layer before applying filters to it or convert an image to a smart filter. But we're fight with what we've done. So choose file close for the menu and we'll save our changes. 108. Texture Filters: In this video, we're gonna be working with texture filters. So for falling alive, we're working with image named wet Dao Shu bear. And that's a Photoshop document located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. And texture filters are accessible from the filter gallery. So we'll choose filter, filter gallery from the menu. And the texture filters. Is this a last category of filters in the gallery? What these do is produce an effect of depth or substance to your image. And now we can see several available texture filters here, the crack hilar grain mosaic tiles, stained glass, and texture riser. So using these filters you can apply a lot of tiny cracks. Broken tiles are stained glass to an image or various surfaces such as brick and burlap, sandstone or canvas. As with most of the filters in the filters gallery, each texture filter has its own dialog box from which you can customize the filters effects. So let's apply the texture riser filter to this image. So we'll click texture riser in the texture category. So now let's click the texture drop-down list and we have a couple of options here, brick, burlap, canvas or sandstone. We want as brick. So it looks like brick for them in you. And I do want to ensure that 100% is said to this scaling box. Let's double-click on the relief box here and type in five And the relief setting adjust the depth of the textures surface. So I think that'll do it for this. So we'll click OK. So the latest pellets click the background layer and we're going to apply another texture filter to this layer. So we'll choose filter. I don't use filter gallery again, not the top one, not the first one, but the fourth one down on the menu here. This tab, we're gonna apply the Greg filters or sludge of grain in the texture category. And we wanted to set the intensity. I think when we reduce the intensity of this, It's not a Bora, subtle effects that are good, about 25 for the intensity. And I'm going to reduce the contrast as well, and we'll set the contrast. Hell, that's cool. About 25 again. So 25 for both the contrast and the intensity. Next, we want to choose the grade types of eclipse, the grade type drop-down list. And let's go with contrast D. So we'll select that and then we'll pick ok. So the green filter has been applied to the Background layer of this image. So again, the texture filters collage some interesting looks to your image. 109. Photo Filters: In this video, we're gonna take a look at photoshops of photo filters, but they're not located in the filter menu, but rather you choose image 0.2 adjustments and then photo filter from the menu. So what these do is imitate the technique of putting a colored filter in front of the camera lens. This enables you to adjust the color balance and temperature of the photo. With photo filters, you can duplicate the effects of the 8185 third-party warming filters, the 8082 cooling filters, as well as many of the other solid color filters. You can also choose a colour present to adjust the hue of the image. And if we wanted to apply a custom color, you click the color box like I just did, and then select the desired color from the color picker. So if you're falling alive, we're working with that image and M2 yellow dash flour that's located the lesson files folder on your desktop. And then will choose image, two adjustments and then choose photo filter for the menu. We wanna click the drop-down list Harry wanted choose the warming filter 85, and this makes the image colors warmer to compensate for the higher colour temperature of the ambient light, let's increase the amount of colour applied to the image. So to do so, I'm going to drink the Density slider to the right, and that's got to about 45. Instead, let's apply a cooling filter to this image. So I'll click the filter drop-down list. And this time let's go for the cooling filter 82. So we can see this makes the image much bluer, much cooler, Spotify the density of this, so it's not quite so intense. Let's go about 15 now. Aren't you happy? We'll click OK. So you can take a look at the before and after this image by clicking the yellow flower state of the history panel, stable refers over the image and then with the photo filter applied so we can see there's a little cooling effect applied to our image. So yes, if you want to modify the color balance and temperature re-image, tried giving photoshops, photo filters or tribe. 110. Liquify Tools: Now we're going to look at photoshops, liquefy tools. Those are located off the filter value, such as filter liquefy from the menu. And with these tools, you can radically warped areas of your image, creating a melting effect. So you can push, pull, rotate, pucker, and bloat areas of your image, creating some quite interesting affects. Some photographers use the liquefy filter to reduce bulges in the legs, arms are thighs. Refine a chin, sharper DO jaw line makes certain body parts appear smaller or larger and more. It's also excellent for improving portrait imperfections. What's nice about the liquefy feature is that you can move pixels around while maintaining image quality as long as you don't go too far overboard so that enough paid here we see all of the various liquefied tools that are available. So we have the Forward Warp tool, which pushes pixels forward as you drag. The reconstructs tool with their should drink across change areas of the image to restore them to their original size. Smooth tool smooths out the altered edges of an image. 12 clockwise will rotate the pixels clockwise as you hold down your most bachelor DRE, tutorial pixels counterclockwise, you hold over the ultra Option key as you hold down the mouse button or Azure DRE. Next is the pucker tool. And what this does is push his pixels toward the center of them brush. So bloat tool pushes pixels away from the center of the brush. The push left tool moves to the left where new dreg upward or moves pixels to the right. If you drink downward, you could drag clockwise or counterclockwise around an object to increase or decrease its size. The freeze mass tool. So with this, frozen areas are covered by a mask that you page one says tool is activated. Well, this would do is protect those areas from changes. So once the tool is active, you drag over the areas that you want to protect. A far bass tool, thoughts frozen areas so that they're editable. So once the tool is activated, you drink over the area to a thought. If you want to thaw all frozen areas, you click None button in the mass options area of the dialogue. And that's in the right pane. Face to all the faces in the image are automatically identified allowing you to distort specific areas of the face. And then there's the hand tool which allows you to move the image when you're zoomed in. And then the zoom tool, which allows you to zoom in and out of your document. So to use any of these liquefied tools yourself, the brush size, pressure, density, and rates for the Properties panel here, and the rights pain then detects a tool that you want to use in the panel and then drag over the areas on your image until the desired effect is attained. Can also click with your mouse and hold on to an area of the image until it's the way we live. Now it's worth mentioning that relatively recently Adobe has added the face aware future to liquefy. Offering lots of options for all trig, the look of people's faces if you are so inclined to do so. So we're in the phrase tool is activated and that says icon right here, the face tool. And we see that we can also use the keyboard shortcut to activity here. When this tool is active, you hover your boss approach or over faces. And once you do Photoshop displaced sizing handles over that area of the face. And then you can adjust those sizing handles to make specific adjustments. So for instance here we can increase or decrease the size of the nose, make eyes bigger. As I move my mouse pointer over the eyes, we see those sizing handles appear. We can click and modified to change the size of the eyes, et cetera. There's also a face aware liquefy section in the Properties panel. And we can see this is chock full of options to alter the looks on people's faces. I sighs, eye height, i with i tilde, nose height, et cetera. So you can expand the various areas of this section, expand and collapse them by clicking the disclosure triangle and then drag the sliders until the desired effect is attained. So let's work on this together. So I'm gonna cancel over here different formula we're going to work with the image unable to liquefy. And that's a JPEG image located the lesser files folder in your desktop. So once this image is opened, which was filter liquefy for the menu. So we're going to start by using the bloat tool. And this tool right here. See we can also tap the beak key on a keyboard to activity the tool. And let's double-click and the brush size box and type in 50. So a set of brush size to 50 pixels and thus decrease the rate of this. And we've got to make sure the rate is maybe Let's go to about 35 for the rates was done applied quite so quickly. Let's click on the man's nose and hold on our most button for two seconds, sort of increases the size of the marriage knows a bit. Let's click of asking once in the bands left eye so we can see that they're just increased, it just slightly sars we hold in our mouse button, it continues to apply that filter. Scholars use the Packers tool instead. And if you recall it, that will push pixels toward the center of the brush. And that's this tool right here. And again, you can tap the S key on your keyboard to activate the tool. And let's make a burst has a little smaller, so it's double-click the burst size box and go about 25. Demo temperature Enter to confirm or breast size. And let's click the man side, the left side of the image. And Ohio most budget for three seconds. And you can see that though reduced the size of the I. Now let's activate the Forward Warp tool and that's the first tool in the Tools Panel. And then have said ever screen. And we wanted to US settled brush size to 25 against. So double-click or the size box and type in 25. Now let's click of the Matt's ear on the right set of image. And that's a drag upwards about a quarter of an inch so we could give her by the ears. So you get the idea with the liquefy tools. Typically you would make such extreme adjustments as we made here, but these tools can come in handy for making subtle adjustments to your imagery. May wish to experiment with them a little bit. So we'll click OK to close the filter dialog and apply our changes. And let's say this image and that's here with a new names. So choose File, Save As from the Ananya. I'm gonna name this my liquefy, so my underscore liquefied and will click Save and then click OK. 111. Using the Vanishing Point Filter: The vanishing point filter allows you to superimpose an image or an edit on a predefined perspective grid of automatically determine the correct scale, angle and perspective to vanishing point filter is an excellent tool for changing perspective, for lining brush strokes to an area of an image that has perspective, as well as superimposing passwords on an existing image and the vanishing point filters available from the filter bed news for you choose filter vanishing point from the menu. Now before adding images to the vanishing point Filter, you'll need to tell Photoshop how to interpret objects that are three-dimensional. And this is done by drawing a rectangle on the face of the destination object where you wish to superimpose an image. And you do that using the creates plane tool. And that's the first icon in the left panel barrier. Or you could tap the C key on your keyboard to activate tool. So once this is activated, you draw the rectangle on the destination object and then paste her image a drink it over the rectangle grid. So let's see how this works. So I'm going to cancel out of here for falling along rewards you with the Photoshop document is named to get Zhi Bo dodge PSD. And again, that's located in the less than Files folder on your desktop. So now when you don't with the image that we will super impose on our gazebo image. So we'll choose file opened for the menu. And again, you want to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. And the name of the image that we want to open his named exhibit and that's the PSD document, a Photoshop document, so to say coping, snobby about to choose select offer them in you. This selects everything in the art exhibit PSD file, and then will choose Edit, copy for the video. While you want to click on the gazebo Dutch PSD tab. Or you could also choose window because EBITDA PTSD from the menu to switch to that file. So now let's activate the vanishing point filter. So choose filter, vanishing point from the menu. And you want to click of the creates plane tool to ensure that the tool is activated. So now let's click on the right corner of the front left column. So right here, click on the left corner of the right front column. So right about here. So we'll click there. Then I'll click About an inch down. You'd be like some. And then we'll click down on the left column here. All right there. And that's, that's the final point of our grid. So now press the Command V keystroke combination of using a Mac or Control V of using windows that paste the image from our clipboard with a selection marquee around it so that the image still selected AS drag or to our grid here because see that it automatically resized to fit the dimensions of our grid. And then a release Hamas button that will click. Okay, so now we can see that we have superimposed that image onto our document. So that was using a vanishing point filter. It's a friendly you don't hear about too often. But it's good for specific things like what we just did here. 112. Using the Filter Gallery: Many of the filter dialog boxes have been replaced with the filter gallery. And if we work with this a little bit in previous videos, when we change settings of some of the filters, sort of following along, you might open the image named yellow Dutch flower dot JPEG. And again, that's less than Files folder on your desktop. And let's just pay the filter gallery. And to do so we choose filter, filter gallery from the menu. So in addition to modifying the settings of filters, you can also preview the filter as well as cumulatively apply more than one filter to a photo. All filters that are or will be applied to the image are listed in the lower right hand pane filter gallery writes down here. Filters are listed and apply to the image in the order that you select them or, or that you add them to the photo. However, you can rearrange the order in which the filters are applied by dragging the filter name to another position in the list. And doing so will dramatically changed the way the tree image looks. As he readily see. We think a little box next to the filter name and that applies that filters. So give me how little I icon or the visibility icon so we can hide or show filters are in essence choosing to apply or not apply that filter. So let's apply an artistic filter to this image. And you want to make sure that the IAEA kind is not displayed next to the filter name. So we want to apply the artistic filters. So if that category isn't expanded, you'll want to click on the word artistic to expand it. And let's click on the page of Dobbs filter because see the right-most pane here, the paints dubs filter is displayed, letting us know that that filter is applied. Of course, we had the visibility icon that turned off. So let's click the little box to the left of the filter name and that turns on that visibility and applies the filter to the photo. Another way of applying the filter is by clicking on the drop down list here, the rightmost page that displays all of the available filters in the filter gallery. So let's choose grain from the list. And now we see the great filter has been applied and un-filter list updates to gray and letting us know that that is the only filter but is being applied. And thus reduce the intensity of this photo a little bit. So dreg the intensity slider to the left, maybe to about 20. What we're going to do now is apply a second filter to this image. So to do so we click the little plus icon on the bottom of the parallel, the rightmost panel, And that's the new effects Layer icon. So I'll click that. Right away we see a new filter has been added. So let's click the filter drop-down lists and let's add the INK outlines filters. So we'll choose that from the list. So now we see that the INK outlines filter has been applied in addition to our grain filter. And again, we can hide or show these filters by clicking the little visibility I kind so now we have no filters applied, now just the grain and now both of them. So I think we're done with this, so I'll click OK and I'll brings us back to our main Photoshop document. Soft tells us imaged are falling alarm press Command W if using a Mac or Control W If you're using Windows. And we'll save our changes. 113. Using Smart Filters: In previous versions of Photoshop, filters were limited to affecting a single layer and were thought of as destructive. Because once you save it and close the Photoshop file, the filter was then permanently applied to that layer. Photoshop smart photos, however, allow you to apply them one or more filters in a nondestructive manner to layers and maintain the ability to modify the filter settings out anytime, as well as specifying a blending layer for each filter. You can then apply any filter as a smart filter, with the exception of the vanishing point and the lens blur. So before applying a smart filter, you first need to convert the layer for smart filters. And you do that by choosing filter. Convert for smart filters from the menu. Once you do, whenever the smart filtered Lear is active and it filters that you apply to that layer will be displayed in a list below the smart filter layer. And you can then edit the individual filters settings if you so choose sets, Blending Options change the order of the filter is by dragging them in the list, show or hide the filter or even apply a filter mask. So if you're following along, you want to open the image named Tiger Dr. J. Peg, and that's located in the lesson files folder in your desktop. And the first thing we're going to do is convert this for smart filters. So you want to choose filter, convert for smart filters from the menu. And Photoshop displays a dialog box informing us that the layer will be converted into a smart object, and this is what we want. So we'll click OK. Now we're going to add a filter to this image. So we're gonna choose filter. And let's add a rendering filters. So choose render and we're going to choose lighting effects from the menu. Now we are going to apply one of the lighting effects preset. So I'll kick the presets drop-down list on the option bar. And they're going to need to scroll up to display all the presets. And we're gonna go with soft omni, so a select that. And let's change the area where the effect is applied. So let's move on most Pedro over the green circle and then drag down. So now we want to move our mouse pointer over this circle and the circle but turns yellow right there. And then we wanna drag him. Once it turns yellow, we are able to increase or decrease the size of the circle. And we wanted just a bit larger than the Tigers had some maybe like so. And then we could drag inside that circle to be positioned on your screen. So I'm gonna go just like that. So this reduces the area to where the effect is applied. And that's clicking the green dot here. Let's drag that so it's right between the tigers eyes. And this again specifies the lighting area. So I think that'll but doesn't. So we'll click OK on the Options bar. Now we can see our Smart Filter is now listed in the Layers panel and we have one filter applied, and that's the lighting effects filter. We can go back at any time and, uh, justice by double-clicking the words lighting effects. And that brings us right back to that lighting effects work area, I will click. Okay, so let's apply another filter to this image. So we'll choose filter prejudice Stuart, and let's go with the pinch filter. And we're going to modify the amount of the purchase. And let's drink the Mount slider here on the bottom to about negative 45. So just like so, so, so we're really exaggerating the tiger's face here. And I'm gonna drag garbage until a tyres noses is displayed in the center of our image. So just like so, so this is what the pendular will be applied and it looks like ok. So now we see that we have both the pinch and the lighting effects filter applied. So let's add another filter from our filter gallery. So we'll choose filter, filter gallery from the menu. And let's click on the word texture to expend the texture group. And that's the part of the first filter, the texture group, the crack tiller filter. Now we're going to change some of the options of this solicit, set the crack spacing to about 20 and most of the crowd depth will drag it to the left. And we'll go to about to hear. And for the brightness we want to set the brightness to. Let's go to as well, and then we'll click Ok. So we see we never knew filtered are smart filters, that filter gallery. So we see that the most recent filters that we've applied is on tau. So now in the layers panel here and the filtered one with the smart filters area, let's click the little icon to the left of the pinch filter. What that does is removes the effect of the pinch filter from the image. So we're going to do now is double-click the little icon to the right of the filter gallery filter, and that is the blending mode options icon. You can see that once we move our mouse over parental verbal Galileo's box telling us double-click to edit filter Blending Options. So let's double-click it. And there's a space, a bidding options dialog. And from the mode drop-down list, we're going to go with lightens so late in our image. So select that and you can see a preview immediately applied to the image. And then we'll click OK. So if you wanted to permanently applied the filters to the layer and thus remove the smart filters. What you do is Rasterize the smart object. And so let's do that 300 and sure that our layer is selected and we're going to choose Layer, rasterize, then choose smart object from the list. What this will do is merge all of the layers contained in the smart object into one single layer. So once we do that, our individual layers will no longer be accessible. So we'll do that. And now we see we have one single layer because no longer had at the individual filters of that layer. So I think we're done with this. Let's choose file close from the menu and we'll save our changes. 114. 0819 replacing a sky in photoshop: In this video, we're going to look at a recent feature that was just added to Photoshop, and that is the sky replacement feature and that's located off the Edit menu. So this is a future that either people like or hate because there are purists who believed that everyone's photos will look the same now that this feature is part of Photoshop. But actually you can customize it so that you do end up with unique looking skies. And also you can import your own skies into Photoshop, which is a nice feature. And what really makes us stand out is a way that you can blend the sky in with the foreground. So let's see how this works. So I'm gonna choose Edit, scott replacement for the menu and there's just phase a sky replacement. It did dialogue. To review all the different skies that are available. You click on the preview thumbnail and this displays another dialogue with all the various guys. And we can see that they're grouped into categories. So I have blue sky, spectacular sunsets, etc. So just click on the disclosure triangle to expand this section. And then you can click on the thumbnail is, and you can see it temporarily applies that sky to our image. But the key to creating a realistic sky is to choose one that matches the correct timeOfDay, for instance, are very much was taken during the golden light of a sunset. You wouldn't want a bright blue midday sky just would look off. So let's go back to the blue skies here. And we're going to go with a little darker as God midday sky. I will going to choose a third blue Skype for the top. And as you can see, we have quite a, quite a few different blue skies we can choose. But I think this third one for the top here matches our image to the best. So the ones who've chosen are scared. Then we tap the escape key on my keyboard to close that thumbnail Dialog. Well, one thing I wanted to show you, you can also add your own skies. Be clicked back into this thumbnail here, we clicked a little gear icon. You'll be choose Import skies that will allow you to import I disguise that you've saved to your computer. Now note that at the time of this recording, you can only bring it one sky at a time. So you can't like select 200 skies of import them all in at once. So only one sky at a time. So let me escape out of here. So the left part of this probably have a couple of tools here. One of them is the Move tool. This allows you to move this guy around your image. So let's becoming handy if you're clouds are blending in too close to the foreground and you want to just move it up a little bit, or you can move it around until you find the best placement for your image. There's also the scale slider here, the dog. And what this will do is Makers scar larger to take up more space, are smaller to take up less space. So again, that these sliders, you can customize the appearance of your Skype. Below the Move tool is the sky brush. This allows you to add or subtract from the area that the sky is taking up. And I personally have not found a use for this tool and I've. Play around with it a little bit, but it doesn't really seem to do much for me. I tend to work with the other tools in this dialogue. One of them is the Shift Edge slider, and this is right up, right below the thumbnail here. And this will let you contract or expand and it affects the blending betrayed your sky and the foreground. So photoshop detects the edges in your document. So if you drag the slider to the left, it detracts the sky from the edge. So you can see more that all sky peeping through. If you drag it to the right, it blends in better with the foreground and does a good job most the time a blending in. So I tend to drag this to the right until I liked the way it looks. And I think I'm going to grab that moved tool here and drag it up just a little bit. But all the shift and hedger is the faded slider. And this allows you to set how much fainter you wanted to occur between your sky and the foreground. Or in other words, it will fade the blending between your sky on the edge. So I was like is see how this changes as I drag this slider. So again, you want to find a setting that looks good for your particular image. So we have two sections here. We have the sky adjustments section on the foreground or just been section. So the sky adjustments section, please, slayers pertains specifically for the sky. That is to say they affect only the sky at the notch, the foreground. So the first slider is a Brightness slider. This will lighten or dark in the sky starts as a drag to the right. It brightens this guy as I drag to the left and darkens This guy. So I think I'll go about rate here. Below that is the temperature slider. So if the overall scene was warm, you really don't want to cool of a temperature or a tear to cool of a sky. So you can warm it up a bit by dragging the slider to the right. You can see that apply some yellowing to their sky. Likewise, if you have a cool scene, a bluish scene. If you drag the slider to the left to more blue to this guy. I think I'm gonna go baby a little bit to the right here. That looks pretty good to me. We've already talked about this skill, or you can change the size of this guy. I should see the amount of space that are takes up a below that is a checkbox labeled flip. So what this will do is flip the sky from one side of the image to another to get that directional light to match. That is to say the direction of the highlights in the image matches the direction of the light in the sky. So this area of the Rock was lit up by the sky. Then you'll want to ensure that the directional light from the sky matches that shown in the image. But he had to experiment and see what it looks the best for your image. Below the sky adjustments is the 4-node adjustments section. And these adjustments are specific to your foreground. So the first of these is lighting mode, and we have two options here, multiply and scree multiply, darkens, whereas the screen lightens once they click the light. And notice howard lightened the edges between my sky. And there are foreground where she doesn't look very good in this case. So we'll go back to multiply. The lighting adjustment. Slider will add lighting to the edges of the image. And we can see that as a drag to the left, it brightens it, and then if I drag to the right, it darkens it. And likewise, we have the color adjustments slider, which will bring in some of the color toting of the sky. And you can see a very subtle adjustment to the foreground. So the key with all of these sliders is to experiment with them and find this settings which best blended the sky with your foreground. So the last option here is an output two, and this is where you're going to output this selling. I'll put it to a new layer of lubricant layer. I typically would choose new layer. Once I do that, we click OK. If you look over here on our Layers panel, photoshop created a new folder named of sky replacement group. This contains all of the adjustments that we did in that scarier placement dialogue. So we're going to see some of the layers on layers with masks. Others are layers with adjustment layers that we're talking about. If I by double clicking on the adjustment to their making our changes from the Properties panel. So yes, if your image suffers from a drab skier, otherwise unsightly sky, you can swap it out for what? A photoshops prepackaged skies or bringing your own 115. A Look at Channels: In this video, we're gonna take a look at working with channels. And for that we're working with them. Bear dash, channel, dot, PSD image. So we'd like to follow along. You want to open that image from the lesson files folder on your desktop. So every image that you work with in Photoshop contains channels. And channels are grayscale images that store color information about the active image in Photoshop. So these channels are created automatically when you open or create a new image and are stored in that Channels Panel. And have the Channels Panel opens rate here. You don't see it chews window channels from the menu, and now we see that it is hidden, and let's bring that back. So window channels. And again, that panel shares our place on the dock with the layers and the past panels. Now the number of channels in the Channels Panel depends on the type of image. Foetuses say whether it's an RGB image, a CMYK image, lab image, a bitmap image, et cetera. The bridges that we have with the screen is an RGB image. And because of that, it contains four default channels. The RGB channel and then red, green, and blue. After the default channels, any i alpha challenge that you've created will display here. These are channels that you've created by saving a selection or a Layer Mask, you can use an alpha channel to load a saved selection, which will then reactivate that selection in the image. And we worked with them a little bit in a previous video. You can also edit an alpha channel using any of photoshops editing tools on the Tools panel. So if we click add, we can see a preview of the alpha channel. So now let's click on the channel named red, and this activates the rate of channel. So you can make any changes to this active channel if you wanted to, such as applying a filter or using the eraser tool, et cetera. So let's double-click on this alpha channel named to bear dash, ear. So double-click on the words. And let's change the name of this, what is called as ears are told, type it EAR, then tab, return or enter on our keyboard. So saving a selection as a channel, but this does, is allows us to save selections that we make on an image, then load them at a later time. And this is especially helpful if you have a complicated selection that is time-consuming to create sieving or selection is an alpha channel allows you to load this channel should you need to apply additional effects to that portion of the image. And this way you don't have to redo the selection every time. So let's see how this works. So you want to click on the main channel, which is the RGB channel and the Channels Panel. And let's draw a selection or image. So for that we're going to use the lasso tool. So what's healthy elk Cuno keyboard to activate that Gruber tools. And we'll right-click and choose less so for the menu. And let's draw selection rather than knows of our bears. So I'm going to zoom in on that a little bit and then we'll draw a selection around the bear's nose. I don't get it doesn't have to be perfect. This is just for demonstration purposes. There now we have our selection. So to savor selection will choose, select SIR selection from the menu. I'm going to type in a name for a selection of suitable named his nose and then click okay. So now we see we ever knew selection on the bottom of our Channels panel. So let's click on the nose channel and the Channels Panel. And that displays our selection and activates that channel. Let's return to our main channel. So we'll click RGB, the Channels Panel, and we still have our no selected. So let's deselect. That's, so I'll choose, select D, select from the menu. Now that we've created a selection and saved it, we can load that selection at any time. This again allows you to add additional effects through the selected area without having to recreate another selection. And this could be a real timesaver if you have an irregular or a highly detailed selection. So to Lotus selection, we choose select Load selection from the menu. So we'll do that. This is faith alone selection, dialogue, and a cello drop-down list displays all of the selections that we've saved. So if you click on there, we see we have two selections, the ear and the nose. We went a little, don't know, selections or nodes, and then we'll click OK. And now loaded that selection that we save for us. So now we see the selection rather than those of the bear. So let's deselect the selection. So press Command D if using a Mac or Control D if using Windows to de-select it again, you can also choose select D, select from the menu. I will load a different selection. So choose select Load selection from the menu. And the selection that we want to load is that ear selection. And that was the one that was already saved with this image. So click on that and then click OK. And now we see we have a selection around the bear 0. Now let's deselect this by pressing commodity if you're using a Mac or Control D if using Windows. And I think we're done with this image. So let's save our changes. So we'll tap command deaths if using a Mac or Control S If you're using Windows. And that saves our changes. 116. Working with Layer Masks: In this video, we're going to begin working with layer masks. And layer masks allow you to selectively show or hide parts of a layer but non-destructively, for instance. And let's say it was sort of this background here I wanted to add in a blue sky. What I would do is open up a blue sky image in addition to the background, a bridge. Then in the top image I would create a Layer Mask and then paint in that sky from underneath. So this way I am only drawing on the Layer Mask and not on the image itself. And we're going to see how all this works. And we're going to work through this in much more depth. So to add a Layer Mask, you click the layer mass button and thus the third icon from the left, the bottom of the layers panel. Whenever you create an Adjustment Layer, Layer Mask is added automatically. So when you add a layer mask to a layer of the mask appears in the layers panel to the right of them, layer thumbnail. So let's out-of-date layer mass to this image. So we're going to, we're working with the Burdash channeled touch PSD image. Now let's select the background layer in the layers panel. Now note that in order to add a layer mask to a layer, that layer must be unlock. Say we're trying to add a layer mask to a layer and it does not work. That is probably the reason. So we have to let her is locked to there'll be a little lock icon next to the layer name. So just click on the lock icon to unlock the layer. And now we'll click the layer mask icon. And a mask has now been added to that layer. So whenever you add a layer mask, the mask appears in the layers panel to the right of the layer thumbnail. Now often layer masks are used to create faded effects, such as hiding portions of the layer from view. So for instance, if I had that image of the sky underneath her, I could hide to this portion of the layer from view and bringing the portion of the sky for the layer underneath. So layer masks are often used for more complicated editing, such as progressively applying color or filter effects to an image. You can also isolate a portion of the image from editor using a Layer Mask. So you select the area he wished to apply to a mask using any of Photoshop selection tools over here, the toolbar, and then create a Layer Mask. And any portion of the image that is not selected will be hidden from view. So when you are creating a Layer Mask, you'll typically want to, since the foreground color to black or white as this will be the color of your mask. So if your mask is wide, which it is here. Otherwise is this layer would be black if the mass was black, but in our case it's white. Did you have to brush or pink in black? So in other words, the former color would need to be black. If you're Layer Mask is Black, however, you have to brush her pink in white. So in this case, your foreground color would need to be white. So to undo what you've just painted, you could just switch the foreground color to the opposite color of the mask and painted that will undo what you've painted. So before adding a layer mask, people automatically set the default foreground color to white and the default background color to black by tapping the D key on your keyboard. Notice I, once I tap the de qi, our foreground colors automatically set to white, the background to black. You can also flip the foreground and background colors quickly by tapping the X key on your keyboard. So once I tap x, we see that the foreground color is black to have x again, it goes back to those default foreground and background colors. So this makes it easier to remember which color brush to use when painting, but also help to remember that's black conceals and white reveals. And before paid to you always want to make sure that you have your layer Mask thumbnail selected, not the main image layer. Otherwise, you'll be painting directly under image who want to paint on the layer mask. So let's undo this. So we're gonna tap Command Z if using a Mac or Control Z if using Windows. That brings us back to that previous ticks of the image. So the first thing we're going to do is create a selection using one of the murky tools. And we're gonna use the rectangular marquee tool, and that's the seconds tool for the top of the toolbar. That's not selected. Right-click on that group or tools and choose rectangular Martine. And let's draw a selection around the head of the bear, some images like so. And release our mouse button. And once we've drawn a selection, let's add a Layer Mask. So it'll take that layer mask. I kinda miss a third icon from the left and the bottom of the Layers panel. And that adds a layer mass to our background layer. So we can now edit this layer mask without affecting the rest of the image. So in the next video, we're going to work with reshaping a Layer Mask, but I think we're done with the barrier image that's close this. So we'll choose file close for the menu and we'll save our changes. 117. Reshaping a Layer Mask: Reshaping a Layer Mask allows you to hide or display various areas of the layer by paging on the mask with the brush or pencil tool. Layer masks are grayscale images, so any area painted in black is hidden. And the area pigeons in white is displayed. And then the area painted in shades of gray creates a translucent effect. So to reshape a layer, choose the desired foreground color, and then activate the brush tool or the pencil tool on the toolbar. Then draw the area of the image that you wish to reshape. Although it appears as though you're reasonably image, you're actually just painting into mask area. Now when painting in white, you could also use the inverse command that's located under image 0.2 adjustments and then invert from the menu. What this will do is invert the colors, add an image to create some interesting feathering affects. So if you're following along, we're working with the image neighbors, squirrel dot PTSD, and that's a Photoshop document and located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So the latest Pali when ensures the squirrel background layer is selected and it automatically is because I study Larry here and we're going to create a layer bass. So we'll click the icon from the left on the bottom, the Layers panel, and that's the Add Layer Mask icon. And we wanted to ensure that the foreground color is set to black. And if it's opposite, just tap the X key on your keyboard and that will I reverse those colors. So we've gone feed foreground colors had to black. So what that will do is hide any area that we paint. But before we paired to, we're going to modify the size of our brush. So let's kick the Brush Preset picker icon in the Options bar. And we're going to go out into the general brushes area. And if that's not expanded, clicks a little disclosure triangle to the left of the words in general brushes. And we're gonna go without first brush in the list, the soft round brush. And we're going to increase the size of our brush. That's got about a 100 pixels. So I'll click in a size box and select whatever value is in there. Well type paid 100 Px. There were temporary Turner enter on a keyboard. So now let's paint over this squirrel until that squirrel is completely hidden. So just like so we have our barrage. So again, it appears as though we're erasing the image. But if you look at the layers panel, the original layer is untouched. We painted only on the mask. So knowledge Choose image, pride to adjustments, and then click on invert from the menu. And this inverts the colors of the image, created kind of a feathering effect. And let's tap the executer keyboard. This sets the foreground color to white. So remember a black conceals and a white reveal. So we're going to reveal the rest of the image sounds repaints. So nervosa, that paint for rest of the image becomes visible. So again, what this does is controls Hubbard of the image you wanted to see sort of a wonder pain. So if I wanted to remove this portion in the lower right corner or tau x x again, and then paint with black and again, black conceals wide reveals. So let's save our changes. We'll choose File Save from the menu. 118. Blending Images with Layer Masks: When painting with black on our Layer Mask, you can blend two layers together to create some interesting transparency effects. So your outer layer mass to the layer on the top of the one that you wished from blend. And then using the gradient tool, you can create a foreground to background gradient on the Layer Mask. And doing this will gradually blend in the top layer with the one underneath it. So for falling alone or working with the image name, you're blending underscore mask, a dodge PSD, and that's a Photoshop document located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So we want to open that if you want to follow along. And in this Photoshop document, we have two layers. We have a picture of purple flowers here and underneath we have an image of someone in a kayak. So we want to select the topmost layer, the layer one layer. And we're going to add a layer of mass to this. So again, we take the third icon from the left of the bottom of the Layers panel. And then I'm gonna tap the D key on a keyboard to ensure that the foreground color is set to white, the backward color is set to black. Sonata that's activate the gradients tool. And again, notice this tool right here of the tool bar. We want to ensure that a linear gradient is set in us. The first budget in this group of buttons on the Options bar. So click on that. Now let's take the gradient of Picker arrow and under the basis categories. So I'll click the little disclosure triangle to the left of the word basics. We want the first gradient, which is the foreground to background gradient. So we'll select that. Now let's click on the left center area of our document and that's dragged across the document to the right. And we see that the image then it becomes kind of transparent, displaying the image beneath it. So let's undo this. I'm sure your different method of living images, you could also use the brush tool. So what you do is when you're using the brush tool, what that will do is ISO brush on the image that will slowly reveal what is underneath. So let's cut the beak IDA keyboard to activate the brush tool. And let's tap the X key on our keyboard to ensure that black is set as a foreground color. I'll notice that as I drag, I'm bringing in that layer that's underneath. So this can be a good method of fixing a Skype, for instance. So you can have an image of a photo with our good Sky and then using, then create a Layer Mask and then bring in that sky from the layer underneath. This is a method that many people use to swap out about sky in Photoshop. So I think we're done with this. Let us choose file close from the menu. I will click, don't say we don't want to save our changes. 119. Using Mask Commands: Layer masks that have their own set of commands that you can use to access them. Control-click or right-click on the layer thumbnail and the Layers panel. And this displays a contextual menu with commands relevant to layer masks. So after you create your Layer Mask, you use the apply layer mass command to make those changes permanent. The leaf layer mass commanded deletes the Layer Mask from the Layers panel. Or it could also just disable the layer mask if you went to temporarily the Layer Mask from view, we can see the little extra layer mass that's a snow that is temporarily disabled. And to re-enable that, we right-click the little thumbnail again and choose enable Layer Mask. And again, I'm working without scroll dot PSD image. We worked with it a previous video. So let's delete this layer mousing. And so there's a couple of different ways you can do it. You can simply click the layer mask, a trigger to the trashcan icon at the bottom of the layers panel. Or we can right-click the little layer mass thumbnail and choose deletes layer mask for the menu. And that completely removes the layer mask from our Layers panel. Let's undo that. So we'll choose Edit, Undo, Delete Layer Mask. So let's make our Layer Mask changes permanent. And again, to do so, we right-click on the layer thumbnail and choose apply Layer Mask. And as we could see, the layer mask on the original image have now been combined Intel one layer. So once you save and close a document that's interchanges are permanent, so you'll no longer be able to delete that layer mass thumbnail or make any changes to it. So let's close this. So choose file close for the menu i and we will save our changes. 120. Using Actions: Actions are automated commands that you play Back to perform specific actions if you worked at all as Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel, the concept of actions is similar to a macros in those applications. For instance, you could create an action that automatically resizes all of the images in a folder. To accomplish this, you record all the necessary keystrokes that I would perform this task as an action. And you create actions from the actions panel. And if it's not displayed, choose window actions from the menu. And from here you could also execute existing actions. Now photoshop comes with several prerecorded actions or you can use, and those are located under the default action set. So if you don't see that, just take the little Rights Project disclosure triangle to the left of the words default actions. So action sets allow you to categorize your actions so that all of your related actions reside in the same folder. So right here we see we have a vignette actions. You have a wood frame actions, et cetera. When you create your own actions, you can also assign a function key to them, such as F1 to F2. And pressing the assigned function key on your keyboard will automatically launch that action. Can also display your actions as buttons in the actions panel by taking the actions parallel Options menu and again that's little hamburger menu up here. And then selecting button modal, what's selected, all your actions will then be displayed as menu buttons. And clicking on a button, it will launch the action associated with that button. But let's turn off budget mode here. Server follow logo working with the image name to park underscore bench. And that's the JPEG image located less than Files folder on your desktop. So first off, you want to just pay the actions panel by choosing window actions for the menu. And you wanted to ensure that all of the default actions are displayed by clicking that little disclosure triangle to the left of the word default actions. And what we're going to do is we're gonna start by creating an action set. To do so it takes a little folder on the bottom of the actions paddle. And now we need to provide a name for our new actions said, we'll just call this my actions. And then click OK. And now we see the new action set that appears on the bottom of the actions panel. Now we're ready to create our first actions. So we're going to click the Create new action icon. And that's didn't like what the plus symbol on the bottom of the actions panel. So I'll click on that. The first thing we need to do is provide a name for action. So we'll leave this fancy edge. We want to ensure that my actions is displayed in the drop-down list. That's the sense in which we want to save her action. And let's apply a function key to this as well. That's a Dual Shift F6. So click the function key dropped, DO list and choose F6. And then we'll click the checkbox next to shift. And note they could also use that command or control as well. So I think that'll do it. So we'll click record. And for SAP tells us that this actually will hide their shortcut. The feather command, which is the current shortcut for Shift F6. And that's fine because I never use that keyboard shortcut anyway, so I'll click. Okay, so now we're recording. We can tell we're recording because a little icon, that record icon has turned to read. So the first thing we're going to do is select everything in this image. So we'll choose Select All from the menu. And we wanted to transform us selection. So we'll choose, select, Transform selection for them. And you can see the little sizing handles that are placed there under selection. So what do we want to do is a scale the image down by 10%. So a click of the width box here and type in 90. Then go tap the tap Cuno keyboard. And notice at the height box automatically changed to 90 as well. And that's because we have to maintain aspect ratio icon activated. That's the link icon here, so that whatever value we entered the width box, the height marks will change accordingly and vice versa. So let's commit our transformation. So I'll click the little check mark icon on the Options bar. So now we want to invert our selections. So we'll choose, select inverse from the menu. So what this does is it inverts it versus a selection that's creating a border around the image. So let's add up this and quick mass commode introduce so contempt that Q key on our keyboard, or you can use the icon, the icon, second icon from the bottom here and the tools panel. And we're going to apply a filter to this area. So choose filter, print to pixelate. And we're going to use the color half torn filter. So we'll select that. And he wanted to ensure that the max radius is set to eight. And then we'll click OK. And this creates an eight pixel edge effector of the border of our image. And let's turn off this Quick Mask boats who was switched back to standard mode. So tap the QC here keyboard. And now we want to delete the selected areas. So you want to hold on the command key using a Mac or Control key of using windows, then tap the delete key on your keyboard that deletes the selection. So now let's resize our image. So choose image, image size from the menu. And you wanted to ensure that via dropped DO list here said it reads pixels. The pixels there's great art should lead to ensure the FEA, we sub both checkboxes checked. And we wanted to resize the width of this to 640 pixel civil type that in. And notice that the height automatically adjusted to 480 pixels because again we have the constraint aspect reassure icon activated so that it looks like okay. So the last thing we want to do is remove all color from this image to transform it into a grayscale image. So to do so, we'll choose image prior to adjustments, then click desaturate from the menu. So that about does it for our actions. So now to stop recording, we clicked a leftmost icon in the bottom of the actions panel and that stops are recording. So a clause, this image, so we choose file and close on the menu and then we'll save our changes. So now we want to open a different image. So click the open button here and you could also choose file open from the millenium. The image that he went to open is named snowy bridge. Scroll down until we see that image. So a selective and then click open. We wanted to do is apply that an action that we just created to this image. So to do so you want to click the fancy edge-on shouldn't interactions paddle and then click the Play Selection button, and that's the third button from the left. It's the icon with the right printing triangle. So I'll click on that and wish that executes the action and applies all of those steps that we did to this image adult that you could also press the Shift F6 KeyStore combination. So lastly, that's closest immiscible choose file close for the menu and we'll save our changes. 121. Batch with Actions: Batch actions allow you to play an action to all of the files at a specific folder. For example, you could create an action that would resize all of the images in the folder to the same size. Now, when applying a batch action, you will need to specify a source folder, which is the location of the original files, and a destination folder, which is the folder where you want to store the images after they've been modified. You can also batch rename your images. For instance, you could rename all of you have occasion pictures to the word vacation, followed by a three digit number such as vacations 001, location 002, et cetera. Can also do this from the adobe bridge menu if you use Adobe Bridge. So let's see how this works. So from the Photoshop main screen, we're gonna choose File point to automate. And we see a whole bunch of commands here. The one that you want is the batch command. Click on batch. This is phase, the batch dialogue. So first of all, be binded. Do you want to choose the action w1 to apply to the images? So you wanna make sure that my actions is displayed in the center box. And that's the fancy agile action is displayed in the auction box. And that is the action that we created in the last video, sort of falling along. You want to watch that video and follow along with that first. So we wanted to ensure that the source drop-down list here is set to folder. And then we need to select the folder, that is to say the folder that contains the images w1 to modify. So I'll click the choose button here. We want to navigate to the lesson files folder on our desktop. So click Desktop now left pane, double-click lesson files folder. And we want to select a folder named uploaded images and then click the choose button. So now we're going to choose the destination area. So click the destination drop-down list and then choose folder. Now if you don't choose a destination folder, all of the action changes will be made to your original files. So you may want to always ensure that you do a destination folder. That way. If you choose the wrong action, you don't end up ruining all your originals. So once we have chosen folder as a destination type, we need to choose a destination failover. So take the choose Button. We're gonna create a new folder, is looking for new folder by tenable limb that my pictures. And I'll click Create. So for the lesson files folder, I'm going to select out to my pictures folder. Then click choose. Tsunami went to rename all the images in the destination folder. So I'm going to click the first box here under the file naming area, we're going to type in vacation stuff. I'm going to click in this second box here. And from the drop-down list to sucker drop-down list who you want to choose three digit serial number. So what this will do is apply a three digit sequential serial number, two, the word vacation. And we can see an example here under the file naming area, vacation 001, vacation 00 to et cetera. Again, he could choose a different options from this list as well. You can append the date, extension, et cetera. But we're gonna leave this as is. And we're going to click into the third box and the file naming area, and we're going to choose extension this time, a lowercase extension. So what this will do is either lowercase extension to the filename. Again, we see an example of a GIF file here. So under the compatibility area, we see the MacOS is checked. That's because I'm working on a Mac. But we also want to make sure that it's not compatible with Windows and unix as well. So a select both of those checkboxes. And then we'll click OK to run the actions. So now we want to click OK Each time the JPEG options box displays because it's, it's good to display for every image in the folded. I think there's only three images in his folder, so I'll click OK. Okay, and okay, Now let's choose file opened from the menu. You want to navigate to that my pictures folder on the desktop. So we'll choose desktop. That's an files double-click by pitchers. And we see that there are three images in this folder, vacation 001002003, such sanctification zeros or one image and then click open. And there's always the modified image in Photoshop. So we can see that images of this Fuller is set to 640 by 480 pixels, is grayscale and is bordered by our fancy edge or be created in the previous video. So that is using batch actions in Photoshop. 122. Using the Note Tool: So notes tool, which shows a space to the toolbar with the eye dropper tool allows you to place little sticky notes on your images. For example, if you're creating images for someone else, you could attach a note to the image in forming the client of the resolution of the image, the image size or instructions that out as if the image for their own use. So if you're following along, we're working with the park bench image that we worked with in the previous video. We wanted to open park underscore bench tattoo J peg, that's activates the notes tool. So you can also tap the I key on your keyboard to activate that group or tools. They were right-click and then choose notes tool from the menu. So once the notes tool is activated, you click in the image window where you wish to place your note. So let's click anywhere in our emerge here and a small note window appears in which we can type the text to Evernote. So let's type in wanted. Do you think of the edge effect? But here we're finished or we need to do is click the Close budget and the notes panel, and that closes that panel. So that's kept the VQ, the keyboards document that moved to the DC sector knowledge tour. So if we double-click on this little icon here that expands the north wind Arbor, then we can see that note, though we typed you can ofs rather than the author from the Options bar with fufu. So choose well as change the color of the note. If you want to remove all notes from an image, you just click the clear all button on the Options bar. And of course you need to activate the Note tool in order for these options to up here. Can also close the note panel by choosing a window notes from the menu that shows it hides the Notes panel. We're gonna go double-click on his icon to view or north. He also clothes as I tab group by clicking the little flyout menu, the hamburger icon, and then choose closed have group from the menu. And that closes that entire group of tab is the layer comps and the notes. So let's remove all notes from this image to I'll click the clear all button. Then we'll click OK. And I'll have a Nazi removed from this image. 123. Using Smart Guides: Smart guides are temporary lines that allow you to align multiple layers. These lines are visible. What I layer aligns perfectly with the edges or the center of another layer. And if the view stopped to layers feature is turned on, as we had discussed in the last video, the layers will snap to the guide when there are lined sort of falling along. Let's turn on the future. And to do so, we choose view point is show. And then we wanna click on smart guides. If there is not double check mark to the left of it. As we can see, I have it activated because it'll check mark it displayed to the left of the words. We also want to trim the snap two features you want to choose View to snap to. And we went to snap to layers. You want to ensure that the Layers option is selected. So now let's click on the polar bear ice cream layer and I'll give you one activates that Lear firstly the Layers panel, so it's selected and that's drag that to the left on our screen very slowly until it's lined up. But the help wanted layer below. And when the vertical Ajanta line appears, you can see that this layer is now lined up with that bottom layer. So the Smart Grid will appear whenever the edges of multiple layers are aligned. So now let's release the mouse button. By the way, the default color for the smart kids is magenta. And you can see when I drag this, the lines than the magenta lines appear. Again, you can change the guide colored by displaying Photoshop preferences. So choose Photoshop pointed preferences of using a backer, edit preferences of using windows, and then go back to our guides, grids and slices. And here you can choose a new color from the yes, smart guides drop TO list. So you can choose one of the colors here. I'll click on custom to choose from the color picker. But we'll leave this has magenta, so it'll cancel out of here. And I think we're done with this file. So that's Choose File Close from the menu. And we'll save our changes. 124. Creating a Contact Sheet: In this video, you'll learn how to create a contact sheet. And contact sheets allow you to display thumbnails for a group of images on a single page. This feature creates a thumbnail for each image in a folder and arranges them on one single sheet. Contact sheets are a good way to catalog images in multiple folders. So to create a contact sheet, you choose file for the Photoshop menu, point to automate, and then click contact sheets to from the menu. This is phase the contact sheet to dialogue box. So from here you can set the dimensions and the layout of your contact sheet. Specify the folder that contains the images that will make up your contact sheet and specify the US font-family, the font type, and the font size of the caption. Now it's important to note that if you wish each subnet to be on its own layer, you want to make sure that you uncheck the flattered oh, layers checkbox. So the first thing we wanted to do is specify the folder that contains the images W1 to make up our contact sheet. So up at the top portion of though a dialogue here, you want to click the choose button under the source images area. You want to navigate to the lesson files folder on our desktop. Then we'll select the Contact folder and then click open. So this alerts the folder that contains the images that we want to use for our context sheet. So now under the document area, we wanna contact sheet to be eight by ten. So I want to ensure that AD shorting the width box and ten is shown in the box. We also want to ensure that the unit of measure is set to inches. So you'll click the units drop down list and choose inches from the menu. So now that sit the layout of a contact sheet, and I think I want my contact sheet to, the four columns are crossed with six rows down, sort of the cobs box. We'll double-click in there and type in form. And then you want to ensure that six is displayed in the rows box. And we wanted to also ensure that the flat shadow layers checkbox is checked. And this will merge all of the thumbnails into one layer to reduce file size. So I think that about does it for this. So I'll click OK. And Photoshop begins creating our contact sheet. We can see that it's solely out in the images one by one. So wait until this finishes. So again, this is also a good way to not only catalogue followers, but also provide your clients with thumbnails of images and allowing them to choose which images if they want. So now that we're finished, let's save our contact sheets or choose File Save As from the menu. And we'll name this my contact sheets or type that in the name but the Save As box. And he wanted to surely you've navigated to the lesson files folder in your desktop. And then we'll click Save, Click OK. And then I think we're done with this. So I'll close this contact sheet by choosing File Close from the menu. 125. Using the Batch Rename Feature: One of the handy features of Adobe Bridge is the batch renamed feature, which allows you to rename all or a selected files in a folder. And Adobe bridges Adobe's file management application that automatically comes packaged with Adobe Photoshop. So to do so you launch Adobe Bridge from the menu. So let's do that. Certainly, display my doc temporarily and click on Adobe Bridge that you want to navigate to the folder that contains the images that you wanted to rename. So I'm gonna click desktop in the left pane here, double-click the lesson files folder and the folder that I want to read name as the Contact folder. So I'll select that. See a list of 22 images in this folder and we want to rename all of them. So we're going to choose Edit, Select All from the menu. And now we'll choose tools, batch rename. So from the batch renamed dialog window here we can choose to rename the files in the same folder, moves a newly renamed files to a different folder or copy the newly named files to a different folder. Additionally, you'll want to choose your file renaming elements. For instance, you may want to enable all of the pictures taken during a Chicago vacation, Chicago followed by the date or a three digit number. So this is kind of similar to the batch feature there'll be worked with in the earlier video, except that you are not applying any action to the images. You're simply renaming them. So where we wanted to do is move the renamed files to a different folder. So we're gonna select the second radio button out of the destination folder area, you're moved to other folder. Now we want to click the Browse button. What this will do is allow us to set our destination folder. So we're going to create a new folder. And we wanted to be the dozen files folder enough that this Contact folder. So let's click desktop in the left pane, double-click the lesson files folder, and then I'm gonna click the new folder button and I'm gonna name this Chicago. I will type that in and then click Create. So we have that folder open to them. I'll click open. So now we're going to choose how we're going to rename our files. So we went to ensure they're out of the loo filenames. Here the first row is set to text. So you'll click the drop-down list and then select text. And then in the second box we're going to type in Chicago. And we can see under the preview area of the dialogue here, What's the name of the file will look like using our current settings. Now if there's only one line here, but what you need to do, let me delete all these lines except for one. So there's only one line of the newfound m 0. You're going to click the plus symbol town to do an additional line. And for this we're going to do is follow the word Chicago with a three digit number. So we're gonna take the secondary drop-down list here in the second row and choose sequence number. We want to ensure that the number one is this period, the second box, and that's the third box displays three digits. So as we can see from assembled filename or files would be named Chicago zeros or one Chicago x2, x2, y2, et cetera. This is actually the file naming convention that I'll want to use. And I think the last thing we wanted to do is select the additional boxes out of the compatibility area to ensure that our fellow naming is compatible with Windows and unix. And that about does it. So now we click rename. We can see that the files are gone from this folder because we chose the Move option, smell effects like desktop, double-click lesson files folder, and then click Chicago, double-click Chicago. We can see our newly renamed images in the Chicago folder. So that's just a quick way to rename a folder images using Adobe Bridge. 126. Load Files Into Stack: Another scripts feature of Photoshop that I find handy is the load files and to stack feature and to access though you choose file pointer scripts, then choose load files into stack. But what this does is we'll load tour more images into the same Photoshop document, but place them in separate layers and the layers panel. I find that this comes in handy if you've taken a set of bracketed images, that is to say images shut a different exposures and then you can load all three exposures into the same document than bringing the lightest parts from when image and the darkest parts from another. This feature is also available in Adobe Bridge, but it's called something different to access that he was sucked the averages that you want to load than chooses the tools, Photoshop mode files into Photoshop layers. This would do this same thing, takes those three images and load them into the same Photoshop document in separate layers. So let's see how this works. So for fun, I went to Choose File Prentice scripts, then choose load files into stack. Now if you already have open files that were in separate tabs, you could do that huge choose those as well. But we're going to choose phallus on our hard drive server to click the Browse button here. You want to navigate to the lesson of files folder on our desktop. And here I have three bracket and images themselves in quarter one, quarter two, and South Dakota three. So I'm gonna select all three of those and then click open. So these are the files that I want to load into the same document, into separate layers, sort of uptake. Okay. So now if I wanted to bring out the grass from the image below this one, which is a little bit brighter than the grass I have here, I could add a Layer Mask. So let's click Theia third icon from the left, the bottom of the layers penalty the Layer Mask. And I'm going to be my capacity down to maybe about 20% or so. And you wonder showed the foreground color receptor black. Now I can bring in that grass from the photo underneath. And that could also bring in some of the sky from underneath as well. So you get the idea. So yes, that is how to load multiple images into the same photo, Photoshop document and place them into their own separate layers. So that can really come in handy depending on what you're trying to accomplish. 127. Auto Cropping and Straightening Images: Another one of photoshops automate feature that you might find handy is the auto cropping and straightening feature. So what this will do is allow you to create separate image files from multiple images on one scan photo, like we have here. For instance, you can play several images under scanner and then create a scan image from them. And that's what we did here. Then use the crop and straighten command to transform each of the images in the scan image into a single new photo. Each will then be placed under its own tab. You can even choose which images to separate from the scanned image by creating a border or the desired images using what a Photoshop selection tools. So if you'd like to follow along, we're working with the image names scan ab.js JPEG. And again, that's located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. So once the image is loaded, us choose File, point to automate, and then click, crop and straighten photos. And because see that Photoshop it did it very quickly. What I did was placed each of the images in its own tab. So basically what it did was fund the edges of each of those images in that scan photo crop to them and then rotated each image so that it's perfectly vertical or horizontal. So yes, this might come in handy for certain things. And note that photos with well-defined outlines work the best when using this feature. 128. Optimizing Images for the Web: A relatively recent feature that was added to Photoshop is the export as feature. And this allows you to export an image to multiple image sizes and formats. So from the export hours dialogue and you access that by choosing File export, then click Export. As for, you choose from a variety of file formats, PNG, JPEG, Jeff, or SVG, which is scalable vector graphics, can also specify the height to width, the scale of the image, canvas size, and choose which metadata to add. So let's say I chose up here g for this survey here and I'll preview window. You see what the images grew to look like once we export it. The two up tab here in the center pane displays the original JPEG image side-by-side with the optimized PNG image. You also have the option of the scaling the image if you wanted to. This is non-scalable. I get scaler to tooth times the original image or three times, up to three times. But we're gonna leave this as one. Another option on the export menu file export is the Quick Export does P and G option. And this allows you to quickly x part and the active images a PNG file, which is a common web format. So if we tend to save a lot of your Photoshop document's ID PNG format, that this is a quick way of getting those images saved onto your hard drive. Now, you can't change this format from Photoshop preferences. So if you're using a Mac, you would choose Photoshop Preferences and then choose export or Windows, you would choose Edit, print the preferences of the n choose x part. And the first option here is the Quick Export format. So if we tend to export most of your images in JPEG format, Jeff or SVG, that he can choose one of those options from the list. So if I chose J peg here and click OK. Now when I go to File Export, You see it's changed to Craig ex-partners JPEG. So now if I choose that, we can see that the image is being automatically saved in JPEG format. But again, to save it in a different format and resize it so that it can experiment with the pretty expert as feature. So again, you can save it in a variety of formats and said custom image dimensions. Another option on this side is the safer Web. Another, this is a legacy format and which means that it's probably going to go away at some point, you see better the same options that we have with the Save As feature. You can choose the file format or it doesn't include SVG, it does include W BMP. And here you also have the option of how much compression the quality of the image should do. See you. They do have some more options. From here, gets sent the image size, the quality, and we see the CMO to up, sorry, here we have the original format and the optimized format. We also have far up. So you'll see a preview of your images with a variety of different formats. Or I could choose this top right window as a JPEG. The bottom left window in Jeff format, and the bottom right window in P and G 24, the PNG 21st, similar to the jpeg formats though it doesn't compress as well as JPEG format and the PNG aid. This is similar to the JIF format except that animations can not be saved in this format. But again, this is probably going to be going away at some point, and I really don't tend to use it anymore. I typically use the Export as feature. As this is a quick way of exploiting an image and a specific file format and a specific size. 129. Using Libraries to Store Content: If you have content that you use often such as textiles layer styles are graphics that you might want to save them to the libraries. Panel. Items added to this panel allow you to store them so that you can quickly apply them to different Photoshop documents. Moreover, the assets that you saved, your libraries are automatically syncs to your Creative Cloud account so you can access them across your Adobe Cloud applications, as well as from any device on which you're logged into Adobe. So if the library's premises invisible, you want to choose window laborers from the menu and the maybe part of your docs or if it is, just drink it out so we can take a look at it. So the default library is named my library, and this one is automatically created for you when you install photoshop, you could add additional libraries, however, and you might wish to do so, especially if you have a lot of assets in different categories, such as for your various businesses, are various clients. All you might want to maintain a separate library for your Photoshop assets and your Adobe Illustrator assets to create a new library. And it's kicked a little left printed arrow here to move back to the main libraries pain and just click the plus symbol here and then type in a name for your new library. So by one i have a library that stores all of my assets for my client's name, Smiths, or it could just type in Smith Library and then click Create. And now I have that new Smith Library lay available. And as you can see in his empty, Let's go back to the My library library. And if we wanted to add images to your library soon after available at all of your creative cloud documents. You can drag them directly from your computer to the library's Pamela just dropped him right in the library. If you wanted to store elements such as text or their styles, you select the item in the layers panel that you went to save, then click the plus symbol and then choose the element that you want to add. So for instance, if you have a type layer selected, you can choose to add the text color, the foreground color, or the character type. Or you can even save the entire type layer as a graphic, which might come in handy for logos of signatures. So far, like we're working with image named wild underscore web dot PTSD, and that's a Photoshop document. And if your library's pedal is invisible, you wanna choose Windows libraries from the menu, then fostered the Library named my library. So let's add the image of this lioness to our library. So we'll select that image in our document. Or you can also click on the lioness layer in the layers panel to selected. And you want to click the plus symbol on the bottom of the layer Libraries panel and then choose graphic. And now we can see that image of the Linus has been added to our library. Next, let's click the title wild websites LLC on top of our document. Or again, you can click the type layer in the layers panel to select it and click the plus symbol again. Here we see some different options. Text, color, foreground color, Character Style or graphic. And worker to save the character style of this layer. So click character style from the menu and you can see that that's saved that style tore library. Stars create a new document. So we'll choose File New from the menu. And let's create a blame New Document that 700 by 525. So we'll type is 700 and the width box and then 525 in the box. We want to ensure that the backroom conscious is set to white and double click Create. So let's zoom in a little bit sort of necessary. You wanna choose window libraries statistically the Libraries panel. And to add an item from the library's penalty your document, you right-click the asset that you want to add and then choose how you'd like to add it, whether a place linked place, layers, et cetera. So what we wanted to do is right-click the graphic acid, the image of the lion. And then we're gonna choose place linked from the menu. This adds the lioness to the document and you could also transformative, reduces file size. You could also just simply drag it directly from the library to your document rather than right-clicking. Now let's right-click the character style acid there we added either one will choose use and document. And that adds that character style to our document. And as you can see, is way too big. And of course, we could reduce the sizes from the character panels, would just choose a window character for the Metaneira. And then right now it's set to a 44 pixels so we can go with 16. I'm gonna change the text, et cetera. So let's close the character parallel and let's close the Libraries panel. So yes, that is how to save unused assets using photoshops, libraries. 130. Important - Camera raw lesson files: So beginning with this set, should on-camera rocks are going to be using a completely different set of Lessing files. So what should you do if you'd like to follow along, is delete the lesson files folder from your desktop, the one that we've been working with us far. And then in the projects and resources tab on this class, you'll need to download the lesson files for this for this search hammer Ross section, I've included a link to the file as well as instructions at a 100 and set it out. Now the file is David camera dash Ra dash less than files and is compressed and zip format like the other lesson files were. And again, with most modern computers, or you need to do is double-click the file to expand its contents and save as previously, the top folder is named lesson files, and you wanted to copy this to computers desktop. And this folder contains all of the class images, kind of we'll be working with and the camera Ross section of this course. And if you have any questions at all about the resident files, don't hesitate to let me know. And now let's get on with camera. 131. Camera Raw: Introduction to Camera Raw: Camera is a filter in Photoshop is the place where you edit your rough photos. And this is exactly like Lightroom's Develop module. So if you've worked at all with Lightroom, you should be already familiar with many of the components of camera. Camera allows you to modify your images in a nondestructive manner. That is to say, any of the changes you make to an image law using camera rock are not permanent. He could always revert to the original. What do you make changes to an image using Camera Raw or you're really doing is providing camera raw instructions on how to modify the image. And these instructions are then saved in a separate Sidecar File. Thus, you are not changing the actual pixels of the file, but are only changing the instructions. To open an image camera RAF from within Photoshop, you choose Filter, Camera filter from the menu. And that brings us to the camera raw interface. And to exit camera would click okay, and that would apply any changes that you made while using the filter. But I'm just going to cancel out of here. And that brings us back to Photoshop. You're opening an image and rough format from photoshops File Open menu. So our chose file open from the menu, and then chosen image in raw format. And by the way, the images with the d and z extension or all that raw format. This is Adobe's proprietary rough for about each camera manufacturer has their own unique rod extension. For example, Night cons is NDF canons as either C or W or CR2, and Olympus is all RF. So opening our raw image will automatically open that image in the Camera Raw Filter rather than Photoshop. Whereas if you opened up by JPEG for instance, so as to say an image that is not in rough format, it would all put into Photoshop interface. But I'm going to cancel out of here. If you're in Adobe Bridge to me, open bridge here, you can right-click an image, then choose Open in Camera raw, and then we'll open it in the camera right interface. And again, you can make your changes here and there when you're finished because they could done. Or if you want to open it in Photoshop, after you've made your camera changes, you would click open and I'm just going to cancel out of here. Go back to our Photoshop window and I think I'll exit bridges. Well, you can also double-click an image that's in raw format to, to automatically open in Photoshop camera ROM. Now note that even though the name of the application is camera raw, you can modify other image types as well, such as JPEG or tiff. So let's open this image here and camera rostrum, which was Filter, Camera Raw Filter. And the slider is over here on the right paid or will you make changes to an image? So I could boost the exposure as some contrast. I could bring down the shatters a bit. And we're going to go over all of these sliders in upcoming videos. But I just wanted to show you that once you've made changes to an image, you can revert to the original state of the image by clicking the reset button, which only displays would you hold on the altar Option key. So right now we've seen two buttons here in the lower right corner, council and okay, I'm going to hold down the Option or Alt key. A cancel button transforms into a recent budget. This will receive everything back to 0 values as it was when you first opened camera raw. And I've already wanted to reset certain elements of the image. Again, I'll hold down the option key so I can hear. I can reset any detail changes that I made from the Detail panel. And he effects from the effects panel, etcetera. And again, we'll be looking at all of these and later videos. So because I opened this image directly from within photoshop, once I click OK, it will return me back to Photoshop and apply the changes that I made. But if I open an image directly in Camera Raw by using the file open command for instance. So let me open the red flower image here, which is a raw format to its extension DNG. If I make any changes to this image, I could click done and that will close the image and apply the changes. Or in other words, it closes the image when you're finished with them. And again, if you wanted to open it in Photoshop, that if it wanted to do some extra work to this image in Photoshop than there were to click open, but I'm just gonna close this image. So tap the commanded WQ store combination and I'm going to choose don't save such open another image, RA, RA using photoshops, follow-up and compounds which was File Open. And let's click the image of the monkey here, which is in raw format on the MOOC, click open. If I click on the link here in the bottom center of your screen, you'll see the settings that camera row we'll use to open into Photoshop. Here you can change the size and the color space and the bit depth if so desired. But know that this doesn't make changes to the raw file. The raw file will reflect the changes that you make and camera rock, but not in Photoshop. And, and if you're lucky, we also can set some raw defaults and file handling options as well. We see a sidecar file is embedded into an XMP file in the NG, just Council over there. So if you want to expert, you're a bridge or shared with others. And I click the Share icon here on the upper right corner of the window. And here we have some options. Save it to a new location or saving the same occasions. Sort of wanted to save this in a different location or click the Select Folder here, the navigates to the area when I wanted to save the image. Could also set some file naming options for right now, it's set to use the document name which has monkey and the date in month, day and year format. But you can change this if you'd like to click on the dropdown arrow and choosing the name convention that you want to use. And again, we'll be looking at this in our upcoming videos as well. You could also change the formats. We can save it in PNG format, photoshops format, TIF, JPEG, or digital negative. But we're not going to export this right now from the click cancel. One last thing I want to mention is that you can open up multiple files and camera rock. So let's click Done to close as image of his brings us back to the Photoshop interface, sorta, albeit a multiple raw files. It would choose file open from the menu, select the images that I wish to open. And to do so, you hold down the command key for using a Mac or Control key of using windows, and then select the images that you want to open. North, as I click on each file name that image becomes selected. Then if I click open, you can see that it open to those three images in camera. And I can click on his thumbnail here, the left pane to switch to that image. So I'm going to click the top image, the image of the lily here, and then click the cancel button. And that returns us back to the main photoshop interface. And that is how to open images in camera raw. 132. Camera Raw: Camera Raw Environment: In this video, we're gonna take a closer look at the camera raw environment. So free-falling Alon from photoshops main screen, we want to choose File Open from the menu. We want to navigate to the lesson files folder on our desktop. So I'll click desktop. We're going left pane, double-click the lesson files folder. And a file and we want to open is named red flower DNG. So we'll select that and we'll take open. Because the file is it raw, formatted automatically opens up and Photoshop camera rock. So as we can see, when you first open an image in Camera Raw, a preview of the image is displayed in the center window, along with the sliders in the Basic Panel on the right side of your screen. And this is the Basic panel right here. If I wanted to close the Basic panel, I would click on the word basic and that collapses that panel. And now we can see all of the other panels available in camera. Now if you've opened to more than one image, the active image is displayed in the center pane with a thumbnail of the other opened images displayed in the left pane as we saw in the previous video. On the right side of your screen here are all of your panels, and by default the Basic Panel is displayed I've opened when he launched camera Ra. And this makes sense as the majority of your work will be performed in the Basic panel. If you've worked at all with Adobe Lightroom, you may notice that the sliders and the Basic Panel in Camera Raw are identical to those in Lightroom's Develop module. So if you've worked with Lightroom, we should be familiar with all of these sliders. So to expand the panel, simply click on the pedals name to expand it. So I'll scroll down here. If you wanted to expand the Detail panel, I click on the word detail and how that panel is expanded in addition to the basic paddle. If I click on the color mixture panel, that panel then is also expanded. So as we see every time I click on a panel, that panel is all bid in addition to all of the other opening the panels. And that is because by default, camera opens panels in bold type panel mode. So if I right-click on the name of a panel, we can see from the contextual menu that monte-carlo mode is selected. We can also open a panel in single parallel mode, which is actually my preferred method. So what this does is opens one panel at a time. So right now I have the optics panel open. If I click on the word basic Tobin, the Basic Panel, only that panel is opened and then the other open panels are closed. Again, if I click on detail, now the Detail panel is open and the Basic panel is closed. Another option is opening panels in responsive parallel mode. And what this does is intelligently opens and closes panels to automatically fit your monitor. But we're gonna leave without single parallel mode for the time being. As I personally find that much easier to work with. So in addition to the Basic Panel, we have civil other additional panels we have we have the curved panel, which used to be called the Tone Curve panel. Detail panel, colored mixer, which used to be the HSL slash Grayscale panel, split toning optics, which used to be called the Lens Correction panel. We have the geometry panel, the effects panel, and then via calibration panel, which I used to be called a camera calibration panel. Now on the right savers creed is the toolbar and this used to be located on the top of your screen, but now the toolbar is located to the right of the panels pain. And this contains tools for editing your images. So the tools on top R. And notice that as you move your mouse pointer over a tool, a little screen tip tag appears telling you what that tool is. So by default, this is the edit tool which displays all of your edit panels. The next one is the crop and Rotate tool. Spot removal is next. Then comes the adjustment brush, the graduated filter tool, radial filter, the red eye removal tool, snapshots, presets, and then additional image settings. And we also have a few tools down below here we have the hand tool, and this allows you to power about in an image. If I had the zoom level set way high on this, I could pan around using the hand tool, but I'm going to click the zoom drop-down list here and choose fit in view which fits the image to our courage view. We also have the eyedropper tool, which is called the toggle sampler overlay tool. And then we have a grid overlay tool. And notice that all of these tools have keyboard shortcuts as well. So if I move my mouse pointer over the edit ICAD here we can see that the keyboard shortcuts for this tool is e. Likewise, the keyboard shortcut for the crop tool is C. Spot Removal tool is b x Sarah suitor returned back to edit mode on the top the E key on my keyboard and all of my edit panels now display foreigner to switch truly graduated filter tool of attempt the G key on my keyboard and now the graduated filter panel displays. But let's go back to edit view. So let's tap the E key on our keyboard. Focus to display your image in full-screen view. Top the F key on a keyboard to toggle that if for interviews to return to the previous view to help the F key again, you can also click the icon in the upper right corner of your screen to switch to full-screen view as well. And again, I can tap the F key to return to the previous view. If you wish to change the zoom to the center of the preview to a specific value. Click the zoom drop-down list on the lower left corner of the screen the error, and then choose the desired zoom level. So I wanted to zoom this tool. I want a 100%. I will click what, a 100% of the list. And now it is zoomed over a 100%. And every solid I can take that hand tool and then pass through the image. And this is helpful if you want to edit a specific portion of her image or view a specific portion of your image can also tap the controller command minus keys to zoom down or press the Command or Control. And the plus keys to X2 in out an image. And there was an, as I do, that percentage in the zoom box changes to let us know the zoom, new zoom level. So if you prefer to use keyboard shortcuts, you can change the zoom level using your keyboard. So again, if you're on a Mac, this command plus to zoom in and I manage or control plus if you're using Windows and to zoom out command minus on a Mac or Control minus on Windows. And subsequent lessons, we're gonna take a look at all of these panels and tools in much more detail. 133. Camera Raw: Viewing Before and After: When everything photos you may from time to time, wish to check on your progress by comparing the current state of the image with the original to spray the before image, tap the P key on your keyboard, a view of the original image before any edits appears in the center window. And then you click the PI again to display the after view, which is the current state of the image sort of falling on. You want to open the red flower D and G filed and the amount of text, the word basic to expand the Basic panel. So we're gonna click on the Exposure slider here and then we're going to drag it all the way up to about 1.10. And as we see this increase the exposure of the image. So let's tap the peak here are keyboard. This is supposed to be for view. And after, before adjustments. After our adjustments. You can also view before and after is split pin view by clicking on the cycle between before slash, after views icon. And that's of all four, that's this icon right here. Or by tapping the queue key on your keyboard. And each time you tap Q or proud or click the icon, the view will toggle through four different split-screen views. So if I tap Q on my keyboard, so here we have the before-after view was before the left, after the right, side-by-side. Q. Again, before, after we have a left, right split. Q. Again, before-after top a, bottom view, and q again before after top a, bottom split. And again, you can use your hand tool to pan around in the window. And the protect Q again, their returns us to normal view. So several different ways of viewing the before and after states of your image. 134. Camera Raw: The Basic Panel: The sliders in the Basic panel are both powerful and flexible, and it's in this paradigm. Many folks spent the majority of her time. The sliders and the Basic panel are excellent at fixing many exposure poems in images. If we take a look over here in the Basic panel, and if you don't see the word basic, you want to tap the E key on your keyboard to ensure that you're in edit view and that displays all of your edits panels. So again, we'll click on the word basic. So there are six exposure sliders and those are the sliders rate here and the basic paddle to help you fix images. Our underexposed, overexposed or those who have too little or too much contrast. And the first one of these is exposure, and this modifies the overall image brightness. So you drag the slider to the right to increase the brightness or to increase exposure, or to the left to darken your image or decrease exposure. And the next slider is the Contrast slider. And your drag this to the right to add contrast hearing image, or to the left to decrease contrast with the highlights later, you can brighten the highlights of your image by dragging to the right or dark in the highlights image by Greg here to the left. If your image suffers from highlights clipping, that is to say areas of your image. Oh, so brides, that some of the detail is lost. Tried reagan, this slider to the left to reduce some of that highlights clipping. Shadow slider works similarly to the highlights slider and drag to the left to darken the shutters, every image or to the right to light in the shadows. And again, if your image suffers from Shadows clipping, that is to say areas of the image are so dark and some of the detail is lost. Try dragging the shadow slighter to the right to reduce some of that to cleverly. And the last term exposure sliders here of the whites, of the blacks and the whites slider increases or decreases the White River image, allowing you to recover lost details due to our overexposed highlights. And the Black Spider increases or decreases the black arrows that are image, allowing you again to recover some of those lost or details due to underexposed channels. And the whites in the blogs gives you overall contrast. So a couple of more sliders we have doubt here. We have the texture slender, which adds texture to your image. And notice, notice how those details pop as I began dreg in this to the right. Likewise, the image becomes more blurry, giving you more of our dreamy feel. As I drag to the left, the Clarity slider goes into the mid tones and adds contrast. So again, as I drag to the right, but you see that the image becomes a lot more contrasty. Note that it can also add halos and desaturate your image. So you want to be careful of that. For the haze title will remove haze or fog from your image or add foggy for Dre or to the left. Notice that our image gets really, really hazy as a trigger to a left and a right or removes haze from the image. Note however, that as you drag to the right, it will start to destroy. Blue is in your image. So you might want to use selective adjustments to only out of, to certain areas that are image. What do you look at all of that in future videos? And the last two sliders in the Basic Panel or the Vibrance and Saturation slider. So vibrance begs the cause of the image pop. These are a little bit better for people photos or as saturation, you'll never want to use saturation on images that people are portraits and ends up providing moreover, sunburns look. And typically, uh, why do you want to saturate saturation anymore than ten or 15 or saw otherwise the colors and up looking really fake. So I want to reset all these adjustments that I may have something to hold down the option key on my keyboard. Or you would hold on the Alt key if you're using Windows. And then I'm going to click the word resets on the lower right corner of my screen. And though reset all of those sliders to their beginning state. So let's play around with a couple of these sliders. So if you're following along as during the exposure slider to the right to about 80 or so. And we can see that this increases the brightness or the exposure of the image. So now let's click on the little box to the right of the word contrast. And this is another way of adjusting a slider is by typing in a value, the sliders box. So you're gonna type in plus eight in the box. That increases the contrast Slater by eight levels. So now it's tough. The peak here, a keyboard in history of the before and after. So this is before, after, before, after. So now we want to hold down the option key. If you're on a macro ALT key for using Windows, then we'll click reset of the bottom right corner. The pain, nausea, all the sliders now are zeroed out, which is the original state of this image. So I think we're done with this image, so we'll click the Done button and that closes the image hoses camera and returns us to the main Photoshop window. 135. Camera Raw: Choosing a Camera Profile: In this video, we're going to work with camera profile. So if you're following along, you want to open the image named yellow flare and that's locally in the lesson files folder in your desktop. So for the main Photoshop screen hearing or choose file open from the menu, then navigates to the lesson files on my desktop. So I'll click desktop in the left pan. Double-click lesson files, and the name of a file is yellow flower. That's the last file on my screen here, then I will click open. And because it is a raw format, it's in ID and GIF format, which is Adobe's raw format, which stands for Digital negative graphics. So given that it's a raw image and opened directly in camera raw. So if you're shooting in raw format as comparator JPEG, your files may appear dull and lackluster. And the reason for this is that you are in essence telling your camera not to make any color or exposure adjustments in camera. That is to say the images are not processed in the camera at all. Now when shooting in JPEG format, however, the kMer tries to correct the image to make it look the best as possible. One huge advantage of shooting in raw format is always that you have much more flexibility when it comes to post-processing your images, especially as far as white balance is concerned. So when you first open and imaging camera or ross, Some people like to apply an Adobe Rob profile, such as Adobe vivid or Adobe landscape to their image as a starting point. And you access the profiles from the profile drop-down list here, thus low candidate in the Edit panel. So if I take the profile, drop their nest here we can see all of the Adobe profiles available. So I could choose a derby landscape and a pinup profile to the image. Let's try it again, except this time let's go with Adobe vivid. So you can experiment with some of these until you find the looks that you're looking for. Now there are however, several other categories of profiles and you can use to access them. You click the profile drop-down list and then choose browse from the contextual menu. So here we see several other categories or profiles such as a camera matching. We have Adobe Ra, we have artistic. So if we scroll down, we can see that the various artistic profiles, and those are as I move my mouse over the profile thumbnails, the preview image in the center pane changes to reflect what it would look like without profile applied. If it come across a profile that you like, just click it and that profile is now applied to that image. Now if there's a profile, you especially like you can add it to the favorites category by moving your mouse pointer over the profile and they click on the little star and the upper right corner of the image of a click of the star heroes have profile has now been favorited. So if I move up to the top here, and this is the favorites categories, the first category, the profile pane. We can see all of the profiles that I've added as favorites. And to remove a profile for virulence again, you just click the little star icon on the upper right corner of the thumbnail. So for profile window is becoming cluttered. You can actually hide profiles at she'll rarely roots. So to do so, right-click edit profile and then choose managed profiles from the contextual menu. And here you can uncheck any profiles that you wanted to hide because he had his legacy profile over here on the right page. So if I uncheck it, then click OK. legacy profile is no longer displayed. So what's interesting about profiles is they don't override any of your existing slider settings. For instance, if you apply a preset to your image, the preset will change all of the sliders that you may have set. Profiles, on the other hand, act as an additional layer over your current settings and do not overwrite anything that you've already done with the edit sliders and tags are the profiles area. You can click the little back button in the upper left corner of the images are begs us back to the main edit paid. So that's using a profile is as often profiles can provide an excellent starting point for editing your images. 136. Camera Raw: Adjusting Image Exposure: So now we're going to start working with the individual sliders of the basic panel. And in this video, we're gonna look at adjusting image exposure. Now I have this image of a screening from the last video. I, what I wanted to do is revert back to the original state of the image before I applied a profile. To do so, I hold on my Option key because I'm using a Mac. If you're using a Windows, you would hold on the Alt key. And notice that the cancel button in the lower right corner of the screen changes to reset. And notice that the word profile also changes to reset. So this allows us to just receptor profile to the where the image was originally. Not unduly any of our other adjustments that we might have made using the Basic Panel or the curved panel. But I actually went to reset everything. So I'm gonna click Reset here on the lower right corner. And the image is back to the way it was originally. So for this video on exposure, we're going to be working with the file named insight of flour. So I'm gonna click done here just to closes image. And then for the Photoshop main screen, I'll choose File Open and orders. You could also press TO command to all keystroke combination if you're using a Mac or Control overviews in Windows. And if you're not there, you want to navigate to the lesson of files folder on your desktop. And we're going to choose the file named signup flower tool. And we're gonna select that and click open. Now notice that this image opened up in Photoshop or rather than Camera Raw. And that's because the file is in JPEG format rather than rough format. Only images. A RAW formats such as DNG and EF, CR2, etcetera will automatically open up in camera. So to work on this J piggy bank account, but rather we want to choose Filter, Camera filter from the menu that exist to cover row. You want to start out by expanded the Basic panel. So we'll click on the word basic to expand the panel. And now we're going to click on the Exposure slider here and then drag to about, I will go to about 1.20 or song. And we can see that a considerably brightens up the image. And you can also scrubbed the slider by clicking on the word di exposure and then draining to the left or right. So if I click on the word exposure and drag to the left, notice that I am decreasing the exposure of the image and notice the little exposure box. We can see the values changing as I drag. So I'll drag this down to about 0.80 and that looks good. So if we wanted to receptors, I could just type in 0 in the exposure box that would be set its values to the default value. Or you can hold down the option key if you're using a Mac or the ALT key if using a Windows, and if you wanted to just reset the slightest of the Basic Panel, click Reset basic. And again we see all the other options down here, reset curve, recent detail, et cetera. But I think I want to leave this as is an aligned to actually apply those exposure changes to the image. So I'm going to click OK. And because we opened the image from within photoshop, fun is to say that image was first opened in Photoshop and then we went to our camera Rob. Once we click OK and covering array, it returns us back to Photoshop. So the next video we're going to take a look at contrast. 137. Camera Raw: Adjusting Contrast: In this video, we're going to look at adjusting contrast, but we're going to be working with a different image of this video. So I'm going to close the image that I have on my screen. So if you're using Windows, tap to control w keystroke combination or commanded w if you're using a Mac and that will close the active image and they don't want to save these changes. I'm gonna click don't save server falling allow you want to open the image named ruins from the lesson files folder on your desktop. So you wanna press Command O if using a Mac or control OF using Windows to be run and navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. And the family went to open. It is called ruins dot D and G. And this is a raw image and this image right here. And then we'll click open. So if her image appears flat, adjusting the contrast may help. Using the Contrast slider, you can increase or decrease the images contrast, increasing contrasts makes the light pixels lighter and decreasing the contrast makes the dark pixels darker. In other words, it increases the potency of the whites and blacks given your photos and extra bit of pop. As you change the contrast, you'll notice something left and right edges of the histogram. And the histogram is right over here on top of this pain. As you're turns a contrast you'll notice on the left and right edges of the histogram will adjust accordingly. So if I drag that Contrast slider to the right, we can see that the histogram adjusting and drag it to the left. The histogram moves in the opposite direction. So the history of the left edge of the histogram represents the blacks and the right edge that represents the whites. Certainly gonna set this to zeros. I'm a type 0 and the contrast box. The first thing I'm gonna do to this image is boost up the exposure a little bit. It's a little dark. So I'll click the Exposure slider and drag it up. And we probably want to go maybe to about 1.40 or solve. And now lets out a little bit of contrast to the image. So we went to click the Contrast slider and then drag to the right. Maybe we'll go to about 20 or so. That looks pretty good. And you can see that by adding contrast to the image really pops a lot more than it did before the adjustment. 138. Camera Raw: Adjusting Image Clarity: Another type of contrasts that you could adjust is clarity, which is also referred to as local contrast. We saw in the previous video that the Contrast slider adjusts the black and white pixels of your image. The Clarity slider, on the other hand, modifies the mid tones of your image, which is the middle area here of the histogram. And this again could really help that makes the image details pop. It provides someone who's sharpening effect and comes in especially handy for adding contrast to clouds or adding a bit of extra drama to your images. It gives a sharp look while taking out some of the saturation. You use the Clarity slider for those errors. Images of the contrasts later doesn't change. Note that in most cases it's best to avoid increasing clarity. And the images of people are portraits as it can enhance skin texture and wrinkles, creating a harsh look which isn't usually, what do we want unless you're aiming for some sort of grungy effect, the clarity has started. We'll also add contrast to those areas of the image that are blurred, which again, may not be what you want. Many people like to reduce the clarity and images of people are portraits by dragging the Clarity slider to the left and it adds kind of a softening effect to the image. So on our screen here we have that ruins D and G images WE worked with in the last video. So if you don't have that up on the screen, you'll want to open it. And again, that's located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. And in the last video, we adjusted the exposure on the contrast of the image. So now let's increase the clarity a bit on the Clarity slider is right down here, right below the texture slider. So I'm gonna click on the Kerry. I'm, I drag to the right and maybe we'll go to about 15 or so spring instead of the mid tones over image really pumped. So let's take a look at the before and after of this image. So we want to tap the P key on your keyboard. So this is before, after, before, after. So quite a difference. So I think we're done with this image for the time being. So I'm gonna click the done button on the lower right corner of the screen, added that closes the image and returns us back to the main Photoshop screen. 139. Camera Raw: Adjusting Vibrance and Saturation: This video we're gonna look at adjusting vibrance and saturation. And for that we're going to open up the incentive flower to image that we worked with earlier from a Choose File, Open recent. And I'm gonna choose inside a flower to not. If you don't have that image listed here, you would choose File Open, then navigates to the lesson files folder in your desktop and then open it from there. So I'm going to choose the image. And again, because it's a JPEG image, it opened in Photoshop rather than camera Rob. So this time, in order to open his image in camera, I'm going to use the keyboard shortcut command Shift a if you're using a Mac or control shift a if you're using Windows Server to hold down my command key, press the Shift key, and then tab a. That opens the imaging camera. So this is a good keyboard shortcut to memorize, especially if you go back and forth a lot between camera and Photoshop. So two sliders that you can use to boost the color of your images of the Vibrance and Saturation sliders for the agains are located in the Basic Panel on the array to down here. Typically, you'll use one or the other of these sliders, but usually not both as a work in different ways. The vibrant slider causes DLT colors to become more vivid, but the changes have cars that are already vivid are pretty much minimal. And what's nice about the vibrant slider is that it avoids changing skin tones. So it's an ideal slider to you, is if there are people in your image, this slider is also very good at helping blues to come out of a washed-out sky. Now the saturation slider intensifies all of the colors in an image equally, not just UDL ones, including skin tones, and makes them more vivid. So typically you won't want to use it on people. Pictures are portraits on the ship. She would like fluorescence skin. Many people refer to this slider as the sun burden slider. Saturation cyber is also an excellent way of removing color from your image. So if I drag this slider all the way to the left, we can see that all the color is removed from this image. I like to use a saturation started to enhance all the colors in the image, especially when working with landscape photos, solar, if you're falling alignments, clicking the vibrance box here, and I'm gonna type in eight. This increases the vividness of the more muted colors that's driven a little bit more to the right. And we can see that the muted colors become a lot brighter as I drag, but I wanna leave this out about eight or so. So then we want to bring the saturation slider all the way to the left. So I'm going to drag that. And again, I removes all the color from the image. But I want to reset the saturation slide into the whale was before. And to do so, you can double-click on any of the sliders to reset it to 0 values. We already saw that you can pull up the Option or Alt key and then choose Reset, but don't want to reset all of the sliders and the basic paddle, just a saturation. So I'm gonna double-click on the little saturation slighter here. We can see that a reset it back to a 0 value. So I think I'm happy with this. I'm going to take okay. And that closes the image or returns us to Photoshop. 140. Camera Raw: Removing Haze from an Image with Dehaze: I'll welcome future in Camera Raw is that the haze tool, which is found in the Basic panel was da, is you can decrease the amount of fog or haze in an image. So I have I hazy image at our national Files folder. So we're gonna choose file open from the Photoshop manual. And again, you want to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. And the image that we want to open it is entitled Hayes, D and G. And again, this is a raw image. So it opens directly in camera rock for the haze slider is located right here in the Basic panel, and it's also available when working with the radial filter, the graduated filter or the adjustment brush. So if I click Done the adjustment brush here we can see the D Hayes slider as what are the options and we're gonna get into that in future videos. I should drag through the haze slighter to the right, haze is removed from the image. So if you're following along, let's click over the Haha slider and drag it to the right. We can see the haze diminishing from the image. Note however, that this slider does tend to increase the blues in the image. So you don't want to drag the slider too far to the right. So I think I want to go probably about maybe 67 or so. Notice stuff via this part of the image is starting to become quite blue. So now let's click the graduated filter. I kinda, That's right over here on the toolbar. That's a little square icon here. And if you move your mouse pointer over it, little tooltip pops up, letting us know what that tool does. You can also have the G key on your keyboard if you prefer, I'm gonna click the icon. So I'm gonna drink the Exposure slider to the left by this one. And we're going to go into much more depth with this tool a little bit later, but I'm just gonna give you a little preview of how it works in conjunction with the haze slider. And I'm gonna pick at the top center of the image up on top here and drag down maybe about a third of the way down. That applies the graduated filter to that area of the image. So it was during that the histogram to the right to about 20. And what that does is removes the haze from the area of the image within the graduated filter here. Now as we remove the haze but rigor to the right because he though this early here became quite blue. So let's reduce some of the blues of the image by turning down the saturation. So I'm gonna scroll down here. So I'm gonna click on the saturation cider and drag it to the left to about minus 20. So that reduces some of the blues in the area of the image within the graduated filter. So let's take a look at the before and after this image. So I'll tap the peak here, my keyboard before, after, before, after. So quite an improvement. So I'm happy with his image for the time being, suddenly click the Done button in the lower right corner of the window to close the image and apply our changes. 141. Camera Raw: Adjusting Shadows and Highlights: We saw that when adjusting the image exposure using the exposure site or the entire image lightened or darkens as you move the slider to the left and right. You can't, however, adjust only the highlights and the shadows of an image using the highlights and shadows slider. And that's what we're going to look at in this video. And for that we're going to open a different image. So from the Photoshop main screen here, much was file open. And again, you'll want to navigate to the lesson on Files folder on your desktop. We're going to open the image named Lily. And that's this image right here is Lily dot d and g, a raw image. And then we'll click open. So the highlights and shadows sliders are right over here in the Basic Panel. And the highlight slider allows you to lighten or darken only the highlights have inImage. You drag the slider to the left to darker the highlights, and to the right to brighten the highlights of an image. If your photos suffers from highlights clipping, that is to say, when areas are so bright as some of the detail is lost. Tried reagan this slider to the left to help reduce some of that to clipping. Now the shadow slider here works the same way who drink or to the left, to darker shadows or to the right to lighten them. Again, if your phone was suffers from Shadows, clipping photos to say when areas of the image are so dark that some of the detail is lost, you'll want to try dragging the slider to the right to reduce that clipping with the image of the lily on our screen, we want to click on the highlights box here that we want to type in eight. And this increases the highlights of the image to plus eight. And I think I wanted to reduce some of the shadows as well. So let's click the shadow slider and drag it to the left, two above minus 25 i because see, some of those shadows darkening in the image, the darker areas of the image are getting darker. So we'll go to about here, minus 25. So again, let's take a look at the before and after. So p, before, after, before, after. Little bit of a difference, not too much, but we can see these fighters brought up the highlights and then increased the shadows of the image. 142. Camera Raw: Adjusting Blacks and Whites: Directly below the highlights and shadows sliders, you'll find two additional sliders, the whites and the blacks sliders. And with these two sliders, you can recover lost a details in overexposed highlights or underexposed shadows and gain some of the details back in those areas of blacks and whites, sliders introduce localized contrast and a black and white areas of your image. The white slider controls the brightest areas of your image, whereas the black slider controls the darkest areas of your image. Now, if you drink the white slider to the left, you can make the red clipping warnings disappear. If you have them turned on, turn off the highlights and shadows clipping, you click the little box on the upper right are upper left corner of the histogram. The box of the upper-left corner, the histogram will turn on Shadows clipping. So if I click it and it details due to Shadows clipping will be displayed in blue ever kids see that I have some blue areas of the image radio. If I drag the black slider even more, notice that bar and more detail is lost. And more and more areas of the image are filled with blue, letting us know that these areas of the image are clipped. So now let's turn on the highlights clipping warnings by clicking the box in the upper right corner of the histogram. So the Alfred rigged the widespread or to the right and the areas that become clipped or displayed it red. So when you have these warnings turned on, you see a little bit of red in your image. You want to trap dragon, the white slider to the left to remove or reduce some of that Clippy. And likewise, you would drink the black slighter to the right to get rid of Shadows clipping. And because see there was a drink or the right, the blue areas of the image disappear. Or you can also use these two sliders to set the white and black point of your image, which expands the tonal range and works as a great starting point. It also provides a uniform basis upon which to edit your photos. And some photographers have the white and black print for every image that they work on sorta set the white part is you hold down the option key if you're using a Mac or the ALT key of using windows, and then drag the white slider to the right until the first specks of colour appear. So I'm gonna hold on my Option key because I'm using a Mac if you're using Windows, hold on the Alt key and illustrate the weiss letter to the right. So I'm going to drink the white stone until you first see specks of colors about right there. And then we'll just release our mouse printer. The black point works the same way. So again, behold the older Option key, I'm going to drink the black slider to the left until first specks of colour appear. So here we see a first flexor black appear. So just sort of right to there. So I think I want to bring down the whites of this image a little bit. So take the white starter and I'm drink to the left. Maybe to about, let's go 15. Then my drink a black slider to about minus fighter because some of the blacks a little bit. So yeah, using the blacks and whites luxury, get rid of some of those pesky clipping areas of your image. 143. Camera Raw: Using Auto Tone: When just starting out with an image, you might want to try camera RAS, auto adjustment feature, which adjusts various tones sliders in the Basic panel. Now sometimes Kamaroi does a really good job at guessing the optimal settings. Other times not so much, but it's worth giving it a try it to do sort of clicks the auto button at the top of the Edit panel to apply the automatic settings to your image. And don't worry if you don't like the way a look, she could always press Command Z if using Mac or Control Z if using Windows to undo that last adjustment. Now, Zoe will most likely need to still customize the corrections. Auto often provides a good starting point and many people like to start with the auto and then further correct from there. So let's reset this image back to its original settings. So you want to hold down the option key of using a Mac or the old key of using windows, and then click Reset on the lower right corner of our screen, returns us to the original image settings. So now let's kick the auto button on the Edit panel. And if you don't see the edits, probably you want to tap the E key on your keyboard, and the auto button is right here. So let's click it. And we're gonna see that Kamaroi automatically adjusted various tone sliders here and the Basic panel. So if we're happy with the way the image looks, we'll click Done to close the image, I return back to Photoshop. 144. Camera Raw: Adjusting the White Balance: In this video, we're going to look at how to adjust the white balance in an image. The white balance setting allows you to adjust the overall color temperature of your photos. And many photographers adjust the white balance first before making any other adjustments. So for falling along, you want to open the image named yellow flare, D and G. And again, this little kid in the lesson of files folder on your desktop. So if you have the Photoshop main screen, you want to choose File Open and then navigate to that image. So the first thing I wanted to do is I want to reset all of the letters of this image to their original state. That is to say the wheel was the first time we open it. Now we've already worked a little bit with the recenter button. So let's say I'd read this exposure all the way up. And we can see though a clarity slider is also is out plus 20, fibers is a plus 17, and blacks is at plus 51. So now for how long the Option or Alt key, and then click Reset, we see that the Exposure slider zeroed out. But the other settings, blacks, Clarity and Vibrance are as still as they were when I first opened. It knows because the reset botch, it only works for the current session of camera. I want to reset all of this sliders to the way they were originally, has to send the first time you open this image, you want to click on the three dots here in the toolbar and then choose reset to default, we see other options as well as we said, if to open, which is we set it to the way I wasn't resulted or the previous conversion. So that's reset to default. That removes all of the adjustments made to this image. So on too wide to balance. So to change the white balance, you click the drop-down list on top of the basic panel next to the words white balance. And we will, once we do, we see we have several options here As Shot Auto, Daylight, Cloudy Shade, Tungsten, Fluorescent, flash, custom. Now note that all of these options are only available if referred or is it a raw format? If you process your photo as a JPEG or a TIF, the only options available will be As Shot, Auto and custom. So if I shoved his image on a shady data would choose shade for the list and that adjust the white balance accordingly. Let's try daylight. And we can see a little change in the white dawns. Let's go back to its original setting as a shot first one in the list. Another method for adjusting white balance is to use the White Balance tool, which is the eyedropper icon right here to the right of the white fellows drop-down list. Once the tool is activated, you click on something in your image that you know should be neutral, such as an item that is gray or brown. When you click on that area, that temperature and ten Slater's will change color, correcting the image in the process. And again, if the changes are not what you want, you could always take the white balance drop-down list and then choose As Shot to return to the original values. So let's click on the white balanced dropper icon here. And we see we can also tap the icky and I keyboard. So let's click on a brown area of re-image, maybe or eight here. And we can see the temperature and tint sliders adjusted accordingly. I didn't really like that's what's undo that by tapping Control Z of using Windows or command z if using a Mac. Let's try this area over here. That's a little better. So let's hear gonna before-after over image. So that's tapped the peak here and a keyboard. So we have before, after, before, after. Now, instead of using the white balance drop-down list or the eye dropper tool, you can just manually adjust the temperature or the ten sliders and the Basic Panel until the image looks good for you. If I drag the temperature to the right here, you can see that it begins to warm up the image. Again, temperature that are left as blue to the image, thus providing a cooling effect. But the ten slider regularly to slider to the left adds green to the image. Whereas drag it to the right, ads magenta. So you're gonna have 0 of the tint slider and the temperature slider. Let's try adjusting the temperatures title. Let's drag it to the right to about maybe 5600 or so. Now that is look too bad. So let's do a before, after, before, after little adjustment. And I think that other modelling for white balance. So we'll click the Done button on the bottom of our screen to close the image and apply our changes. 145. Camera Raw: Changing Color in an Image: In this video, we're going to look at how to change color in an image. And we're going to open up the file num to mural in the lesson files folder on our desktop. And this time we're going to open the file into Camera Raw directly from Adobe Bridge. So to do so we wanna click file, browser and bridge, and this opens up the Adobe Bridge application. So then you want to click the Desktop folder in the left pane, double-click the lesson files folder on the following. Wanted to open this file read here called a mural. So we want to select and then choose File Open and camera. And that opens a selective image and camera. So you change the individual color in an image from a color mixture panel, and that's his power right over here. So if I click it and expands the panel, the shoes to be called the HSL panel, but there has been renamed to the latest version of camera to Color Mixer. So from the HSL and the color sections here, you can adjust the hue, saturation and luminous of a specific color in your photo. So once you've disappeared the HSL tab of the colored mixture panel, and you do that, I click in the drop-down list here and choosing a HSL can also choose color, but we bought HSL For the moment. You then click the hue tab, the saturation tab, and the aluminums tab on top of the panels. And then Greg, the sliders for the college want to change until the desired effect is attained. So from the hue tab is changes the actual color. So if I drink the rest letter all the way to the right, we can see that the reds in the image changed to an orange, drink it to the left, and changes to more of a dark pink saturation tab, which has a center tab here, increases or decreases the intensity of the color. So this is a global adjustments are very greg the reds, it will change all of the reds in the image of a trigger to the left, it will saturate all of the reds and the image. And the luminance tab will change the brightness and darkness of the color. So let's say I wanted to increase the saturation of the blues and leverage over click the saturation tab and then click the blue slider to the right until the colors or the way that we want can also try drawing the awkward and that affects it a little bit as well. So again, click the Designer tab, hue, saturation or luminous depending on what you want to accomplish. And then drag the slider for the car that you want to modify. So another option is choosing the color from the adjusted drop-down list here. So let me click that and choose color. So it's basically does the same thing as the HSL tab. It's just a different way of doing it. So again, if we wanted to modify the blues in the image and click the blue dot here. And then we have three sliders that hue, saturation and luminance. So I could drag the slider to the right. We can see that the blue is in the image become much more saturated. But wanted to change the color of the blues. I can click the hue slider and drag it to the right or the left. Notice the color of those blues changing as I drag the saved for the luminance, which again changes the brightness and darkness of the color. Sorry, we could drag that to the right or to the left. Now if you go to the graduated filter, the radial filter or the brush tool on the which we'll be talking about in future videos. You could also selectively adjust they, you, and this is our new and very welcome future camera. So let's take the graduated filter icon here in the right pane and the hue area is right here. So I click the dual dots here and then adjust the hues of the image so I can select the hue that I want. And then if I apply the graduated filter into the image, we can see that the area that is covered by the graduated filter is modified. And the same works for the adjustment brush or the radial filter. So you can brush on a specific hue in certain areas of your image. So that's a quite handy feature. Let me reset what we've done here. So let's work a little bit with this together. So for following along, I'm gonna tap the E key on your keyboard to make sure that we're in the edit pane. And then we wanna click the words color mixture to expand the Color Mixer panel next from you just dropped or less will choose HSL. That gives us our individual color sliders where the three tabs, hue saturation and luminance. So let's cut the hue tab and let's drag the red slider to the right to about 75 or so because see that that changes the red color in the image to orange. Now we went to increase the saturation of those oranges. So to do so, we'll take the saturation tab, then drink the red slider to the right to about plus 60. That increases the intensity of that color. Although it could also drag the oranges slider to the right for additional saturation. Next, we'll work with the luminance. So we'll click the luminance tab. But this time we want a drink the red slider to about 30 or so to increase the luminance that increases the tone brightness of the Reds. So now let's switch to the color era. So I'll click the adjust, dropped her list and choose color. So we want to cut to the Aqua dot here, and that's this color died right here. And let's increase the saturation of the awkward or image. So we're gonna click their saturation slider and drag to the right, drag it all the way to a 100%. And let's modify the luminance of this color as well. So a drug aluminum dishonor to the left. So it is minus 100, but I decided I liked it a little bit better when it was red. So we want to click the red button here, red colored dot. And we're going to drink the hue to the left a little bit too about Southerners. So I don't wanna do that quite as saturated sort of Madrid, the saturation slider to the left, to the saturate that a little bit. And maybe during the luminance to the right to about 60. So now let's do the before and after over image. So we'll tap the peak here at our keyboard. Before, after, before, after. So quite a difference. So yes, using the current mix for pantry can easily change the colors in your images. 146. Camera Raw: Changing Color from the Calibration Panel: In this video, we're gonna take a look at the calibration panel. So for falling all you want to click the word calibration under the editor area. So again, we'll tap the Iike and a keyboard or switch to the editor area and then click Calibration. This parallel is fit into a few sections. So starting from the bottom, we have blue primary, Green Primary, read primary, and shadows tint. There's also the process drop-down list on top of the panel. So the red, green, and blue primary hue and saturation sliders adjusts the overall color mixing your image, adjusting the RGB values here differs from changing the values in the car mixture panel because these effects the overall different niches of red, green, or blue, for instance, changing reds and the Color Mixer panel will target areas of the image that appear red, whereas changing resin, the calibration panel will affect all the pixels that contain red in their mix. I find that sometimes using the RGB primary sliders in this panel can work well for skin tone correction, especially when adjusting the HU values. You'll want it to be careful though and only make very delicate Hugh adjustments. Additionally, it's always a good idea to calibrate your monitor before making any such adjustments, sort of falling along. Let's work a little bit with these sliders. So let's drink the blue primary. Who's slider to the right tool, maybe 85 or so. So we can see that the hue of the blues in the image have changed. So next we'll modify the saturation of the blue primaries. So a drug, the saturation slider to the right, logo 85 again. Next let's drink do read primary hue slider. Let's trigger to the left and we can see how the ridge change. We drag. So that's what we wanted about minus 50 or saw up here is the shutters tint slider. And this one is a little bit more straight forward as it will only change the car cast the shadows have with green and magenta canceling each other out. So because see, the shift is very minor as I drag this back out. Lastly, on top of this panel is the process drop-down list. And this will change the entire process engine that camera raw uses. So AAPOR told now, Adobe has modified the process engine five times, which is why there are currently five options. By changing this to a different process will affect everything, including which sliders are displayed in the Basic panel. So it's recommended to leave this up. The most recent setting which is marked with the word current and parentheses. So yes, the calibration panel. And you know, most people never use this panel as it's kind of a tech intensive panel, as we've seen from here. We can tend to things one way or another. And the same with the primaries. We can shift the you in one direction or another and then control the amount of saturation for that hue that you're shifting. So just another option of modifying the colors in your image. 147. Camera Raw: Straightening an Image: If your image is crooked or a little bit off kilter, it can use the straighten tool to fix it in one click. The straighten tool is located under the crop tool that's right over here, the tool bar. This is the crop tool. The second one from the top. This region tool is this little icon and the angle area. So we're going to work with a different image. So I still have the image open from the last video. So I'm going to cancel out of here and go back to Adobe Bridge. And if you're not in bridge, but rather in the main Photoshop screen, choose file, browser and bridge from the menu. And that will bring you to Adobe Bridge. Then you want to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. So the image that we're going to open is the image named moon dot D and G is a raw file. So that's this image right here. So we're going to right click it and then choose Open and camera. So how the straighten tool works is that you click it and then draw across an area of your image that you think should be straight, such as a straight line or along a horizon camera, well, automatically straighten and crop the image. So if you're following along, you'll want to click the Crop icon on the toolbar here. And again that's a second icon from the top. Then we want to clip the straighten tool to activated. Notice that we can also tap the a key on our keyboard. And that's drag across the line of the horizon. So, and then I'll release my mouse button, then tap the Enter key on my keyboard and the image is automatically straightened. So I'm assuring you another way of storytelling, and we're just really wanna press Control Z if using Windows or command z if using a Mac to undo that last action that we performed. You could also, rather than drawing a line, a crusher image, simply double-click the straighten icon on camera or try to straighten the image. And often it has a very good job. And of course, if it doesn't, then he can just draw a line across the image to choose the areas that should be straight. But in this case it had quite a good job. So yes, the street and tool very handy in fixing those off kilter images. So I think we're done with this image so that it clicks the button button and then we'll choose a W bridge. Quit adobe bridge. They'll brings us back to our main Photoshop screen. 148. Camera Raw: Cropping an Image: In this video, we're gonna look at how to crop an image. And for that we're going to open a different file. So for falling, allow gonna choose file, browser and bridge for the menu. The name of the file that we want to open is the file named fly data JPEG, JPEG file. So I'll right-click it and then choose Open in Camera. So with the crop tool, which is located right here, it's a second icon from the top of the toolbar, you can isolate an area of an image I remove unwanted portions on the top, bottom, and sides. To do so, you click the Crop tool and then drink a bar k0 around the area of the image that you wish to keep. And to think outside of the selected area will be deleted. So limit dreg around this dragon fly here, I'm going to release my mouse button and begin to see that the areas outside of the bounding box here are darkened. And that lets us know that these will be the areas that will be removed. Now after you draw your mark key, you can further positioned the crop by clicking inside of the bounding box and then just dragging, you can reposition the image around in the box so that once you're happy with the crop, can just tap the Enter key on your keyboard or the confirms the crop. Those areas are no gun. Now one thing to keep in mind is cropping is non-destructive. So you could always go back to the way it was originally. So let's click the Crop. I kinda get in the toolbox and we can see those areas are displayed though just dimmed out. So if I wanted to reset the crop, that is to say return to its original state, I can click the Reset Crop tool that says icon right here, right to the right of the word crop on top of the panel. So let's click it. Restores the crop. If we need to constrain your crop to a specific aspect ratio, you could do so by choosing the desired aspect ratio from the drop-down list here. So if I chose 16 by nine, we can see that our crop area automatically adjusted to fit that aspect ratio. And if I drag any of these cropping handles, which is another way to crop an image, that aspect ratio remains. So though I can further crop the image, it will always be cropping using that 16 by nine aspect ratio. If you need to crop to our custom aspect ratio, since the aspect ratio drop-down list and then choose Custom. And here you can enter the values in the boxes. So if we wanted to crop to a four by five aspect ratio, click OK. We are now cropped to that aspect ratio. And note that this is not crop into an image size. This is clapping only to an aspect ratio. So in other words, four by five is the same as H by ten. So let's reset the crop again. Let's tap the escape key on your keyboard that returns us back to our normal mode here. So let's again click the Crop icon in the toolbar. And because see that immediately camera places these sizing handles around the image and these are crop handles. So rather than drawing them are key I run the error is of the image that we wanted to keep. We could drag these crop handles until the desired area of the image is in the bounding box. And again, we can click inside the box to further pan around and set our crop area. So once we're done, then again, he would tap the Enter key on your keyboard, or you could click Done in the bottom of the screen here. But let's reset our crop again, so I'll click the reset icon. There are also some overlays or you can display to help you crop your image to specific guidelines, sorta do so tough the V key on your keyboard. And by default, the rule of thirds overlay displays. So now if I wanted to, I could crop tomorrow, adhere to the rule of thirds, can also change the display of your overlay by right-clicking enough first you have to have an overlay displaced. So if I right-click anywhere on the image printer overlay style, if I can switch to overlay that's displayed. So here I can now switch to our triangle overlay, right-click again, we can display the golden spiral overlay, et cetera. Let's go back to the rule of thirds overlays. So right-click again, choose Overlay style and then choose thirds from the contextual menu. So yes, with cropping, either drag and the crop handles to choose the areas that you wanted to keep or CP drink a bar k0 around the area that you want to get rid of this overlay once we've displayed it, we just kept the V key on a keyboard again. So let's move our dragon fly a little bit to the left here, and then we'll adjust our crop handles. So it's like sum. That looks pretty good. So we'll tap the Enter key on my keyboard to confirm the crop. That is how to crop it. Camera. 149. Camera Raw: Using the Adjustment Brush: In this video, we're going to be working with the adjustment brush tool. And I have the image that I have a discrete is.5 JPEG image WE worked with in the previous video. So if you'd like to follow along, you want to make sure to open that image that's located in the lesson files folder on your desktop. Soviet Adjustment Brush. What this allows you to do is to selectively modify specific areas of her photo by painting them in. Once the tool is activated, the adjustment brush panel appears on the right side of your screen containing many sliders and settings. And the adjustment brush tool is right here in the tool box. And it looks like a little paint brush. You could also tap the Kaikeyi at your keyboard to activate the adjustment brush. So let's do that. So that's top Cave. And we just see that the adjustment brush panel displays, these are all this sliders available for the adjustment brush tool. Now how this works is you adjust to adhere to these sliders here for the adjustments that you wanted to make. And then drag over the areas of the image that you wanted to modify. As you drag over those portions, the settings will then be painted on over those areas. When you're done, you can further adjust the area by moving the sliders in the adjustment brush panel. For instance, if you wanted to lighten EM image, you drag the Exposure slider to the right and then drag over the areas of the image. And then if you decide later that it's too bright, you can always drag it back down. Once you adjusted, it will only apply to those areas that you've previously drawn. So that reserve as Bao Gao to now it's nicer with the adjustment of brushes that you can have more than one adjustment on an image. For instance, I could have one adjustment is to modify this knothole over here, and another adjustment to modify the color of my dragonfly to, I don't know, just maybe we just keep the plus symbol here and that adds a new adjustment. We see that we can also tap the Enter key and our keyboard could also erase an adjustment for areas of your photo by clicking the erase tool, the dragging over those areas of the image. So let's click the Adjustment Brush icon if you haven't here just to activate the tool. And I'm going to drag the Exposure slider to about plus 0.10. Now let's drag the contrast amounted to about six, so I did a little bit of contrast to our image. Now let's scroll down a little bit until we see the sharpness Slater. And I want to add a little bit of sharpness to areas of the image. So I'm gonna draw their sharpness slider to about plus 18. So I don't want to change the size of our brush to do so, your tap, the right bracket key on your keyboard to expand your brush, or the left bracket key to decrease the size of your brush. I'm gonna make this as small as possible and tell my mouse cursor turns into a small black cross. And now let's drag over the body of the insect a couple of times to paint in our adjustments. Notice that as I drag, those areas are becoming lighter. So let's increase a saturation of those areas. Some iterative saturation slighter to the right. And those are the reds and the image are becoming a lot more intense. And I think I just want to drag this to about 41 or so. So let's tap the peak here are keyboard to view a before and after. So we have before, after, before, after. So you can see the colors are a lot more intense and saturated. So that is using the adjustment brush tool in cameras. So yes, a very handy feature for applying adjustments to selected areas of your image. 150. Camera Raw: Adding a Post Crop Vignette: In this video, we're going to look at how to add a post crop vignette to your photos and want a vignette does is adds darkening to the edges of your image, thus creating a nice effect. It also helps to draw the viewer's eyes to the center of the image. If you've already cropped your image, you can then use the postcard vignetting tool under the effects panel. So right now we have the Adjustment Brush parallel open from the last video when we were using the adjustment brush to switch to the effects, probably went to top the E key on our keyboard. And the effects panel is directly under via geometry parallel and above the calibration panel. To expand the panda, we click on the word effects and the video tool is right below the grain tool. So by adding vignetting, You can brighten or dark in the edges of your image within the constraints of your crop. Now note that this is not the same as Lens vignetting, which is something you actually don't want. And this occurs when your camera inserts dark edges around an image. There's obvious to any of your images you can try to fix this from the optics Pallier's who we click on the word optics, click the manual tab, and then he was the vignette slider to try to get rid of some of that camera vignetting. But about postcard vignetting does as Isaac and artistic lightning or darkening around the edges of the image. To route a vignette, you drag the magnetic spider to the left to darken the edges of the image. And we can see the images, the edges darkening as I Dre or dragging to the right to lie to the edges of the image. Kinda ever guessed that 19 eighties alloc, which we typically want to avoid. Now there are some additional options on the domino during this little bit to the left here, and a little vignette. Now there are some additional options for this fiery backlinks, the left printed disclosure triangle here, you can drag the midpoint slider to the left or right to specify how further written yet reaches into the image. So we can see the vignette shifting as I drag this midpoint slider. The wrongness slider will change the shape of the vignette. I mean, you can see again the vignettes shifting as I DRE tomato further hardness or softness of the edges of your written yet you'll use the feathers slider. So that was out of my drag or to the left here we end up sort of this really hard edges, which might be the Lord's that you're going far, but typically where we want to keep this softer edges. So vignetting should really be added in minimal amounts and it's best to avoid extreme dark Vig or lightening of the edges of your image. Let's see if I drink has already done. Now it's getting to the point where it's extremely noticeable, which isn't always what you want, you just what do you typically is? One, a slight a darkening of the edges to help draw the viewer's eye to the center. So it's fewer before and after a very original attempt, the peak here at a keyboard before, after, before, after. So that is how to add a vignette in camera. 151. Camera Raw: Applying a Radial Filter: In this video, we're gonna look at how to apply a radial filter to an image with the radio filter tool, what this does is allows you to use a circular gradient to create kind of a spotlight effect. This is an excellent way to bring attention to specific areas of your photo. So for that, we're going to use a different image. And I asked him about the image of our dragon fight here from the last video. So we're going to take a dive into this brings us back to Adobe Bridge. And if you're not in adobe bed, you want to open that application. And we're going to open the image named Brown Deer Park, and that's this image right here, the fourth image from the left here on my screen, we're going to right-click and choose Open in Camera. So the radial filter tool is right below the gradients tool and above the red eye removal tool. And that's this circle icon. And we see that the girls would help the J key and our keyboard to activate the tool. So let's click the icon. And once the filter is activated, you set your sliders the way that you want them and then draw an oval on the image around the area that you want to include and any adjustments you make will occur to everything outside of the circle. So I'm gonna draw a circular on this building here. And it didn't end up quite worried, wanted it. What's nice is once you've drawn your circle, you're, although you can move it to any other area of the image. So if I just click at the center here, we see that my cursor turns into a four-way arrow. It's now says no that I were in drag mode and then I can click and drag it and I can center it, said to the building here right within my circle. Can also be sizes circle by clicking on any of these deals, sizing handles, little squares around the edges and then dragging inward or outward to change the size of the circle. So as we mentioned, any adjustments we make will be applied to everything outside of the circle. So as regular exposure to the left two baby about 1.10 or so, that's Spotify the saturation as well. So but during the saturation slider to the left. So it's not quite so blue, maybe to about minus 47 or so. They're going to darken this a little bit more assorted during the exposure side or a little bit more to the left, maybe too about tour. So that looks pretty good. So you have the further slider here, and this determines how hard the edges of the Rigaud filter obese. So if I drink to the left, we can see that we end up with quite a hard edge. And typically we want to have the feather little bit to the center. Again drag a teller feathering is the way that you want. A handy feature is the ability to extend the reach of the radial filter. To do so you think it's a little brush icon and then paint on the area of the image to which you want to apply the filter. Let me increase my mouse has a bit. So if you recall it right now, it's applied to everything outside of the image. So if a wanted to darken this part right here, so I would just click here and you can see that sun exposure is now being applied to those areas of the image as well. And again, I can dark in the trees if I preferred. So let's go back to the bigger adjustments. So to do so we click the first icon here and get the brushes to add to the selected adjustment. Now if you wanted to apply the adjustments to everything inside of the circle rather than outside your uncheck the inverted checkbox. Now we can see that everything inside of the oval is dark, involve everything outside is lighter. But that's not the effect. We're going for us from McKinsey inverse checkbox to check it. So this gives you flexibility in the way that you want to work. So if you wanted to apply your adjustments to everything inside of the oval, You want to uncheck the checkbox. If you prefer to work with everything outside of the oval that he would leave the inverted box checked. There's also the Eraser tool here. And what this will do is erase from the selected adjustment. So if I click the Eraser tool and drag to the right here, you can see that that removes the adjustment for the sum of those areas. I could be able to remove the adjustment from a little bit from outside of the oval just by clicking and dragging on the image over those areas from which I want to remove the adjustment. So very cool. A friend, this filter especially comes in handy for creating a spotlight effect that highlights only specific areas of her image like it does in this case, during the exposure to a little bit more, to even bring that out further. I don't want this of reflection and the water in, so I'm going to click the Edit Selected adjust. And remember we're adding that darkening effect and we're going to pay to over these areas were H here that we had painted over before and that removes the brightness from those areas was especially nice tip of this filter is you can add up more than one to an image by tapping the Enter key and then dragging over the new area of the image. So it's tempt the Z key or a keyboard is switched to the zoom tool and deselect thereto filter. So let's view before and after every bridge. So that's before, after, before, after. So we can see how the radio filter brings out a specific error is ever image. And again, you have kind of a spotlight effect here. 152. Camera Raw: Fixing Perspective Problems: Perspective problems occur when an image comes out tilted or skewed. And this is especially common in architectural images or photographs containing vertical lines to help fix that to the upright feature under the geometry parallel here. And that's the tool is right on top of the panel. This can help correct those images with horizontal or vertical perspective distortion. So for this, we're gonna be working on a different average. So we're going to take the done button and that will save our changes and return us back to Adobe Bridge. Or if you didn't wanna save your changes, you would click the cancel button that would close camera Rome without saving or changes. Or if you wanted to do some additional work in Photoshop, you would click the open button, but we want to save our changes. And so we're gonna click done and the image W12 open is named crooked to building. That's this image right here, right next to Window Reflection, and to the left of rocket on my screen here. So I'm gonna right-click this image and choose Open in Camera. And again, this perspective tools are located under their geometry panel in the upper-right area because see we have a toolbar of various tools that we could use. So the first tool is off, which is the upper-right tools are disabled. The aid tool, the AI kind Here is the auto tool. This corrects both horizontal and vertical distortion. And this setting tries to preserve as much of the original image is possible and often provides the effect that you're looking for. So that's a good starting point to the right of Otto is level, which fixes Horizontal Distortion. Vertical fixes Vertical Distortion, though it can sometimes create a stretching effect. The next icon is full, and this provides a combination of level, vertical and auto corrections. This one, kids sometimes create strings results as it's trying to correct every thing. And the last is guided with this should drug tool or more lines are guides of your photo, a log, something that should be straight to customize the correction. Now visas to UDL gives you the effect for to what you could always fix the perspective manually to do so, we see this option here, Manual transformations, but it click the left pointing disclosure triangle, and this displays various sliders that you can adjust. So vs. you could drink the vertical slider, horizontal spider, et cetera, until the images the way that you want, I'm gonna 0, he's back out. So at the middle opera toolbar, and let's click the auto tool unless the woman CA, this applied to z auto correction to the image. And notice that we have some white areas of the image, which isn't really what we want. So let's reset this adjustment to try something else. So you've got to hold on the Alt key if you're using Windows or the Option key if you're using Mac, and then click the recent budget on the lower right corner of the window that resets the image to the way it was Ruby opened it. Let's try the level budget and that's the one to the right of the auto button. That's the third icon from the left. And I'll take level, not bad cut does a pretty good job of leveling of the images. Of course, we have thought, crop out those white areas. Let's see what these other buttons will do is to hold down the option key again and click Reset. Let's give the full adjustment to try. That's the fifth icon for the left here, Forbes or click on fall. So this correctly the perspective using that combination of level, vertical and auto. And this actually did a pretty good job. So we can make some further adjustments using the manual transformations tools. So again, if this is a displayed what it click the left printing disclosure triangle next to mandrel transformations. And what I'm gonna do is move this building a little bit to the right so that there's an equal amount of space between the building and the edges of the image. So let's double-click in the offset. Xbox might type in two. You could just drag the sliders if you prefer, until the image ends up being the way that you want. Think I'm happy with that surplus picked Done button here, the lower right corner of your screen. And that returns us to Adobe Bridge. So if you have an image is kind of off kilter, you might want to give some of the perspective tools or try to see if he could fix some of those issues. 153. Camera Raw: Using the Spot Removal Tool: In this video, you're gonna learn how to use the Spot Removal tool to remove sensor dots and other spots from your images for that. And we're going to open the image called yellowing flesh 1.jpg. And again, I'm in the Adobe Bridge applications. So you want to open that application that navigates to the lesson files folder on your desktop. So take the Window Reflection image and then we're gonna click the opening camera. I kinda give us the third icon from the right. And if you move your mouse over the icon, it'll tell you open a camera Ross, we'll click that and the image is opened and camera rom. The spot removal tool comes in handy for removing unwanted artifacts, dots, sensor, dust, et cetera, familiar images. It could even remove telephone wires. How this works is that the tool automatically assembles the pixels of the area near where you want to repair and matches the target area to the surrounding area. So this tool is best and areas where there's consistent color and texture. And its icon is located on the toolbox, which is the third icon for the top, and it looks like a Band-Aid. You see that we can also press B on your keyboard to activity. It's a tool sort for falling like of an eclipse, the Spot Removal icon. We see that when we activated or do panel displays in the rights ping, this power has two main areas, clone and he'll, which you can switch back and forth to by clicking the drop-down list here. So we see heel on clone. Most of the target poverty, we want to use the hill option that is good for fixing small areas. What this does is look, sir owned all the areas for like pixels and does a meld with the area that you want to fix. So once you've set the size, feather and opacity of your brush, then you just simply click of the dots that you want to remove, which is the target area. Or you can also paint over a small area on the image by clicking and dragging. So let me make my brush size a little bit smaller by clicking the left bracket key on my keyboard. You see if I click here, you can see that it's sampled from here. And if I don't like the area or a sample from, I could just click inside the sample area and switch to a different spot and then tap Enter to commit the change. Now the clone brush on the other hand, what this does is makes a duplicate of a specific area of the image. Again, if you don't like the era that camera sample from, you just click the circle and drink it to another area of your image. So let me click this dodge here. We see that it's submit a clone of this era. If I don't like that, I can always change the area. We can see that the target area changes as I move the circle around. But I like this area here. That looks good on tap the Enter key on my keyboard. A happy future that Billy people like is the visualized spots feature. And you'd like to read that particular little checkbox here. This creates a black and white version of her image, making it easier for you to find those unwanted spots. It doesn't work so well with visit, which because there are a lot of spots of this image. So I'm going to uncheck the box to turn off the Future. Now if you adjustment that you make doesn't look natural, especially when working with images of people tried regularly a passively slider to the left until the target area is the way that you want. So let's try removing a couple of spots from his image. So you wanna kick the type drop-down list and choose. He'll let us select this spot here, sort of a drag over it. And I think I want to fix it with the image from up here. So I'm gonna take the circle and drag this to the upper right. That looks pretty good and I'll tap Enter. Let's try to move in this bond here. That looks pretty good assemble era. So I'll tap it in turn, allows us get rid of this part here. And then I'll type enter. If I didn't do so well, so let's try it again. So I'll select the dot. This term is going to sample from over here. I'm happy with that, so I'll tab enter. So it gives you an idea of how this tool works. So again, really good for removing little specks of appear in your images. So I think I'm gonna leave this as is her kicks a done button in the lower-right corner of our window to return back to Adobe Bridge. 154. Camera Raw: Making Lens Corrections: In this video, we're going to look at how to make lens corrections. And for that we're going to open the crooked building Image Server. Following along, you want to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop in Adobe Bridge. And then we'll select that image and then click the opening camera icon. So from the optics palette here on the right pen, you can fix certain lens abnormalities, such as bullying or skewing caused by our wide-angle lenses. Also sometimes a photo might have fringes of green and red along the edges. And this is called chromatic aberration. Unfortunately, chromatic aberration isn't always easy to detect and you might not notice how to until you print the image at a 100% or zoom in on an image. So let's click the optics panel here. We see an option here, remove chromatic aberration. This is the way to get rid of those red and green fringes are on the areas of your image. Many photographers have as options set as the default value, meaning that any new images of the opening camera rock for particular camera, they'll automatically have this setting applied to them. So to set it as default, you need to first check t, use Profile Corrections box. The setup drop-down list are then choose recenter lens profile defaults. So this will apply any of the options that we've made in this panel to any new images that we open a camera. So again, there's applies all settings that you've made in the optics panel to add a new images that you opened. So you might want to 0 out any sliders in this panel before applying it as a default because you might not want to apply distortion of and yet options to every image that you open. Now if your image is distorted or if there's any lens vignetting, which is those dark areas are on the edge of your image created in camera. You can fix this as u by using the distortion or vignettes sliders. And again, they're not active until you click the US Profile Corrections checkbox. And once you do, Camera Raw should automatically detect the make, model, and profile for your camera and lens. So we can see in Berlin my option here, it do that this image was taken with an iPhone five camera, doesn't choose the correct option here from the make model and profile drop-down list. You're just chooses option yourself, I want you to do it will make those options based on your camera and lens. Now if the options under the Profile tab failed to fix those chromatic aberrations, I'm vignetting or distortion that you'll want to click the manual tablets to the right of the word profile. We see those same distortion vignette sliders. But if we click this disclosure triangle here next to the fringe, we see additional options that we can set. So if there remains some purple green fringes of the image, you want to click the eye dropper tool here and then click on those areas of the image of a green or purple. Or you could drag the slider in the panel until the images the way that you want. So yes, the optics panel good. First fixing certain lens abnormalities. 155. Camera Raw: Using the Graduated Filter: In this video, we're going to be working with the graduated filter. So for that we're going to open up another image software following along. You wanted to click file open from the main form of sharp screen there want to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. So you would click desktop in the left pane of the double-click the lesson files folder. And the name of the file we want to work with is named rock to DNG, their book thing open because it's a raw image. It opened directly in Camera Raw rather than Photoshop. So the graduated filter is the fifth. I come from the top over here, that toolbox. And we can see that it also tapped TIG key to activate the tool. And this is a favorite tool of many people, especially landscape photographers. So with the graduated filter you can edit as Pacific part of your photo, recreating the effect you get when using a neutral density gradient filter on your camera. Similar to the adjustment brush, you can brush on the changes in a gradient. And this is extra for lightening or darkening the sky, as well as for adding a bit of blue to an otherwise drabs guy like we have in this image here, sort of falling over and let's click the icon to activate it. And that's because C, the graduated filter panel appears on the right side of the screen containing several sliders and many of them we've already seen in the Basic Panel, such as exposure contrast, highlights, shadows, et cetera. Where's this parallel activity? Then drag the sliders to where your 1s m, and then you click on the image where you want the gradient to begin and then drag downward. The settings that you made in the panel will be applied as you drag down. So let's trigger attempt cider tool above minus 30. And if you recall, dragging the temperature slider to the left provides a cooling effect at in blue to the image that's decreased exposure as well, somewhere during the exposure slider to the left to about minus 1.25. So now we're ready to apply our adjustment. So I'm gonna click at the top center area of the image. And then we're going to drag downward to above the top of the trees. And if you'll hold your shift key down, that ensures we're drawing donors stray lines. So drag down to baud rate here, and we'll release the mouse button. The filter is at full strength on top when dragging downward and graduating slowly as you told towards the bottom. And don't worry if the effect isn't quite what you wanted. You can adjust the sliders after the fact until the images the way you want, for instance, or what, it adds more blue to the gradient area for during the temperature started to the left. And we can see that that changes as I drag. But I'm going to leave it as is seen as the exposure. I can darken the blue or lightened a blue by dragging the exposure that only affects the area within the gradient. Once you're happy with this, you can tap the Enter key on your keyboard to apply the change. So let's tap the Iike to return to the edit panel, we can see that our gradient has now been applied to our image. So after you have integrate into little UPENN appears in a document that you can actually just the area of the gradient gradient by dragging the pin up or down. Like was I could move this top pin down to increase the area of the top was part of the gradient. So I'm going to add another gradient, I think to this images from one, apply some blue to the water or the bottom portion of the image. So I'm gonna click the gradient icon again. And I'm going to drag the temperature slider to the left to maybe about minus 30 or so. Though, even though maybe I'll darken the exposure, little bits for gravy exposure started to the left to about 0.55. Then we wanna click on the lower bottom center of the image here. Then drag up, I'm going to hold up my shift key against her derivative straight line. You can see the gradients now apply to that portion of the image of a one of the added, two little more of the water. I can just drag this up the garden verge to increase exposure that came out a little bit too dark. Maybe I'm a little more blue. So now we have two graduated filters on the image. And you can modify either of these filters by clicking the little red dot and that activates that filter. So now any changes that we're making the panel will only be applied to the active filter, that is to say the filter that I have selected. If you wanted to modify this lower filter, I'm going to click the little dot for that filter. And our can change that filter if I so desire, can even drag this up a little further. You can also brush on the filters to selected error is ever image. First, you'll need to activate a pen by selecting it, and then you click on the little brush icon, that is a sender icon right here. Once we click here we see we have several brushed sliders which appear the size further flow. So here you can set the size of your brush as well as the feather and then the flow or the density. And again, it can use the bracket keys to trigger the size of the brush. So right bracket, mixer brush bigger, left bracket makes it smaller. So now I can drag over the errors of the image to which I want to apply the filter. We make this a little bit smaller, this brush. So we can see that as I drag a settings only maybe the panel are applied to the areas that I drag. Likewise, if we wanted to erase part of the filter, click the erase tool and then drag over the areas that you want to remove the filter from sources. I drag over the rocks and removes those pinching on adjustments that I made and symbols for down here. So if I dragged across the water, we can see the filter big removed from those areas of the image. The last time we exited the graduated filter tool in order to add a new one. But you could add another filter at any time by simply clicking the little icon, the leftmost icon here, which is create an edit adjustment. So I tap that and now we have a third filter that we can apply to our image. So you can have more than one gradient filter on your image. Phrases like I have a separate filter for those sky and another one for the water. But I wanted to delete this allows greater than at a terminal click those little dots here to select them and tap the delete key on my keyboard, and that removes that gradient from the image. Now let's take a look at the before and after this image. So I'll tap the P key on my keyboard before, after, before, after. So quite a change. So that is how to create a gradient in camera. 156. 0626 Using Color Grading: So I'm adding this video after the fact because a new feature was just released in camera Ra, which is the color grading panel. So the recent version of our camera and Lightroom, the split toning panel has now been replaced by the color grading panel. Now in the past, who were able to apply a color tint to the shadows and highlights of her photo. Or in other words, we were able to split apart the highlights and shadows it in an image and then apply a tint to them. But with the new color grading paddle comes the ability to apply a tint to our mid tones as well, allowing us to really alter the mood of an image in the process. So in this way, the color grading panel is kind of an evolution of the split toning panel. So we see this new Paola, which for you but used to be split toning is now color grading. So if we click on it to expand it, we see three color wheels. But the first thing I wanted to do and working with this image of a red flower here, the first thing I wanted to do is convert this to black and white, because an excellent views for color grading is to bring back a hint of color to the shadow is Heights had mid tones of a black and white image. So I'm gonna click the BMW button on top of the edit pane here now are able to as black and white. So again, to expand this kind of a click on the words color grading. And we see the three controls are color wheels if you're well, the top is for the mid tones, the bottom left is for shadows. On the bottom right is for adjusting highlights. So let's start with highlights. So you start by drag in this circle until you find the color that you want to use. The Likud is click to lock in that color. Now we see that when I move my mouse cursor where there's still a little circle remains in the color wheel, led his loving us know the actively selected color. So once it's locked and you can drag along the line here, C is the line as I drag, and this allows us to modify the saturation of that color. So draining towards the outer edge increases the saturation while dragging towards the inner edge decreases it. But you can also hold on the Alt or Option key as you drag Alter, who's the winner with an option of using a Mac. And this allows you to change saturation much more slowly. So allows for a more of a fine tune adjustment. But if you wanted to reset the effects of a colour will simply double-click the center of this circle and that resets all of your adjustments. So I can double-click here. So let me go back. Let's choose a color here. Maybe I'll choose this little orange color right here. Now once you've chosen your color, you can then drag the slider underneath the color wheel to triggers the luminance of that color size. We can see the brightness and darkness of that color. There's also a control outside of the color wheel seal this see this little red dot here. This allows us to change the color, but using the same percentage. Notice that the central dot here stays in the same area of this circle, or I should say the same percentage of the color wheel. I can change it by clicking on the dotted is dragging along the line joining the saturation. So we wanted to more saturated colour. Then if I drink this little outside colour circle, it's changing the color but maintaining that same percentage of saturation. So we're adjusting the hue while maintain this saturation level. Now on top of the color grading pellet here we have some icons of set of icons which allow for different ways of viewing. So the leftmost icon is the default view, and that's the view that we have here. And thus the three-way view in which we see mid tones, shadows, and highlights. Then from left to right we have shadows, and there's only displays the shadows circle. And here we can modify just the shadows of the image. And we have a couple of slides that are neither. We could modify the luminance, the blending which will blend more towards the shadows as you bring to the left and more towards the highlights as you drag to the right and then balance, which balances out all the adjustments that you've made. So we have shadows and then the next dot is the mid-term. So again, we have the big total circle color wheel. And then the next word is highlights. So this is just modifying the highlights of the image. And the last circle is global in which we're combining all three shadows, mid tones, and highlights together. And this one really allows for the least amount of flexibility. So yes, with a color grading penalty could really add some interesting cinematic effects, such as Retro or cross processing to your image. And this is one of those features with which you can have a lot of fun experimenting. 157. Camera Raw: Using the Range Masking Feature: The range masking feature is a recent feature in Camera Raw and can be found in the graduated filter and the radial filter and the Adjustment Brush panels. And what this does is allows you to select the range to which you want to apply an adjustment. And once you use any of these three tools, the graduated filter, radio filter of the adjustment brush to define a rough mask. You can then we find your sum that should using the range masking options. This comes in especially handy for masking detailed areas in your image, such as trees for instance. So if I were to apply a quick graduated filter to this image here, we can see the range masking option then becomes activated that's located on the bottom of the panel. So if I click the dropdown list, we see that we have two options, color and luminance. The color range mask allows you to sample or color to which you want to restrict the adjustment. Whereas the luminance rage mask selects pixels based on brightness. So for color, you would first out of mask using what are the three tools, the graduated filter Adjustment Brush or radio filter. Next you choose color from the range mascot drop list. And after activating the eye dropper tool by clicking on it, sample the color, by dragging over the color to which you want to restrict the adjustment. And you can have up to five different range of masking adjustments for luminance. Again, you add a masker using one of the three tools, then choose luminance from the range mass drop-down list. So let me scroll down until we see the sliders here. And then you drag the left and right luminance range slider to set the end points until the desired effect is attained. So then Camera Roll only apply the adjustments between those two values. So let's work with this a little bit. I'm about to do. These are arranged masker dustbins and we're going to open up another image. So I'm gonna click done here for the main photoshops, Greenwald Choose File Open. And I'll navigate to our lesson files folder on the desktop. And the image that I went to all print is the crooked or building data D and G. So select that and then click open. And the image is then opened new camera raw. So we're gonna start by adding a gradient filter to the image. So we'll click the gradient icon over here in the right pane, the toolbox. You can also tap the G key on your keyboard. Then we'll click at the top center of the image and hold down the shift key to triggers tree line, then drag down until the pen is situated right in the doors to about here. So because we didn't modify this slider is the greeter and tool really didn't do very much. Let's drink attempts slider to the left, maybe to about minus 80 fibers silicosis either as I drag, it adds blue to that area of the image. Next will drag the Exposure slider to the left to reduce some of these exposure. And I think I only want to go about minus 15, so just a little bit darker. And let's increase the saturation Server. Scroll down until I see the saturation slider and drag it to the right to about 30 or so and that increases the saturation. So those are the adjustments here have been made to the building as well as the sky. And that's not really what I want. So what I'm going to do is use the range Basque tool to limit our adjustments to only the blue color of the sky. So the bottom of the graduated filter panel, we wanna click their range mass drop-down list and select Color to choose the color range masking tool. Next we want to click on the eyedropper icon and that's right down here. What this does is it activates the eyedropper tool, which allows us to drag over those areas that we weren't to include with the eyedropper now active, but it rarely drink a little rectangle over the blue areas are screen and an older release my mouse button. So what this did is sampled the color to which we wanted to limit our adjustment. So the graduated filter is now only applied to the blue areas of the image. So the gradient is now only applied to the sky and not to the building. And I think we're done with this image. So it takes a done button, the lower-right corner of your screen to return us back to the main Photoshop screen. 158. Camera Raw: Adjusting Contrast using the Tone Curve: This video, we're going to work a little bit width the curve panel. So let's open up an image from our lesson files folder on our desktop. So a Choose File Open. And the image that we want to open is the ocean window dot JPEG. So a selected, they either choose Open. And because it's a JPEG image and not a ryan budget opened in Photoshop or we want to open it in camera Ross or whether choose Filter, Camera filter for the menu. Now if you enjoy working with curves in Photoshop through it, it'll be right at home with the curve paneling camera, which is located in the Edit paid or directly below the Basic Panel. Then you click directly of the word curve to expand the panel. So as I mentioned, it is similar to curves in Photoshop is just a different way of ending it. And actually be I've Benny the same sliders that we have in the Basic panel. So if I move my mouse cursor over the London because he is changes to shadows, darks, lights, and highlights. Tone curve is used as another way to add contrast here images, which you could also accomplish by using the sliders in the Basic panel. The contrast lighter, the Clarity slider, the blacks letter on the white slider. Because many people prefer using the sliders and the basic power to adjust their images. Many folks rarely used the curved panel. So again, it's all a matter of personal preference. So to falling along, let's click the second handout from the left here on top of a curve panel. And this is the point curve. This is the curve with which many people like to work as it's not quite as restrictive as the parametric tab, which is the first tab on top of the window error. But let's go back to the point curve. So the window here, the right set of the tone curve works your highlights. Whereas the left side adjusts the shadows. And the center of area of the toad curve allows you to adjust the mid tones of your photos to make an adjustment and you click the button on top of this screen, which, which is the second budget from the left, which we just did a moment ago. And you click on the curve for the area that you want to modify and then drag opera down. So we can see that the darker areas of the image modify as I drag. And now that added a point to my curve. Likewise, if I wanted to modify the highlights, I could click up here on the line and then drag up, down and only the brighter areas my image are affected. Let me undo those two curves. Now another way of adjusting the curve is by using a guided or parametric curve. And thus his first down to the left on top of a curve panel. Here could either use the curve like we did a moment ago, or who's the sliders on the bottom of the panel we see we have the highlights that lights, darks and shadows. So if I wanted to modify the highlights in the image that could drink the highlights slider to the left or right, a, b, c, the curve adjust accordingly. But we see that we only have SO farther we can go. So that's the reason that many people like to use the point curve rather than the parametric curve, because a parametric curve is a little bit restrictive. But again, it's not a matter of personal taste. Bad, though the parametric curve is somewhat restrictive, does prevent you from getting into trouble and going too far. And it's nice that as you drag the slider is the curve adjusts as well as we can see which areas of the image or modifying. And the council these. Let's go back to our straight line. Now there are also three Channel buttons here, which allows you to only adjust a specific color channel, red, green, or blue. For example, you can adjust only the contrast of the Blues by clicking the blue dot and the dreg in the curve up or down, we can see that we get a blue ten to the images I drag up and more of a yellowish tint as I drag down. Same thing for red and green. Could drag up to add records to the image or down to other greenish tint to the image. I was the green button up. We'll add green down, we'll add agendas, solar for falling along. Let's go back to the point curve tab. So click the second icon from the left, clicking the tone curve, but maybe about right here and drag down. Maybe about a quarter inch downer saw. And we can see that the image darker adds a little bit as I drag. We also are in contrast to the image pops Hello Northern, I release my mouse button. So now let's switch to the parametric tabs will click the first button on top of the panel. I will going to lighten the lights. So let's click the light slider and drag it to the right to about plus 30 or so. So you can see the brains, the bright areas, the later eras of the image. Next, we want to trigger shadows 100 to the left to decrease the shutter was a riffs will drag that to about maybe minus 40 founders Good. Under the lights a little bit to the left. That's a little too contrasty. So then we'll go down to about maybe 22 or so. So we're gonna take a look at the before and after every image. So p before, after, before, after. So quite a difference. So that is using the curve in camera rock. So just another way of adding contrast to your images and adjusting the highlights, lights, darks and shadows. So I think we're done with this image, so I'm gonna click OK. And that returns us back to Photoshop. 159. Camera Raw: Working with Grain: Another interesting effect that's available from the effects panel, and this panel over here in the right pane. And the edit pane is grain, which as a grainy looked her images. Note that this is not the same thing as digital noise, which results from shooting in low light or at a high ISO. Rather grain is a creative adjustment that some people add to their images in order to create a vintage look or to add an interesting effect to the black and white photos. To add Grant who first expand the effects panel. That's again to the edit pane. And if you don't see this tough the E key on your keyboard, you'll click on the word effects. And the great slider is the first slider in this panel. Dragging the slider to the right will add green to your image and you drag it until the great amount is where you want it. On the right side of the grand sliders, a little disclosure triangle. And if you click it, we have a couple of other additional options. We have size, roughness, and vignetting. The size slider controls the size of the grain from bigger to the right or smaller to the left with the rough the slider, you can create a blurry gray. So again, trigger the slider to the left creates kind of a barrier. Graeme here to the right creates a sharper grade. So I'm gonna reset these sliders here, server falling along. Let's drink the green slider together to above, to the right, maybe about 60. You can see that as I drag the image becomes Grenier and Grenier circuits ie the grade here if I click to zoom in. So now let's increase the size of the grains from her 50 left disclosure triangle up to the right of the grain slider. And that's Dr. let's increase the grain to about 75 of nausea is adhering to the right of the green gets larger and larger. And again, ever during the roughness slider to the left we see we get a blurry or grade. And to the right we get a sharper Graham, I'm a covenant zeros slender rod to keep it at 50. So that is how to add green to an image. So if you decide later on that you don't want this grain, that you prefer to have the image without the grain effect. Or you need to do is double-click on the grand starter to 0 if that slight on the zeros out everything and removes the grade from that image. 160. Camera Raw: Reducing Noise: Camera rise noise reduction feature comes in handy to remove artefacts which can show up in your images if you're shooting at a higher ISO. Now typically you don't tend to notice image noise unless you're zoomed in really close on an image. So unless you're planning on printing an image or including it as part of your portfolio, you really don't need to worry about noise too much with online images as most of the time, it isn't very normal civil. If you do want to reduce the noise in your image, however, you can do so for the noise reduction area in the Detail panel, sorry the adage pane here we click the word detail to expand the detail panel. And the noise reductions. Titer is the second slider in this panel. Usually a wanna do, you're sharpening first in order to get an idea about the photo wall look like. Also Sharpening sometimes adds noise to your image as well. There are two types of noise that you could correct foreign Camera Raw, and those are luminance noise and colored noise. So if you see red, green, and blue dots in your image when you're zoomed in, then you have colored noise. Colored noise. That's fairly easy to get rid of. You just drink the color slider to the right until indoors is gone. And the color slider, the hidden option or noise reduction. So click the deaf parting disclosure triangle next to the noise reduction slider. And then Greg, the colour noise reduction is farther to the right until the noises gun. Now be careful not to drag this fight or too far to the right. Otherwise you might end up desaturating your image. Now if you see graininess in your image, this is luminance noise, which can reduce by dragging the noise reduction slider. Now no to that ISO drag of the noise reduction slighter to the right, the image begins to blur, losing some of its sharpness. You can counteract this by using the Detail slider, which is the kids started directly under noise reduction. This letter helps to bring back some of the detail along the edges. So often you have subcategories reduction Stoddard land during the Detail slider until the images the way you want it. So you might need to play around a bit with the noise reduction in detail sliders until you find the ideal combination. You kinda have to figure out an in-between some of the detail isn't the blurred or too soft and detail. We'll bring back some of those edges. Now there's a third site or hear the contrast starter. But I further, this really doesn't do much of anything. So I typically leave this B. So let me 0 out the noise reduction sliders here. We'll work on this a little bit together. I got to work in with a monkey delta D and G Image.all raw image that's located and the lesson files folder of your desktop. Let's start by clicking the zoom drop-down list. And let's look at the lower left corner of the window. So click the zoom list or choose 100% from the list that zooms the image up to a 100%, though it's tough the H Quito keyboard to activate the enhanced slider that allows us to pan around and the image of soup and a little bit more even lets try 200. So here can really see some of the noise in his image once we're zoomed far in. Next, we want to expand the Detail panel, so I'll click the word detail to expand it. And we can see that there's not really a lot of car noise. That's mainly granny noise here. So that's luminance. Or as we have so much during that noise reduction slighter to the right or miss as we see as our dreg several noise because to disappear. So let's drag this to maybe about 65 or so. So you can see though that did reduce some of the noise of the image, but also it reduced the sharpness of the image as well, which is not necessarily what we want. So the image isn't quite as sharp as it was. So let's drink the detail slighter to the right to bring back some of the sharpness. So let's go to about baby 70 or so. And we're still pretty good with the noise. So yeah, other detail brought back some of that sharpness that we lost when using the noise reduction slider. So now let's take a look at the before and after of his image or to have the P key on our keyboard before, after, before, after. So quite a difference. So let's zoom back go to by clicking the zoom drop-down list and choosing Fricton view from the menu. And I think we're done with this image. I'm gonna click the Done button to return us to the main Photoshop window. 161. Camera Raw: Sharpening an Image: If the edges in your image aren't quite as crisp as you'd like. You can use cameras sharpening slider to add contrast to the image judges. And the sharpening slider is located over here, the Detail panel. So again, you attempt the E key on your keyboard to display the adage pane and then click detail, the sharpening centers or the first set of sliders in the panel. Solar sharpening slider feature enhances the details I've an image by increasing the focus of the blurry areas, camera Rob sharpens only the edges of the image, so thus preserving the overall smoothness. Usually a 100% zoom is enough to see what's sharpen, what's not. So there are some people known as pixel peacekeepers who'd like to blow an image. I've rarely big to see if the image is sharp or not, or to see if there's noise in the image. Oh yeah, pixel papers, but almost no type veer image at a 100% or do you get an idea if I need to apply some sharpening? So at sharpening does is basically adds contrast to the edges. Now when textures squiggly lines or halos appeared to image, that's a sign of over sharp earnings. So if you see any of those artifacts, you want to drink their sharpening down a bit. Now by default, camera raw adds a bit of sharpening to all of your raw files. It doesn't do this, but the JPEG photos, however, a sharpening is typically already applied in camera. Another sharpening slider does contain some additional hidden features. You want to take the left pointer disclosure triangle to display the extra options. So where you have the marion starter which is sharpening. So you're just drag this slider to the right to increase sharpening or to the left to decrease sharpen. And so the slider will fight the edges, then add contrast and texture to those edges with the radius slider, you can specify how far outside of the edge capital RA is to apply the sharpening, I'd find that you typically don't want this idea higher than 1.3 or 1.4 as Goring any a hierarchy resulted over sharpened images. So I usually give this out of all wild 1.1.2 mainly. Next is the Detail slider. And this slider allows you to specify a hub. Many of the edges will be sharpen. And the lowest setting camera Raul only sharpens the extreme contrast the edges in an image. If your drag it too far to the right, the result can be a lot of really bad texture, especially on the skin. With this letter turned down low detail is only applied to detail areas. That is to say stuff that looks contrasty as you increase the details site or it will then start to add sharpening to other areas of her image. If you add too much, you'll end up adding detail to the sky, which is something you really don't want. So yes, be careful with the Detail slider is it's very easy to get into trouble with it. Now the last tighter in this area is the masking slider. And this slider hydrolysis sharpening from smoother surfaces such as the sky or skin. So much you can do is hold over the altar Option key. And then as you drag, dark areas will appear or the sharpening is being masked, reserve is always a 100%. There's not much of a difference at all because we're masking out everything or we're hiding sharpening from everything. You can also selectively apply sharpening only two specific areas of your image by using the adjustment brush tool. And thus this tool right over here on the right pane and the toolbox here. And we've already worked with us a little bit in previous videos so far to rate the tool, the sharpening feature is located down here under sharpness. So what I can do is increase the sharpness and then drag over those specific areas of the image that I want to sharpen. So this way you're not applying sharpening to the entire image, but only to those specific areas over which who brush. So the image that I have in this screen here was snowy bridge Dante, JPEG is a JPEG image. So if you'd like to follow along, you want to open this image is located and listen files folder on your desktop. So I opened his image from Adobe Bridge so you can open there. There'll be bridged application. Then right-click the image, and then choose Open in Camera rock. So then you'll want to click on the Detail panel and it's located down here in the editor page. So I'll pick up the word detailed. So we'll start out by dragging them sharpening stone or to the right. And let's go maybe about 50 or so. So I actually want to drag the radius slider to the right. So maybe I'll go about 1.2. And as I mentioned, you don't wanna go too far to the right with this. And again, what this does is increases how far outside of the edge camera is to apply the sharpening. So let's take a look at the before and after this image. So it's half of the peak key on our keyboard before, after, before, after serving the Saudi want additional sopping. It can again drag the slider to the right, before, after, before, after. So you can really see how the details of the image are really brought out by the sharpening. So I think I'm done with this image. So I'm gonna click the Done button to apply our changes and we turn back to Adobe Bridge. 162. Camera Raw: Using Presets: In this video, we're going to learn how to apply quick adjustments to our images using presets. And for that, we're going to open the image named monkey that D and G, And that's located in the lesson files folder on our desktop. So from the Photoshop main screener matures File Open. Then we'll click on the monkey data D and G foul. And again, if you're not here, you need to navigate to the lesson files folder on your desktop. And then I will click open because awry imageable Oprah directly in camera. So the presets panel provides a way to save our group of image adjustments and then apply them to other photos. Once you create or add a preset Through the presets panel, it will remain there ready to be used whenever you need it. The presets icon is located right over here in the toolbox, and that's this second icon from the bottom, looks like a couple of intertwined circles. And we see that we could also press the Shift P keystroke combination to display the panel. So let's click the icon on top here is a set of default presets. And the presets are grouped by category. So we see we have color, creative black and white. We have default presets, curve grade, optics, sharpening and renewing the house, the presets down here, which are actually presets that I added or purchase myself and actually installed them in Lightroom, but they also are available and camera. To review the presets and oppressive category, we click the right printing disclosure triangle. Because see all of the presets for that particular category. And again, any pieces that you add to Lightroom will also appear in this panel. Now as highly as you're going to easily get a preview of the presets just by moving your mouse pointer over the presets. And the presets is temporarily applied to that image. So you can get an idea of what it will look like to apply a press edges, click the preset, and the President is then applied to the image. Once you've applied it free says you can then further before and after of the image by tapping the P key on your keyboard, Serbia before, after, before, after. If you decide that you don't just like the adjustments can always press the command z key if you're using a Mac or Control Z of using windows to undo the preset. So since I'm using a Mac, I'm gonna press Command Z, and that removes the preset from the image. Now once you've applied oppress a twin image, you can still tweak the settings, adjusting the sliders and the various panels to the images the way the two lungs, for instance, I could tap command one to display the Basic Panel. And then over here I can still adjust the exposure, contrast highlights, et cetera. So consider presets kind of a starting point, and then he can adjust further from there. So let's go back to the presets panel. So yes, many people use presets only as a starting point, and then use the sliders and the other panels to adjust the image to their liking. So let's return back to the presets panel can also create your own precepts every soul choose to do so. You select an image, make all of the adjustments and the various panels until the image is the wether you want. Then you open the presets panel and it takes a little three dots and then choose creates preset. So here we see all of these various settings are check. What you want to do now is uncheck all of the settings except for those you want to include in the new preset. For example, if the only adjustments that I made at the Basic panel were the exposure on contrast, I could uncheck this little checkbox X two basic and just check the exposure and contrast boxes. So only those settings will be saved with my new preset. And they could uncheck everything else except for those. And maybe I'll keep the sharpening check as well. Let's say out of some basic sharpening to the image, center would provide a name for my preset and then click okay, so I'm gonna cancel over here. Let me reset this image. So if for follow on and again, you want to click the presets icon or use the Shift P keystroke combination. And we're going to take a look at some of the creative process, that is to say the presets and the creative categories for where to click the disclosure triangle to the left of the word creative. Let's move our balls procedure over some of these pieces together. The idea of what it would look like if we apply them to our image. So you can see the center image adjusting as we move our mouse pointer that's suspended there, black and white categories. So we'll click on the disclosure triangle next to b and w. And again, let's move our mouse procedure and we can see the various Black and White Presets. I kinda like this black and white selenium tones. Let's click on that. And that applies the preset to an image. And on top of the pellet here we have the favorites panel. And these are presets that I use offered are like that I want easy access to. So if I decided that I liked this delicate right slowly and Bhutan there we just added image here. I could right-click in the panel and then choose Add to Favorites. So now that preset lives in our favorites category for easy axis, if I wanted to remove are present for favors and we can just right-click it and then choose removed from favorites. Now if there are presets that I want to hide, perhaps I have so many presets that my presets panel is getting cluttered. I can remove presets from viewer. And to do so, we've got again click those little three dots at the top of the panel and we choose managed presets. So here I can uncheck any presets that I don't want to display in the prisons pain. If I wanted to hide the default presents, I could uncheck the boxes, the defaults and click OK. And now we see that the, the faults category is no longer displayed because it could always get it back by clicking the three dots again, choosing managed presets and then a clipping edge to restore it and looks like okay. And defaults is now back. So that is using presets and camera. 163. Camera Raw: Creating Snapshots: And the snapshots panel, you can save a snapshot of your camera Ross settings for a photo at a particular point in time. So you can revert to a delayed or on the snapshots panel is right over here. It's the third icon from the bottom. And it looks like several sheets of paper stuck together. And we see, but could also press the Shift S keystroke combination to display the panel. So if you know that you went to experiment a bit with some settings than he might want to take a snapshot of the current image state first. So this way you could always returned to that version of the image by clicking this snapshot state in the snapshots panel. And we don't have any here yet. And you can have as many snapshots as you want. So if you're following along again, you'll want to click the snapshots icon here or it press shift us. To create a new snapshot. We click the little icon on the upper right corner of the panel, and this displays a new snapshot dialogue sought to do then is provide a name for this snapshot at then click OK. So since I have a black and white preset applied to this image, I'm gonna name this black and white. And then we'll click OK. Now we can see that that snapshot has been saved in the panel. So let's go back to our presets panel. So click the precedence icon. Apply a different preset to this affected a lot to apply a car preset. So under the color category, the field and see if you wanted to click the disclosure triangle to the left of the word color, I'm going to apply the vivid preset to this. Next, we're good to go to the Basic panel. So I'm going to tell the E key on my keyboard, I'm from out of the basic parallel, but I'm going to do is increase the exposure of the image. And I'm going to go to about 0.80 or so. So after making my Jefferson's had a sad, you know, I don't really like the way this image it looks. I want to go back to the way it was immediately after I had applied that black and white precinct to it. So we're going to click the stop shut icon to return to a snapshots panel. And then we'll click the black-and-white snapshot WE save. And that reverts to the student the Imager was once we took this snapshot. So yes, if you'd like to experiment a little bit, was the images that he can take a snapshot at each step of the process. And you can quickly jump back to a former student of the image at any time by clicking on the snapshot. So I think we're done with this image. So I'm gonna click the Done button that returns us back to the main Photoshop screen. 164. Camera Raw: Rotating Images: In this video, we're going to look at how to rotate an image and Camera Raw. And the rotate feature is located under the crop panel. Now that being said, I wanted to print something out. So if you open a JPEG image from Photoshop into Camera Raw, you may notice some of the features are missing. For example, we see we don't have the crop icon here. If that happens to you, what you need to do is open the image from within Adobe Bridge rather than from within Photoshop. So again, no crop. So let me cancel out of here and let's go to Adobe Bridge. So what we want to do is over the image named rotate dot JPEG in Camera Raw. So I'll right-click it and then choose Open in Camera. And now we see we have the crop I caught in our Tools panel. So yes, if you don't see the crop icon, you want to open it and go be bridge rather than Photoshop. So rotate. So if you're ready to rotate the image, you can do so right from the crop ET panel. So I'll click on the crop icon and we have a couple of Rotate icons right here. The first icon, that leftmost icon is the rotate to left icons. So if I click it, we can see that the image rotates 90 degrees to the left. And each time I click it, I'll rotate 90 degrees. Can also tap the L key on your keyboard, and that will do the same thing. Oh, and I'll end on. The second icon. On the left is the rotate right icon, so that we can see that the image now rotates 90 degrees to the right. It can also flip a photo horizontally or vertically, and that's what this next two icons are. So this comes in handy. It would take a picture of something that contains text and the text comes on backwards, such as when you try to read texts reflected in the mirror. So to flip an image horizontally, you will click the third icon from the left here. And that flips the image horizontally to favorite image vertically, you would use the most icon here. And we can see that that flips the image vertically. But what I wanted to do is rotate this image so that the sign is no longer upside down. So I'm going to talk to the R key on my keyboard to rotate right. So for topper once 90 degrees to the right, tap it again, 90 degrees to the right, and the images now up right? So I'm happy with this from an affix, a done button to return us back to Adobe Bridge. 165. Camera Raw: Fixing Red Eye: In this video, we're going to look at how to fix red eye phenomenon over the image named read i dot to JPEG for the lesson files folder Desktop. So from Adobe Bridge rows select the image, right-click and choose Open in Camera. So a feature that comes in handy from time to time is the red eye tool, which allows you to quickly and easily remove red eye from photos with one click. The appearance of red eyes in photos occurs when the camera flash or some other bright light source is reflected from the retina to read I told is located right over here in the Tools Panel. And thus the fourth icon from the bottom here. And we simply can also press the shift E keystroke combination to display the panel. So let's click the icon. So to remove red eye from a photo, you simply drag completely around the eye, making sure to include part of the face so that a selection is created around the, around the eye. So I'm gonna drag, drag a little marquee selection or on the island I release my mouse button. Okay, see a camera tries to remove the red eye. Now if the darkening effect spills over too much into the surrounding arrows, you can reduce the percentage of the pupil size for the red eye correction panel is the pupil appears to dark, that you'll want to lower the darker percentage just by dragging a dark and to the left. So the pupil is not quite so black. I think I see, I still see a Tinto red around here. So I'm gonna bring the pupil size to the right to increase the size of the pupil. And let's do the same thing with the other eyes. Have a drink and Mark He box around the nouns right eye, and that applies, right? I filtered to that eye as well. And I was tempted Zi Qi turned to zoom mode and now I can see the image with the red eye applies. So let's look at the before and after this or tap the Peking and a keyboard before, after, before, after. So again, to apply the red eye to an image, let's say it was, don't know a 100%, you'll want to zoom wherever the image. So what we did here, we were Zuber to almost 400%. So zooming in on an image allows us to get a good look at the effects of the red eye tool. So right now it doesn't happen too often, but when it does, it's nice to know that if there is a tool that can help take that out for you. So think though about dozen songs, it's a done button to return us back to Adobe Bridge. 166. Camera Raw: Removing Camera Raw Adjustments: So nice thing about camera era is that it's non-destructive. That is to say, you can return to the original state of our raw image even after you've closed and save the file. We've already seen that you can hold down the option key when working on an imaging camera raw to reset the sliders to the original state before you begin working on the average. However, if you close and reopen the file and camera are raw and then try to reset those same sliders. You'll see that the option is no longer available. And that's because the recent option is only available for the, the active session. Now, at any point, should you decide you want to return to the original state of the image before any camera Raj adjustments. It could do so from Adobe Bridge. So I'm going to W Bridge right now and we see the little icon in the upper right corner of an image. This lets us know that we've made cavalry adjustments to the image editor. And here we see that it'll crop icon as well. So the leftmost icon here lets us know that we've edited the image, such as added adjustments from the Basic Panel. Whereas the little crop icon lets us know that, uh, we've actually crop the image. So to remove all Camera Raw Adjustment is select the image and then choose Edit. To develop settings. Then choose clear settings from the menu. So if you're following along as clicks, the cricket building image right here, we can see that we've made an adjustment to this image and we see a preview of the image of the right pane here. So this is the image there'll be straightened and added a little blue to the sky. So let's remove those camera adjustments. So we'll choose Edit part to develop settings and then choose clear settings. We can see that the adjustment icon is now gone and the old version of the image displays in the preview pane. Now you can also do so for within camera. So I'm gonna go to Photoshop here. I have this image Open Camera Raw. To do so, we needed to return back to Kamaroi defaults. So I'm gonna take the three little dots here that's located in the Tools Panel and then choose reset to default from the contextual menu. And we've worked this a little bit in previous videos or click receptive default that removes those Camera Raw adjustments that we made. That I'm going to undo that. I'm gonna go back to my adjustments. And yes, so that is how to remove camera adjustments. And easiest way to do it is from Adobe Bridge, just select the image and then edit. Develop settings. Claire servings. 167. Camera Raw: Saving an Image in a Different Format: Now we're going to take a look at how to save images from a camera raw to a different file format. And to do so, we're going to work with the flower named ready Dutch flower dot d and g, a raw file. So if I'm adobe bridge, we ought to right-click the image and then choose Open in Camera. So if you're going to be sharing your images with others or uploading them to the web. You'll most likely need to convert the image into a different file format, such as JPEG and tiff or Photoshop. To do so, you take the convert unsavory image icon and that's right over here in the upper right corner of our screen. And then make your selections from this Save Options dialogue. So we see we have several options here. We can change the folder where the files to be located. To do so, we click the Select folder button and then we would navigate to the folder where we want to store the file. The second section here is the file naming area. And from here, you can specify how a file has to be named. So right now we're naming it with a document name and the month dates a year after it. The exemple area here displays what the name is going to look like. So if I click this first JOB DO list here, then choose document name. You see that the document name is now in all caps. Likewise, I could start with the name with the month, day, and year. And of course that is not a good twice because we have the second part here, but I could just change this part to a serial letter. So as you can see in the example area of followed BY named July 20th of 2020, a with a two-digit month. Twitter's a day or two digit year. And I'm gonna go back to the document name. So I'm gonna choose documents name from the list and I'm gonna go back to month, day, year. So from the formats section you specify this save Format, sorry, now we see it's being saved as a JPEG. We could also save it as a digital negative, which is the a, D and G format, will be saved as a raw file, can also save it as a TIF PhotoShop or a PNG file. Blow from our, we have the metadata sexual. You'd choose which metadata to occlude with the following, we have a couple of options. Copyright, cooperate, a contact info, all except for camera, all camera and camera info or all, we can set the quality from the quality dropped TO list here, low, medium, high or maximum. Keep in mind that the better the quality, the larger the file size. And here we have a color space. The default is Adobe RGB, which is usually what you want to keep out, keep it up as you're getting your file printed professionally, they prefer a different color space. The immense size of Gary allows you to resize your image when you save it to a specific width and height. So click the resize to fit box, and then you can add to the dimensions in the width and height boxes, as well as bonafide the resolution if you so choose. And the last section is the output sharpening. Many people like to play a little bit of output sharpening for every image that's they save. So to do so we would click the sharpen far, then choose screen glossy paper mache paper. I typically sharpened for a screen and leave the amount at standard Sama cancel here. So for falling a lot, let's click the Save or convert icon here. And for the destination drop-down list we wanna, we wanna choose Save and Save location. What this will do is save the image in the original location. That has to send the location where it is located right now. And I want to save this for former, don't wanna save this and jpeg formats. So we want to ensure that JPEG is dissipated the format box for the extension, we can choose to have an uppercase or lowercase JP. Now if I chosen at the other options here such as a tip for instance, we see that that changed the file format of the image as well. But we want JPEGS are going to choose lowercase j picked from the list. So for file naming rather than the document name, but I want to give it a customer name, so I'm just going to select the text. So in the first dropdown list, and I'm going to type in my underscore flower nervous, that's the example text changed to reflect what the file name will look like. So we have my underscore flower followed by the month, day, and year, all it two-digit format. Again, we can see the other options available for the second part of the phone M by I am going to leave this as is with the month, day and year. And I think that about now that's what I'm going to click save. And what that did is save the file with the new name and JPEG format. So I'm gonna click done here. You see the image has now been saved in unless and files folder with CFL naming that we specified. So that is how to save a file in a different format with a different name, a different location from within Camera Raw. 168. Camera Raw: Merge to HDR: Hdr, or high dynamic range, involves merging three or more different exposures into a single shock. Or HDR is especially suited for landscape photos, where you have a lot of contrast between the sky and land, as well as soon as taken in low light. Now the original photos are taken a different of metered exposures, such as R minus 20 and plus two. So we see we have three different images here of the same scene. And this was darker as it was a little bit lighter and then this is this was lighter still. So taking the original photos at different metered exposures is usually accomplished by city your camera to auto bracketing mode. And HDR really allows you to capture a wider variety of tones at an image, thus balancing the shadows and highlights using cameras HDR feature, you then put those individually images together and highlight the best parts of each image. Now in the past, you would have to go to Photoshop or use a third-party application such as photo matrix pro in order to merge multiple images into a single HDR image, but can now do self directly from Adobe Bridge. So the only way we would do this would be o to open up the images in Photoshop. So you would choose File Open, selects the images that I want to open, and then choose Open. And then with images only Bu Choose File, automate, merged HDR pro, selects the images you've been to Open, et cetera, et cetera. This is considered a legacy methods are probably won't be in Photoshop forever. So ideally, you want to do this from Camera Raw. So he counseled back out of here. I'll go back to Adobe Bridge, sort of following along and we're selected three images and camera that we are good to use to create an HDR image that's going to be South Dakota one, hold under Shift key to South Dakota to and then South Dakota three, that will collect the opening camera Ri accomplishes this icon right up here, the third icon from the right. So a filmstrip evolve the Open images displays on the left side of our screen. Notice that as I move my mouse pointer over any of the images, couple of icons up here. One is that to save and convert icon that we worked with in a previous video. But the next icon consists of three dots, which displays flyout menu. When we click it down here we have a couple of options merged to HDR, merge to panorama, merged HDR panorama. Those options are grayed out because we only have one image selected. So to create an HDR image, we first need to select all of the images that are gonna make up the HTTR. So I'm gonna select the first image in the film strip. Hello, my Shift key and select the last image. This selects all three images. So now I'll move, but most printed over here to this selected images and then click the three dots would it appears. Then we choose merge teach DR. Another. We can also use the altar option plus M keystroke combination. So I'll take merged HDR. So the first thing cabaret rod does is it displays a preview of the merged image. Now if you did not use a tripod where new shop the images, you want to ensure that the aligning images checkbox is checked. Also the second option, apply auto settings will automatically apply tonsil rings to the image so you can see what it would look like without it selected. And then with selected also if there was any movement when the photos were taken, such as leaves blowing in the wind or boat's moving, that you'll want to choose an option from the D goes to drop-down list here. And what this does is helps remedy any ghosting that occurred during the movement. So you can choose low, medium, or high. Since there really wasn't any movement when I took this image, I'm going to leave this as off. So once we have chosen our options from the preview window, we are ready to merge our images so that it makes like merge sort. We need to provide a name for a new merged image. So I'm just going to call this South Dakota dash HDR. So I'm happy with that. We'll see but adolescent files folder and then click Save. So notice that we know how for Open images in our film strip here, what's the last one being the merchant image that we created. So what that did was took the best parts of each of these three and merge them together into a new image. And again, you can make any adjustments from the Basic panel or any of the other paddles in the Edit paid. So I think I've done with this image. I'm gonna click the Done button here. And that is how we create a merged image in camera. 169. Camera Raw: Merge to Panorama: If you have several images that you want to combine, you can use camera RAS panorama feature, and this feature now comes standard Camera Raw. No more needed to jump into Photoshop to accomplish this. The old way to do this was again in Photoshop. You would choose the file automate photo merge. Then are the files that you want to use and then choose one of the options. But this is considered a legacy way of doing things, which means it's probably good to disappear at some point. So you should use the option of camera rather than Photoshop. Solve it, see a 100 do that, subbing adobe bridge over here. So the first step involves selecting the images that you would want to stitch together. Now when shooting the images that you'd eventually wanted to make it to a panorama, you wanted to try to overlap the content between them, maybe about 20% or so. And this makes it easier for camera errata, analyze the contents, images of them, blend them seamlessly into one continuous image. So we'll start by opening the images that are great to make up our panorama. Sir, I have three images. Hair bridge, one, bridge to umbrage three, which is right over here. So we want to click on the first image of bridge one, next one, hold on the command key. If you're using a Mac or Control cave using Windows and select the other images. And this allows you to select out non adjacent images, that is to say, images that are not next to each other. So again, hold on the command or control key, dislike bridge two, then bridged three. I can see the right pane here. The three images that we have selected. Nox will choose File Open and camera, or we could use command or control are. And again, we can see the images that we have opened here on the film strip. So the first thing we wanna do is select all of the images in the film strip here, because these are the three images that make up our panorama. So I'm gonna move my mouse pointer over it and the images clicks a little 3.times. Kinda then choose, Select All. Now all three of the images are selected. So next we're going to click the little icon again, the three dots. And from the contextual menu water choose merge to panorama. So this displays a panorama merged preview window. And from here we have a few options. The first is that projection options. And there are three settings here, spherical, cylindrical, or a perspective. It's a majority of the TAG. Spherical will be the option that you wanted, which is the first option here. Notice that when cameras stitch the images together, we ended up with some white areas around the image to fix that, the outer crop feature here will remove any white or is re-image. Note however, that when you do so, it will also crop out areas of the image which may not be what you want. So another option then is the boundary work feature. Now this will eliminate the white areas of the image without cropping. And in order for it to do so, you need to drink it all the way, typically to a 100%. Now the boundary work letter can sometimes cause problems as what it does is warps the photo, which can sometimes produce unexpected results, especially with objects such as trees. So in that case, you might want to give the fill edges option a trie. And this is our newcomer to camera, will fill edges does is uses content. They'll wear a technology officials put available in Photoshop for quite awhile. So what's this means is Camera Raw, we'll fill in those white areas without cropping or warping the photo. And I typically find that fill edges as the most desirable option given that it doesn't crop or warp the image. Another option available for the window here is the apply auto settings option. And this is pretty much the same thing as clicking the auto feature. And the Basic panel said we'll just apply some basic auto adjustments to your image. Survive uncheck edge. You can see what it looks like without it being applied and then check it to apply it. I think you hit as a pretty good job of applying some basic tons settings to the image. And again, you can always make some adjustments later on in the Basic Panel yourself. So once we're happy with the way it looks in the preview window here, we then click merge to perform the merge. So just like we saw with the HDR, we need to provide a name for the final image now with the name of this to just be bridged dash panels or deletes Z dash three portion of the name here. And it tells us it's going to store in the lesson files folder, and that is fine. If you wanted to store it in a different folder, we would click the drop down arrow here and then navigate to the location where we want to save the new image. But I'm happy with the lesson files folder, so I will then click Save, and we now have a new panorama of our image. And again from the basic parallel, we can adjust the exposure free like just the texture clarity, et cetera, even going onto our fixed panel. And then I add an odd vignetting to the image of so desired. I'ma leave this as is. So let me zoom down a little bit to get to see the entire image on our screen. So that is how to create a panorama and camera. So I think I'm done here, so I'm gonna click the Done button to save our changes and return us back to Adobe Bridge. 170. Thank You: Hello, right, you did it. He barrier to the end of our Adobe Photoshop up to speed. Congratulations, this is a final video in this course and a truly hope that you enjoyed this class. Have funder useful. You've learned a lot of this tax, but we definitely have covered a lot of materials at a hope that it met your expectations. They're also hopes that you may have had it a little bit of fun from it to the class as well. You now have an impressive set of skills to help you master your photo energy time. Now we're really helped me out if you'd leave a review of this course, has really helped students to discover the class. And again, thank you so much for taking this course. Perhaps we'll be seeing each other again in future courses.